Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.255

adequate guards, in accordance with the suspended equipment in the event § 1910.219 of this part. of trolley failure. (5) Shields. The hazard of flying (4) Switch guards. All initiating sparks shall be, wherever practical, switches, including retraction and dual eliminated by installing a shield guard schedule switches, located on the port- of safety glass or suitable fire-resistant able welding gun shall be equipped with plastic at the point of operation. Addi- suitable guards capable of preventing tional shields or curtains shall be in- accidental initiation through contact stalled as necessary to protect passing with fixturing, operator’s clothing, etc. persons from flying sparks. (See Initiating switch voltage shall not ex- § 1910.252(b)(2)(i)(C) of this part.) ceed 24 volts. (6) Foot switches. All foot switches (5) Moving holder. The movable hold- shall be guarded to prevent accidental er, where it enters the gun frame, shall operation of the machine. have sufficient clearance to prevent (7) Stop buttons. Two or more safety the shearing of fingers carelessly emergency stop buttons shall be pro- placed on the operating movable hold- vided on all special multispot welding er. machines, including 2-post and 4-post (6) Grounding. The secondary and weld presses. case of all portable welding trans- (8) Safety pins. On large machines, formers shall be grounded. Secondary four safety pins with plugs and recep- grounding may be by center tapped sec- tacles (one in each corner) shall be pro- ondary or by a center tapped grounding vided so that when safety pins are re- reactor connected across the sec- moved and inserted in the ram or plat- ondary. en, the press becomes inoperative. (d) Flash welding equipment—(1) Ven- (9) Grounding. Where technically tilation and flash guard. Flash welding practical, the secondary of all welding machines shall be equipped with a hood transformers used in multispot, projec- to control flying flash. In cases of high tion and seam welding machines shall production, where materials may con- be grounded. This may be done by per- tain a film of oil and where toxic ele- manently grounding one side of the ments and metal fumes are given off, welding secondary current circuit. ventilation shall be provided in accord- Where not technically practical, a cen- ance with § 1910.252(c) of this part. ter tapped grounding reactor connected (2) Fire curtains. For the protection of across the secondary or the use of a the operators of nearby equipment, safety disconnect switch in conjunc- fire-resistant curtains or suitable tion with the welding control are ac- shields shall be set up around the ma- ceptable alternates. Safety disconnect chine and in such a manner that the shall be arranged to open both sides of operators movements are not ham- the line when welding current is not pered. present. (e) Maintenance. Periodic inspection (c) Portable welding machines—(1) shall be made by qualified maintenance Counterbalance. All portable welding personnel, and a certification record guns shall have suitable counterbal- maintained. The certification record anced devices for supporting the guns, shall include the date of inspection, the including cables, unless the design of signature of the person who performed the gun or fixture makes counterbal- the inspection and the serial number, ancing impractical or unnecessary. or other identifier, for the equipment (2) Safety chains. All portable welding inspected. The operator shall be in- guns, transformers and related equip- structed to report any equipment de- ment that is suspended from overhead fects to his supervisor and the use of structures, eye beams, trolleys, etc., the equipment shall be discontinued shall be equipped with safety chains or until safety repairs have been com- cables. Safety chains or cables shall be pleted. capable of supporting the total shock load in the event of failure of any com- Subpart R—Special Industries ponent of the supporting system. (3) Clevis. Each clevis shall be capable AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu- of supporting the total shock load of pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29

695

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00705 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.261 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s (4) Other standards. The following Order Nos. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR standards, which are incorporated by 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6– reference as specified in § 1910.6, shall 96 (62 FR 111), or 5–2007 (72 FR 31159), as ap- be considered standards under this sec- plicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. tion: § 1910.261 Pulp, paper, and paper- (i) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel board mills. Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure Vessels, including addenda 1969. (a) General requirements—(1) Applica- (ii) Building Exits Code for Life Safe- tion. This section applies to establish- ty from Fire, NFPA 101—1970. ments where pulp, paper, and paper- (iii) Safety in the Handling and Use board are manufactured and converted. of Explosives, IME Pamphlet No. 17, This section does not apply to logging July 1960, Institute of Makers of Explo- and the transportation of logs to pulp, sives. paper, and paperboard mills. (b) Safe practices—(1) Lockouts. De- (2) Standards incorporated by reference. vices such as padlocks shall be pro- Standards covering issues of occupa- vided for locking out the source of tional safety and health which have power at the main disconnect switch. general application without regard to Before any maintenance, inspection, any specific industry are incorporated cleaning, adjusting, or servicing of by reference in paragraphs (b) through equipment (electrical, mechanical, or (m) of this section and in subpara- other) that requires entrance into or graphs (3) and (4) of this paragraph and close contact with the machinery or made applicable under this section. equipment, the main power disconnect Such standards shall be construed ac- switch or valve, or both, controlling its cording to the rules set forth in § 1910.5. source of power or flow of material, (3) General incorporation of standards. shall be locked out or blocked off with Establishments subject to this section padlock, blank flange, or similar de- shall comply with the following stand- vice. ards of the American National Stand- (2) Emergency lighting. Emergency ards Institute, which are incorporated lighting shall be provided wherever it by reference as specified in § 1910.6: is necessary for employees to remain at (i) Practice for Industrial Lighting, their machines or stations to shut A11.1—1965 (R–1970). down equipment in case of power fail- (ii) Scheme for the Identification of ure. Emergency lighting shall be pro- Piping Systems, A13.1—1956. vided at stairways and passageways or (iii) Safety Code for Elevators, aisleways used by employees for emer- Dumbwaiters, and Moving Walks, gency exit in case of power failure. A17.1—1965, including Supplements Emergency lighting shall be provided A17.1a—1967, A17.1b—1968, A17.1c—1969, in all plant first aid and medical facili- and A17.1d—1970. ties. (iv) Practice for the Inspection of (c) Handling and storage of pulpwood Elevators (Inspector’s Manual), A17.2— and pulp chips—(1) Handling pulpwood 1960, including Suppelements A17.2a— with forklift trucks. Where large forklift 1965 and A17.2b—1967. trucks, or lift trucks with clam-jaws, (v) Safety Code for Conveyors, are used in the yard, the operator’s en- Cableways, and Related Equipment, closed cab shall be provided with an es- B20.1—1957. cape hatch, whenever the hydraulic (vi) Power Piping, B31.1.0—1967 and arm blocks escape through the side addenda B31.10a—1969. Fuel Gas Piping, doors. B31.2—1968. (2) Handling pulpwood with cranes or (vii) Identification of Gas-Mask Can- stackers. (i) Where locomotive cranes isters, K13.1—1967. are used for loading or unloading pulp- (viii) Prevention of Sulfur Fires and wood, the pulpwood shall be piled so as Explosions, Z12.12—1968. to allow a clearance of not less than 24 (ix) Installation of Blower and Ex- inches between the pile and the end of haust Systems for Dust, Stock, and the cab of any locomotive crane in use, Vapor Removal or Conveying, Z33.1— when the cab is turned in any working 1961. position.

696

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00706 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.261

(ii) The minimum distance of the (vi) A derail shall be used to prevent pulpwood pile from the centerline of a movement of other rail equipment into standard-gage track shall be main- cars where persons are working. tained at not less than 81⁄2 feet. (5) Handling pulpwood from trucks. (i) (iii) Logs shall be piled in an orderly Cutting of stakes and binder wires and stable manner, with no projection shall be done in accordance with para- into walkways or roadways. graph (c)4(iii) of this section. (iv) Railroad cars shall not be spotted (ii) Where binder chain and steel on tracks adjacent to the locomotive stakes are used, the binder chains shall cranes unless a 24-inch clearance is be released and the stakes tripped from maintained, as required in paragraph the opposite side of the load spillage. (c)(2)(i) of this section. (iii) Where binder chains and crane (v) The handling and storage of other slings are used, the crane slings shall materials shall conform to paragraphs be attached and taut before the binder (c)(2) (i) and (ii) of this section with re- chains are released. The hooker shall spect to clearance. see that the helper is clear before sig- (vi) No person shall be permitted to naling for the movement of the load. walk beneath a suspended load, bucket, (6) Handling pulp chips from railway or hook. cars. All cars shall be securely fastened (3) Handling pulpwood from ships. in place and all employees in the clear (i) [Reserved] before dumping is started. (ii) The hatch tender shall be re- (7) Handling pulp chips from trucks and quired to signal the hoisting engineer trailers. All trucks and trailers shall be to move the load only after the men securely fastened in place and all em- working in the hold are in the clear. ployees in the clear before dumping is (iii) The air in the ship’s hold, tanks, started. or closed vessels shall be tested for ox- (8) Cranes. ygen deficiency and for both toxic and (i) [Reserved] explosive gases and vapors. (ii) A safety device such as a heavy (4) Handling pulpwood from flatcars chain or cable at least equal in and all other railway cars. (i) Railroad strength to the lifting cables shall be flatcars for the conveyance of pulp- fastened to the boom and to the frame wood loaded parallel to the length of the car shall be equipped with safety- of the boom crane (if it is other than stake pockets. locomotive) at the base. Alternatively, a telescoping safety device shall be fas- (ii) Where pulpwood is loaded cross- tened to the boom and to the cab wise on a flatcar sufficient stakes of sizes not smaller than 4 by 4 inches frame, so as to prevent the boom from shall be used to prevent the load from snapping back over the cab in the shifting. event of lifting cable breakage. (iii) When it is necessary to cut (iii) A crane shall not be operated stakes, those on the unloading side where any part thereof may come with- should be partially cut through first, in 10 feet of overhead powerlines (or and then the binder wires cut on the other overhead obstructions) unless the opposite side. Wire cutters equipped powerlines have been deenergized. The with long extension handles shall be boom shall be painted bright yellow used. No person shall be permitted from and including the head sheave to along the dumping side of the car after a point 6 feet down the boom towards the stakes have been cut. the cab. (iv) When steel straps without stakes (iv) Standard signals for the oper- are used, the steel straps shall be cut ation of cranes shall be established for from a safe area to prevent employees all movements of the crane, in accord- from being struck by the falling logs. ance with American National Stand- (v) Flatcars and all other cars shall ards B30.2—1943 (reaffirmed 1968) and be chocked during unloading. Where B30.2.0—1967. equipment is not provided with hand (v) Only one member of the crew brakes, rail clamping chocks shall be shall be authorized to give signals to used. the crane operator.

697

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00707 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.261 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

(vi) All cranes shall be equipped with (ii) Where conveyors cross passage- a suitable warning device such as a ways or roadways, a horizontal plat- horn or whistle. form shall be provided under the con- (vii) A sheave guard shall be provided veyor extending out from the sides of beneath the head sheave of the boom. the conveyor a distance equal to 1.5 (9) Traffic warning signs or signals. (i) times the length of the wood handled. A flagman shall direct the movement The platform shall extend the width of of cranes or locomotives being moved the road plus 2 feet on each side, and across railroad tracks or roads, and at shall be kept free of wood and rubbish. any points where the vision of the op- The edges of the platform shall be pro- erator is restricted. The flagman must vided with toeboards or other protec- always remain in sight of the operator tion to prevent wood from falling, in when the crane or locomotive is in mo- accordance with § 1910.23. tion. The blue flag policy shall be used (iii) All conveyors for pulpwood shall to mark stationary cars day and night. have the inrunning nips between chain This policy shall include marking the and sprockets guarded; also, turning track in advance of the spotted cars drums shall be guarded. (flag for daytime, light for darkness). (iv) Every belt conveyor shall have (ii) After cars are spotted for loading an emergency stop cable extending the or unloading, warning flags or signs length of the conveyor so that it may shall be placed in the center of the be stopped from any location along the track at least 50 feet away from the line, or conveniently located stop but- cars and a derail set to protect work- tons within 10 feet of each work sta- men in the car. tion, in accordance with American Na- (10) Illumination. Artificial illumina- tional Standard B20.1—1957. tion shall be provided when loading or (16) Signs. Where conveyors cross unloading is performed after dark, in walkways or roadways in the yards, accordance with American National signs reading ‘‘Danger—Overhead Con- Standard A11.1—1965 (R—1970). veyor’’ or an equivalent warning shall (11) [Reserved] be erected, in accordance with Amer- (12) Barking devices. When barking ican National Standard Z35.1—1968. drums are employed in the yard, the (d) Handling and storage of raw mate- requirements of paragraph (e)(12) of rials other than pulpwood or pulp chips— this section shall apply. (1) Personal protective equipment. When- (13) Hand tools. Handles of wood ever possible, all dust, fumes, and gases hooks shall be locked to the shank to incident to handling materials shall be prevent them from rotating. controlled at the source, in accordance (14) Removal of pulpwood. (i) The ends with American National Standard of a woodpile shall be properly sloped Z9.2—1960. Where control at the source and cross-tiered into the pile. Upright is not possible, respirators with goggles poles shall not be used at the ends of or protective masks shall be provided, woodpiles. To knock down wood from and employees shall wear them when the woodpile, mechanical equipment handling alum, clay, soda ash, lime, shall be used to permit employees to bleach powder, sulfur, chlorine, and keep in the clear of loosened wood. similar materials, and when opening (ii) If dynamite is used to loosen the rag bales. pile, only authorized personnel shall be (2) Clearance. (i) When materials are permitted to handle and discharge the being piled inside a building and upon explosive. An electric detonator is pref- platforms, an aisle clearance at least 3 erable for firing; if a fuse is used, it feet greater than the widest truck in shall be an approved safety fuse with a use shall be provided. burning rate of not less than 120 sec- (ii) Baled paper and rags stored inside onds per yard and a minimum length of a building shall not be piled closer than 3 feet, in accordance with Safety in the 18 inches to walls, partitions, or sprin- Handling and Use of Explosives, IME kler heads. Pamphlet No. 17, July 1960. (3) Piling and unpiling pulp. (i) Piles (15) Belt conveyors. (i) The sides of the of wet lap pulp (unless palletized) shall conveyor shall be constructed so that be stepped back one-half the width of the wood will not fall off. the sheet for each 8 feet of pile height.

698

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00708 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.261

Sheets of pulp shall be interlapped to ance with paragraph (b)(2) of this sec- make the pile secure. Pulp shall not be tion. piled over pipelines to jeopardize pipes, (9) [Reserved] or so as to cause overloading of floors, (10) Stops. All control devices shall be or to within 18 inches below sprinkler locked out and tagged when knives are heads. being changed. (ii) Piles of pulp shall not be under- (11) Speed governor. Water wheels, mined when being unpiled. when directly connected to barker (iii) Floor capacities shall be clearly disks or grinders, shall be provided marked on all floors. with speed governors, if operated with (4)(i) [Reserved] gate wide open. (ii) Where rolls are pyramided two or (12) Continuous barking drums. (i) more high, chocks shall be installed be- When platforms or floors allow access tween each roll on the floor and at to the sides of the drums, a standard every row. Where pulp and paper rolls railing shall be constructed around the are stored on smooth floors in proc- drums. When two or more drums are essing areas, rubber chocks with wood- arranged side by side, proper walkways en core shall be used. with standard handrails shall be pro- (iii) When rolls are decked two or vided between each set, in accordance more high, the bottom rolls shall be with paragraph (b)(3) of this section. chocked on each side to prevent shift- (ii) Sprockets and chains, gears, and ing in either direction. trunnions shall have standard guards, (e) Preparing pulpwood—(1) Gang and in accordance with paragraph (b)(1) of slasher saws. A guard shall be provided this section. in front of all gang and slasher saws to (iii) Whenever it becomes necessary protect workers from wood thrown by for a workman to go within a drum, saws. A guard shall be placed over tail the driving mechanism shall be locked sprockets. and tagged, at the main disconnect (2) Slasher tables. Saws shall be switch, in accordance with paragraph stopped and power switches shall be (b)(4) of this section. locked out and tagged whenever it is (13) Intermittent barking drums. In ad- necessary for any person to be on the dition to motor switch, clutch, belt slasher table. shifter, or other power disconnecting (3) [Reserved] device, intermittent barking drums (4) Runway to the jack ladder. The shall be equipped with a device which runway from the pond or unloading may be locked to prevent the drum dock to the table shall be protected from moving while it is being emptied with standard handrails and toeboards. or filled. Inclined portions shall have cleats or (14) Hydraulic barkers. Hydraulic equivalent nonslip surfacing in accord- barkers shall be enclosed with strong ance with § 1910.23. Protective equip- baffles at the inlet and the outlet. The ment shall be provided for persons operator shall be protected by at least working over water. five-ply laminated glass. (5) Guards below table. Where not pro- (15) Splitter block. The block upon or tected by the frame of the machine, the against which the wood is rested shall underside of the slasher saws shall be have a corrugated surface or other enclosed with guards. means provided that the wood will not (6) Conveyors. The requirements of slip. Wood to be split, and also the paragraph (c)(15)(iv) of this section splitting block, shall be free of ice, shall apply. snow, or chips. The operator shall be (7) [Reserved] provided with eye and foot protection. (8) Barker feed. Each barker shall be A clear and unobstructed view shall be equipped with a feed and turnover de- maintained between equipment and vice which will make it unnecessary workers around the block and the for the operator to hold a bolt or log by workers’ help area. hand during the barking operation. (16) Power control. Power for the oper- Eye, ear, and head protection shall be ation of the splitter shall be controlled provided for the operator, in accord- by a clutch or equivalent device.

699

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00709 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.261 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

(17) Knot cleaners. The operators of (iv) Hoods of cutters, shredders, and knot cleaners of the woodpecker type dusters shall have exhaust ventilation, shall wear eye protection equipment. in accordance with American National (18) Chipper spout. The feed system to Standard Z9.2—1960. the chipper spout shall be arranged in (3) Blowers. (i) Blowers used for trans- such a way that the operator does not porting rags shall be provided with feed stand in a direct line with the chipper hoppers having outer edges located not spout. All chipper spouts shall be en- less than 48 inches from the fan. closed to a height of at least 42 inches (ii) The arrangement of the blower from the floor or operator’s platform. discharge outlets and work areas shall When other protection is not sufficient, be such as to prevent material from the operator shall wear a safety belt falling on workers. line. The safety belt line shall be fas- (4) Conveyors. Conveyors and con- tened in such a manner as to make it veyor drive belts and pulleys shall be impossible for the operator to fall into fully enclosed or, if open and within 7 the throat of the chipper. Ear protec- feet of the floor, shall be constructed tion equipment shall be worn by the and guarded in accordance with para- operator and others in the immediate graph (c)(15) of this section and Amer- area if there is any possibility that the ican National Standards B15.1—1953 noise level may be harmful (see (Reaffirmed 1958) and B20.1—1957. § 1910.95). (5) Dust. Measures for the control of (19) Carriers for knives. Carriers shall dust shall be provided, in accordance be provided and used for transportation with American National Standards of knives. Z33.1—1961, Z87.1—1968, and Z88.2—1969. (f) Rag and old paper preparation—(1) (6) Rag cookers. (i) When cleaning, in- Ripping and trimming tools. (i) Hand spection, or other work requires that knives and scissors shall have blunt persons enter rag cookers, all steam points, shall be fastened to the table and water valves, or other control de- with chain or thong, and shall not be vices, shall be locked and tagged in the carried on the person but placed safely closed or ‘‘off’’ position. Blank flanging in racks or sheaths when not in use. of pipelines is acceptable in place of (ii) Hand knives and sharpening closed and locked valves. steels shall be provided with guards at (ii) When cleaning, inspection, or the junction of the handle and the other work requires that persons must blade. enter the cooker, one person shall be (2) Shredders, cutters, and dusters. (i) stationed outside in a position to ob- Rotating heads or cylinders shall be serve and assist in case of emergency, completely enclosed except for an in accordance with paragraph (b)(5) of opening at the feed side sufficient to this section. permit only the entry of stock. The en- (iii) [Reserved] closure shall extend over the top of the (iv) Rag cookers shall be provided feed rolls. It shall be constructed either with safety valves in accordance with of solid material or with mesh or open- the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel ings not exceeding one-half inch and Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure substantial enough to contain flying Vessels—1968, with Addenda. particles and prevent accidental con- (g) Chemical processes of making pulp— tact with moving parts. The enclosure (1) Sulfur burners. (i) Sulfur-burner shall be bolted or locked into place. houses shall be safely and adequately (ii) A smooth-pivoted idler roll rest- ventilated, and every precaution shall ing on the stock or feed table shall be be taken to guard against dust explo- provided in front of feed rolls except sion hazards and fires, in accordance when arrangements prevent the oper- with American National Standards ator from standing closer than 36 Z9.2—1960 and Z12.12—1968. inches to any part of the feed rolls. (ii) Nonsparking tools and equipment (iii) Any manually fed cutter, shred- shall be used in handling dry sulfur. der, or duster shall be provided with an (iii) Sulfur storage bins shall be kept idler roll as per subdivision (ii) of this free of sulfur dust accumulation, in ac- subparagraph or the operator shall use cordance with American National special hand-feeding tools. Standard Z9.2—1960.

700

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00710 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.261

(iv) Sulfur-melting equipment shall tendant stationed at the bin to sum- not be located in the burner room. mon assistance. (2) Protection for employees (acid (9) Exits (digester building). At least plants). (i) Supplied air respirators one unobstructed exit at each end of shall be strategically located for emer- the room shall be provided on each gency and rescue use. floor of a digester building. (ii) During inspection, repairs, or (10) Gas masks (digester building). Gas maintenance of acid towers, the work- masks must be available, and they man shall be provided with eye protec- must furnish adequate protection tion, a supplied air respirator, a safety against sulfurous acid and chlorine belt, and an attached lifeline. The line gases and be inspected and repaired in shall be extended to an attendant sta- accordance with 29 CFR 1910.134. tioned outside the tower opening. (11) Elevators. (i) Elevators shall be (3) Acid tower structure. Outside ele- constructed in accordance with Amer- vators shall be inspected daily during ican National Standard A17.1—1965. winter months when ice materially af- (ii) Elevators shall be equipped with fects safety. Elevators, runways, stairs, gas masks for the maximum number of etc., for the acid tower shall be in- passengers. spected monthly for defects that may (iii) Elevators shall be equipped with occur because of exposure to acid or an alarm system to advise of failure. corrosive gases. (12) Blowoff valves and piping. (i) The (4) Tanks (acid). (i) Tanks shall be blowoff valve of a digester shall be ar- free of acid and shall be washed out ranged so as to be operated from an- with water, and fresh air shall be blown other room, remote from safety valves. into them before allowing men to (ii) Through bolts instead of cap bolts enter. Men entering the tanks shall be shall be used on all digester pipings. provided with supplied air respirators, lifebelts, and attached lifelines. (iii) Heavy duty pipe, valves, and fit- (ii) A man shall be stationed outside tings shall be used between the di- to summon assistance if necessary. All gester and blow pit. These valves, fit- intake valves to a tank shall be tings, and pipes shall be inspected at blanked off or disconnected. least semiannually to determine the (5) Clothing. Where lime slaking degree of deterioration. takes place, employees shall be pro- (iv) Digester blow valves shall be vided with rubber boots, rubber gloves, pinned or locked in closed position protective aprons, and eye protection. throughout the entire cooking period. A deluge shower and eye fountain shall (13) Blow pits and blow tanks. (i) be provided to flush the skin and eyes Blowpit openings shall be preferably on to counteract lime or acid burns. the side of the pit instead of on top. (6) Lead burning. When lead burning When located on top, openings shall be is being done within tanks, fresh air as small as possible and shall be pro- shall be forced into the tanks so that vided with railings in accordance with fresh air will reach the face of the § 1910.23. worker first and the direction of the (ii) A specially constructed ladder current will never be from the source shall be used for access to blow pits, to of the fumes toward the face of the be constructed so that the door of the workers. Supplied air respirators (con- blow pit cannot be closed when the lad- stant-flow type) shall be provided. der is in place; other means shall be (7) Hoops for acid storage tanks. Hoops provided to prevent the closing of the of tanks shall be made of rods rather pit door when anyone is in the pit. than flat strips and shall be safely (iii) A signaling device shall be in- maintained by scheduled inspections. stalled in the digester and blow-pit (8) Chip and sawdust bins. Steam or rooms and chip bins to be operated as compressed-air lances, or other facili- a warning before and while digesters ties, shall be used for breaking down are being blown. the arches caused by jamming in chip (iv) Blow-pit hoops shall be main- lofts. No worker shall be permitted to tained in a safe condition. enter a bin unless provided with a safe- (14) Blowing digester. (i) Blowoff ty belt, with line attached, and an at- valves shall be opened slowly.

701

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00711 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.261 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

(ii) After the digester has started to they have not become plugged or cor- be blown, the blowoff valve shall be left roded to the point of being inoperative. open, and the hand plate shall not be (See the ASME Boiler and Pressure removed until the digester cook signals Vessel Code, Section VIII, Unfired the blow-pit man that the blow is com- Pressure Vessels—1968, with Addenda.) pleted. Whenever it becomes necessary (ii) All safety devices shall conform to remove the hand plate to clear to Paragraph U–2 in the ASME Boiler stock, operators shall wear eye protec- and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, tion equipment and protective clothing Unfired Pressure Vessels—1968, with to guard against burns from hot stock. Addenda. (iii) Means shall be provided whereby (18) Miscellaneous. Insofar as the proc- the digester cook shall signal the man esses of the sulfate and soda operations in the chip bin before starting to load are similar to those of the sulfite proc- the digester. esses, the standard of paragraphs (g) (1) (15) Inspecting and repairing digester. through (17) of this section shall apply. (i) Valves controlling lines leading into (i) Quick operating showers, bub- a digester shall be locked out and blers, etc., shall be available for emer- tagged. The keys to the locks shall be gency use in case of caustic soda burns. in the possession of a person or persons (ii) Rotary tenders, smelter opera- doing the inspecting or making repairs. tors, and those cleaning smelt spouts (ii) Fresh air shall be blown into the shall be provided with eye protection digester constantly while workmen are equipment (fitted with lenses that fil- inside. Supplied air respirators shall be ter out the harmful rays emanating available in the event the fresh air sup- from the light source) when actively ply fails or is inadequate. engaged in their duties, in accordance (iii) No inspector shall enter a di- with American National Standard gester unless a lifeline is securely fas- Z87.1—1968. tened to his body by means of a safety (iii) Heavy-duty pipe, valves, and fit- belt and at least one other experienced tings shall be used between digester employee is stationed outside the di- and blow pit. These shall be inspected gester to handle the line and to sum- at least semiannually to determine the mon assistance. All ladders and life- degree of deterioration and repaired or lines shall be inspected before each use. replaced when necessary, in accordance (iv) All employees entering digesters with American National Standards for inspection or repair work shall be B31.1—1955, B31.1a—1963, B31.1.0—1967, provided with protective headgear. Eye and B31.2—1968. protection and dust masks shall be pro- vided to workmen while the old brick (iv) Smelt-dissolving tanks shall be lining is being removed, in accordance covered and the cover kept closed, ex- with American National Standards, cept when samples are being taken. Z87.1—1968, Z88.2—1969, and Z99.1—1969. (v) Smelt tanks shall be provided (16) Pressure tanks-accumulators (acid). with vent stacks and explosion doors, (i) Safety regulations governing inspec- in accordance with American National tion and repairing of pressure tanks-ac- Standard Z9.1—1951. cumulators (acid) shall be the same as (19) Blow lines. those specified in subparagraph (15) of (i)–(ii) [Reserved] this paragraph. (iii) When blow lines from more than (ii) The pressure tanks-accumulators one digester lead into one pipe, the shall be inspected twice annually. (See cock or valve of the blow line from the the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel tank being inspected or repaired shall Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure be locked or tagged out, or the line Vessels—1968, with Addenda.) shall be disconnected and blocked off. (17) Pressure vessels (safety devices). (i) (20) Furnace room. Exhaust ventila- A safety valve shall be installed in a tion shall be provided where niter cake separate line from each pressure vessel; is fed into a rotary furnace and shall be no hand valve shall be installed be- so designed and maintained as to keep tween this safety valve and the pres- the concentration of hydrogen sulfide sure vessel. Safety valves shall be gas below the parts per million listed checked between each cook to be sure in § 1910.1000.

702

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00712 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.261

(21) Inspection and repair of tanks. All chlorine gas shall be instructed in their piping leading to tanks shall be use. blanked off or valved and locked or (iii) For emergency and rescue work, tagged. Any lines to sewers shall be independent self-contained oxygen- blanked off to protect workers from air type masks or supplied air equipment contaminants. shall be provided. (22) Welding. Welding on blow tanks, (iv) At least two exits, remote from accumulator tanks, or any other ves- each other, shall be provided for all sels where turpentine vapor or other rooms in which chlorine is stored. combustible vapor could gather shall (v) Spur tracks upon which tank cars be done only after the vessel has been containing chlorine and caustic are completely purged of fumes. Fresh air spotted and connected to pipelines shall be supplied workers inside of ves- shall be protected by means of a derail sels. in front of the cars. (23) Turpentine systems and storage (vi) All chlorine, caustic, and acid tanks. Nonsparking tools and ground lines shall be marked for positive iden- hose shall be used when pumping out tification, in accordance with Amer- the tank. The tank shall be surrounded ican National Standard A13.1—1967. by a berm or moat. (4) Bagged or drummed chemicals. Bagged or drummed chemicals require (h) Bleaching—(1) Bleaching engines. efficient handling to prevent damage Bleaching engines, except the Bellmer and spillage. Certain oxidizing chemi- type, shall be completely covered on cals used in bleaching pulp and also in the top, with the exception of one some sanitizing work require added small opening large enough to allow precautions for safety in storage and filling, but too small to admit a person. handling. In storage, these chemicals Platforms leading from one engine to must be isolated from combustible ma- another shall have standard guardrails terials and other chemicals with which in accordance with § 1910.23. they will react such as acids. They (2) Bleach mixing rooms. (i) The room must also be kept dry, clean and in which the bleach powder is mixed uncontaminated. shall be provided with adequate ex- (i) Mechanical pulp process—(1) Pulp haust ventilation, located at the floor grinders. (i) Water wheels directly con- level, in accordance with American Na- nected to pulp grinders shall be pro- tional Standard Z9.1—1951. vided with speed governors limiting the (ii) Chlorine gas shall be carried peripheral speed of the grinder to that away from the work place and breath- recommended by the manufacturer. ing area by an exhaust system. The gas (ii) Doors of pocket grinders shall be shall be rendered neutral or harmless arranged so as to keep them from clos- before being discharged into the atmos- ing accidentally. phere. The requirements of American (2) Butting saws. Hood guards shall be National Standard Z9.2—1960 shall provided on butting saws, in accord- apply to this subdivision. ance with American National Standard (iii) For emergency and rescue oper- O1.1—1954 (reaffirmed 1961). ations, the employer must provide em- (3) Floors and platforms. The require- ployees with self-contained breathing ments of paragraph (b)(3) of this sec- apparatuses or supplied-air respirators, tion shall apply. and ensure that employees use these (4) Personal protection. Persons ex- respirators, in accordance with the re- posed to falling material shall wear quirements of 29 CFR 1910.134. eye, head, foot, and shin protection (3) Liquid chlorine. (i) Tanks of liquid equipment, in accordance with Amer- chlorine shall be stored in an ade- ican National Standards Z87.1—1968, quately ventilated unoccupied room, Z88.2—1969, Z89.1—1969, and Z41.1—1967. where their possible leakage cannot af- (j) Stock preparation—(1) Pulp shred- fect workers. ders. (i) Cutting heads shall be com- (ii) Gas masks capable of absorbing pletely enclosed except for an opening chlorine shall be supplied, conven- at the feed side sufficient to permit iently placed, and regularly inspected, only entry of stock. The enclosure and workers who may be exposed to shall be bolted or locked in place. The

703

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00713 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.261 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

enclosure shall be of solid material or out. Blank flanging and tagging of pipe with mesh or other openings not ex- lines is acceptable in place of closed ceeding one-half inch. and locked or tagged valves. Blank (ii) Either a slanting feed table with flanging of steam and water lines shall its outer edge not less than 36 inches be acceptable in place of valve locks. from the cutting head or an automatic (6) Stock chests. (i) All control devices feeding device shall be provided. shall be locked or tagged out when per- (iii) Repairs for cleaning of blockage sons enter stock chests, in accordance shall be done only when the shredder is with paragraph (b)(4) of this section. shutdown and control devices locked. (ii) When cleaning, inspecting, or (2) Pulp conveyors. Pulp conveyors other work requires that persons enter and conveyor drive belts and pulleys stock chests, they shall be provided shall be fully enclosed, or if open and with a low-voltage extension light. within 7 feet of the floor, shall be con- (k) Machine room—(1) Emergency stops. structed and guarded in accordance Paper machines shall be equipped with with American National Standard devices that will stop the machine B20.1—1957. quickly in an emergency. The devices (3) [Reserved] shall consist of push buttons for elec- (4) Beaters. (i) Beater rolls shall be tric motive power (or electrically oper- provided with covers. ated engine stops), pull cords con- (ii) When cleaning, inspecting, or nected directly to the prime mover, other work requires that persons enter control clutches, or other devices, the beaters, all control devices shall be interlocked with adequate braking ac- locked or tagged out, in accordance tion. The devices shall be tested peri- with paragraph (b)(4) of this section. odically by making use of them when (iii) When beaters are fed from a floor stopping the machine and shall be so above, the chute opening, if less than located that any person working on the 42 inches from the floor, shall be pro- machine can quickly disconnect the vided with a complete rail or other en- machine from the source of power in closure. Openings for manual feeding case of emergency. shall be sufficient only for entry of (2) Drives. (i) All drives shall be pro- stock, and shall be provided with at vided with lockout devices at the least two permanently secured power switch which interrupts the flow crossrails in accordance with § 1910.23. of current to the unit. (iv) [Reserved] (ii) All ends of rotating shafts includ- (v) Floors around beaters shall be ing dryer drum shafts shall be com- provided with sufficient drainage to re- pletely guarded. move wastes. (iii) All accessible disengaged doctor (5) Pulpers. (i) All pulpers having the blades should be covered. top or any other opening of a vessel less than 42 inches from the floor or (iv) All exposed shafts shall be guard- work platform shall have such open- ed. Crossovers shall be provided. ings guarded by railed or other enclo- (v) Oil cups and grease fittings shall sures. For manual charging, openings be placed in a safe area remote from shall be sufficient to permit the entry nip and heat hazards. of stock, and shall be provided with at (3) Protective equipment. Face shields, least two permanently secured aprons, and rubber gloves shall be pro- crossrails in accordance with § 1910.23. vided for workmen handling acids in (ii) When cleaning, inspecting, or accordance with paragraphs (b)(2) and other work requires that persons enter (d)(1) of this section. the pulpers, they shall be equipped (4)–(5) [Reserved] with safety belt and lifeline, and one (6) Steps. Steps of uniform rise and person shall be stationed outside at a tread with nonslip surfaces shall be position to observe and assist in case of provided at each press in accordance emergency. with § 1910.23. (iii) When cleaning, inspecting, or (7) Plank walkways. A removable other work requires that persons enter plank shall be provided along each pulpers, all steam, water, or other con- press, with standard guardrails in- trol devices shall be locked or tagged stalled. The planks shall have nonslip

704

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00714 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.261

surfaces in accordance with paragraph be provided at each calendar stack in (b)(3) of this section. accordance with § 1910.23. (8) Dryer lubrication. If a gear bearing (16) [Reserved] must be oiled while the machine is in (17) Sole plates. All exposed sole plates operation, an automatic oiling device between dryers, calenders, reels, and to protect the oiler shall be provided, rewinders shall have a nonskid surface. or oil cups and grease fittings shall be (18) Nip points. The hazard of the nip placed along the walkways out of reach points on all calender rolls shall be of hot pipes and dryer gears. eliminated or minimized by means of (9) Levers. All levers carrying weights an effective barrier device, or by feed- shall be constructed so that weights ing the paper into the rolls by means of will not slip or fall off. a rope carrier, air jets, or hand feeding (10) First dryer. Either a permanent devices. guardrail or apron guard or both shall (19) Platforms. [Reserved] be installed in front of the first dryer (20) Scrapers. Alloy steel scrapers in each section in accordance with with pullthrough blades approximately paragraph (b)(1) of this section. 3 by 5 inches in size shall be used to re- (11) Steam and hot-water pipes. All ex- move ‘‘scabs’’ from calender rolls. posed steam and hot-water pipes within (21) Illumination. Permanent lighting 7 feet of the floor or working platform shall be installed in all areas where or within 15 inches measured hori- employees are required to make ma- zontally from stairways, ramps, or chine adjustments and sheet transfers fixed ladders shall be covered with an in accordance with the American Na- insulating material, or guarded in such tional Standard A11.1—1965 (R 1970). manner as to prevent contact. (22) Control panels. All control panel (12) Dryer gears. Dryer gears shall be handles and buttons shall be protected guarded excepting where the oilers’ from accidental contact. walkway is removed out of reach of the (23) [Reserved] gears’ nips and spokes and hot pipes in accordance with American National (24) Lifting reels. (i) The reels shall Standard B15.1—1953 (reaffirmed 1958). stop rotating before being lifted from (i) A guardrail shall be provided at bearings. broke holes in accordance with (ii) All lifting equipment (clamps, ca- § 1910.23. bles, and slings) shall be maintained in (13) Broke hole. (i) A guardrail shall a safe condition and inspected regu- be provided at broke holes in accord- larly. ance with § 1910.23. (iii) Reel shafts with square block (ii) Where pulpers are located di- ends shall be guarded. rectly below the broke hole on a paper (25) Feeder belts. Feeder belts, carrier machine and where the broke hole ropes, air carriage, or other equally ef- opening is large enough to permit a fective means shall be provided for worker to fall through, any employee starting paper into the nip or drum- pushing broke down the hole shall wear type reels. a safety belt attached to a safety belt (26) Inrunning nip. (i) Where the nip- line. The safety belt line shall be fas- ping points of all drum winders and re- tened in such a manner that it is im- winders is on the operator’s side, it possible for the person to fall into the shall be guarded by barrier guards pulper. interlocked with the drive mechanism. (iii) An alarm bell or a flashing light (ii) [Reserved] shall be actuated before dropping ma- (27) Core collars. Set screws for secur- terial through the broke hole. ing core collars to winding and (14) Feeder belt. A feeder belt or other unwinding shafts shall not protrude effective device shall be provided for above the face of the collar. All edges starting paper through the calender of the collar with which an operator’s stack. hand comes in contact shall be beveled (15) Steps. Steps or ladders of uniform to remove all sharp corners. rise and tread with nonslip surfaces (28) Slitter knives. Slitter knives shall shall be provided at each calendar be guarded so as to prevent accidental stack. Handrails and hand grips shall contact. Carriers shall be provided and

705

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00715 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.261 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

used for transportation of slitter and a hood shall be provided for the knives. second knife. (29) Winder shaft. The winder shall (iii) Safe access shall be provided to have a guide rail to align the shaft for the knives of a rotary cutter by means easy entrance into the opened rewind of catwalks with nonslip surfaces, rail- shaft bearing housings. ings, and toeboards in accordance with (30) Core shaft. When the core shaft paragraph (b)(3) of this section. weighs in excess of the safe standard, a (iv) A guard shall be provided for the mechanical device such as a dolly shall spreader or squeeze roll at the nip side be provided for carrying all or part of on sheet cutters. the weight when it is being removed (v) Electrically or manually operated from the set of paper and placed in the quick power disconnecting devices with dressing brackets on the winder. adequate braking action shall be pro- (31) Winder area. A nonskid surface vided on all operating sides of the ma- shall be provided in the front vicinity chine within easy reach of all opera- of the winder to prevent accidental tors. slipping. (vi) The outside slitters shall be (32) Radiation. Special standards re- guarded. garding the use of radiation equipment (8) Platers. (i) A guard shall be ar- shall be posted and followed as required ranged across the face of the rolls to by § 1910.96. serve as a warning that the operator’s (l) Finishing room—(1) Cleaning rolls. hand is approaching the danger zone. Rolls shall be cleaned only on the (ii) A quick power disconnecting de- outrunning side. vice shall be installed on each machine (2) Emergency stops. Electrically or within easy reach of the operator. manually operated quick power dis- (9) Finishing room rewinders. (i) The connecting devices, interlocked with nipping points of all drum winders and braking action, shall be provided on all rewinders located on the operator’s operating sides of the machine within side shall be guarded by either auto- easy reach of all employees. These de- matic or manually operated barrier vices shall be tested by making use of guards of sufficient height to protect them when stopping the machine. fully anyone working around them. (3) Core collars. The requirements of The barrier guard shall be interlocked paragraph (k)(27) of this section and with the drive mechanism to prevent the American National Standard operating above jog speed without the B15.1—1953 (reaffirmed 1958) shall guard in place. apply. A zero speed switch should be installed (4) Elevators. These shall be in accord- to prevent the guard from being raised ance with American National Standard while the roll is turning. A17.1—1965. (ii) A nonskid surface shall be pro- (5) Control panels. The requirements vided in front of the rewinder to pre- of paragraph (k)(22) of this section vent an employee from slipping in ac- shall apply. cordance with paragraph (b)(3) of this (6) Guillotine-type cutters. (i) Each section. guillotine-type cutter shall be equipped (iii) Mechanical lifting devices shall with a control which requires the oper- be provided for placing and removing ator and his helper, if any, to use both rolls from the machine. hands to engage the clutch. (10) Control panels. The requirements (ii) Each guillotine-type cutter shall of paragraph (k)(22) of this section be equipped with a nonrepeat device. shall apply. (iii) Carriers shall be provided and (11) Roll-type embosser. The nipping used for transportation of guillotine- point located on the operator’s side type cutter knives. shall be guarded by either automatic or (7) Rotary cutter. (i) On single-knife manually operated barrier guards machines a guard shall be provided at a interlocked with the drive. point of contact to the knife. (12) Sorting and counting tables. (i) Ta- (ii) On duplex cutters the protection bles shall be smooth and free from required for single-knife machines splinters, with edges and corners shall be provided for the first knife, rounded.

706

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00716 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.262

(ii) Paddles shall be smooth and free belt shifter in position while the ma- from splinters. chine is stopped and the belt is idling (13) Roll splitters. The nip point and on the loose pulleys. cutter knife shall be guarded by either (3) Calender. A calender in essence automatic or manually operated bar- consists of a set of heavy rollers rier guards. mounted on vertical side frames and (m) Materials handling—(1) Hand arranged to pass cloth between them. trucks. No person shall be permitted to Calenders may have two to ten rollers, ride on a powered hand truck unless it or bowls, some of which can be heated. is so designed by the manufacturer. A (4) Embossing calender. An embossing limit switch shall be on operating han- calender is a calender with two or more dle—30 degrees each way from a 45-de- rolls, one of which is engraved for pro- gree angle up and down. ducing figured effects of various kinds (2) [Reserved] on a fabric. (3) Cartons. The carton-stitching ma- (5) Cans (drying). Drying cans are hol- chine shall be guarded to prevent the low cylindrical drums mounted in a operator from coming in contact with frame so they can rotate. They are the stitching head. heated with steam and are used to dry (4) [Reserved] fabrics or yarn as it passes around the (5) Unloading cars. Flag signals, de- perimeter of the can. rails, or other protective devices shall (6) Carbonizing. Carbonizing means the be used to protect men during switch- removing of vegetable matter such as ing operations. The blue flag policy burns, straws, etc., from wool by treat- shall be invoked according to para- ment with acid, followed by heat. The graph (c)(9)(i) of this section. undesired matter is reduced to a car- bon-like form which may be removed [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 43 FR 49751, Oct. 24, by dusting or shaking. 1978; 49 FR 5323, Feb. 10, 1984; 55 FR 32015, (7) Card. A card machine consists of Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR cylinders of various sizes—and in cer- 1285, Jan. 8, 1998; 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998; 72 tain cases flats—covered with card FR 71070, Dec. 14, 2007] clothing and set in relation to each other so that fibers in staple form may § 1910.262 Textiles. be separated into individual relation- (a) Application requirements—(1) Appli- ship. The speed of the cylinders and cation. The requirements of this sub- their direction of rotation varies. The part for textile safety apply to the de- finished product is delivered as a sliv- sign, installation, processes, operation, er. Cards of different types are: The re- and maintenance of textile machinery, volving flat card, the roller-and-clearer equipment, and other plant facilities in card, etc. all plants engaged in the manufacture (8) Card clothing. Card clothing is the and processing of textiles, except those material with which many of the sur- processes used exclusively in the manu- faces of a card are covered; e.g., the facture of synthetic fibers. cylinder, doffer, etc. It consists of a (2) Standards incorporated by reference. thick foundation material, usually Standards covering issues of occupa- made of textile fabrics, through which tional safety and health which are of are pressed many fine, closely spaced, general application without regard to specially bent wires. any specific industry are incorporated (9) Comber. A comber is a machine for by reference in paragraphs of this sec- combing fibers of cotton, wool, etc. The tion and made applicable to textiles. essential parts are a device for feeding All such standards shall be construed forward a fringe of fibers at regular in- according to the rules of construction tervals and an arrangement of combs set out in § 1910.5. or pins which, at the right time, pass (b) Definitions applicable to this sec- through the fringe. All tangled fibers, tion—(1) Belt shifter. A belt shifter is a short fibers, and neps are removed and device for mechanically shifting a belt the long fibers are laid parallel. from one pulley to another. (10) Combing machinery. Combing ma- (2) Belt shifter lock. A belt shifter lock chinery is a general classification, in- is a device for positively locking the cluding combers, sliver lap machines,

707

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00717 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.262 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

ribbon lap machines, and gill boxes, card slivers are drafted slightly, laid but excluding cards. side by side in a compact sheet, and (11) Cutter (rotary staple). A rotary wound into a cylindrical package. staple cutter is a machine consisting of (20) Loom. A loom is a machine for ef- one or more rotary blades used for the fecting the interlacing of two series of purpose of cutting textile fibers into yarns crossing one another at right an- staple lengths. gles. The warp yarns are wound on a (12) Exposed to contact. Exposed to con- warp beam and pass through heddles tact shall mean that the location of an and reed. The filling is shot across in a object, material, nip point, or point of shuttle and settled in place by reed and operation is such that a person is liable lay, and the fabric is wound on a cloth to come in contact with it in his nor- beam. mal course of employment. (21) Mangle (starch). A starch mangle is (13) Garnett machine. A Garnett ma- a mangle that is used specifically for chine means any of a number of types of machines for opening hard twisted starching cotton goods. It commonly waste of wool, cotton, silk, etc. Essen- consists of two large rolls and a shal- tially, such machines consist of a low open vat with several immersion lickerin; one or more cylinders, each rolls. The vat contains the starch solu- having a complement worker and strip- tion. per rolls; and a fancy roll and doffer. (22) Mangle (water). A water mangle is The action of such machines is some- a calender having two or more rolls what like that of a wool card, but it is used for squeezing water from fabrics much more severe in that the various before drying. Water mangles also may rolls are covered with garnett wire in- be used in other ways during the fin- stead of card clothing. ishing of various fabrics. (14) Gill box. A gill box is a machine (23) Mule. A mule is a type of spinning used in the worsted system of manufac- frame having a head stock and a car- turing yarns. Its function is to arrange riage as its two main sections. The the fibers in parallel order. Essentially, head stock is stationary. The carriage it consists of a pair of feed rolls and a is movable and it carries the spindles series of followers where the followers which draft and spin the roving into move at a faster surface speed and per- the yarn. The carriage extends over the form a combing action. whole width of the machine and moves (15) Interlock. An interlock is a device slowly toward and away from the head that operates to prevent the operation stock during the spinning operation. of machine while the cover or door of (24) Nip. Nip shall mean the point of the machine is open or unlocked, and contact between two in-running rolls. which will also hold the cover or door (25) Openers and pickers. Openers and closed and locked while the machine is pickers means a general classification in motion. which includes breaker pickers, inter- (16) Jig (dye). A dye jig is a machine for dyeing piece goods. The cloth, at mediate pickers, finisher pickers, sin- full width, passes from a roller through gle process pickers, multiple process the dye liquor in an open vat and is pickers, willow machines, card and then wound on another roller. The op- picker waste cleaners, thread extrac- eration is repeated until the desired tors, shredding machines, roving waste shade is obtained. openers, shoddy pickers, bale breakers, (17) Kier. A kier is a large metal vat, feeders, vertical openers, lattice clean- usually a pressure type, in which fab- ers, horizontal cleaners, and any simi- rics may be boiled out, bleached, etc. lar machinery equipped with either (18) Lapper (ribbon). A ribbon lapper is cylinders, screen section, calender sec- a machine used to prepare laps for tion, rolls, or beaters used for the prep- feeding a cotton comb; its purpose is to aration of stock for further processing. provide a uniform lap in which the fi- (26) Paddler. A paddler consists of a bers have been straightened as much as trough for a solution and two or more possible. squeeze rolls between which cloth (19) Lapper (sliver). A sliver lapper is a passes after being passed through a machine in which a number of parallel mordant or dye bath.

708

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00718 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.262

(27) Point of operation. Point of oper- most of its perimeter, and an elec- ation shall mean that part of the ma- trically heated shoe which presses the chine where the work of cutting, shear- cloth against the blanket while the lat- ing, squeezing, drawing, or manipu- ter is in a stretched condition as it lating the stock in any other way is curves around feed-in roll. done. (32) Shearing machine. A shearing ma- (28) Printing machine (roller type). A chine is a machine used in shearing roller printing machine is a machine con- cloth. Cutting action is provided by a sisting of a large central cylinder, or number of steel blades spirally mount- pressure bowl, around the lower part of ed on a roller. The roller rotates in the perimeter of which is placed a se- close contact with a fixed ledger blade. ries of engraved color rollers (each hav- There may be from one to six such roll- ing a color trough), a furnisher roller, ers on a machine. doctor blades, etc. The machine is used (33) Singeing machine. A singeing ma- for printing fabrics. chine is a machine used particularly (29) Ranges (bleaching continuous). with cotton; it comprises of a heated Continuous bleaching ranges are of sev- roller, plate, or an open gas flame. The eral types and may be made for cloth material is rapidly passed over the in rope or open-width form. The goods, roller or the plate or through the open after wetting out, pass through a gas flame to remove, fuzz or hairiness squeeze roll into a saturator con- on yarn or cloth by burning. taining a solution of caustic soda and (34) Slasher. A slasher is a machine then to an enclosed J-box. A V-shaped used for applying a size mixture to arrangement is attached to the front warp yarns. Essentially, it consists of a part of the J-box for uniform and rapid stand for holding section beams, a size saturation of the cloth with steam be- box, one or more cylindrical dryers or fore it is packed down in the J-box. The an enclosed hot air dryer, and a beam- cloth, in a single strand rope form, ing end for finding the yarn on the passes over a guide roll down the first loom beams. arm of the ‘‘V’’ and up the second. (35) Solvent (industrial organic). Indus- Steam is injected into the ‘‘V’’ at the trial organic solvent means any organic upper end of the second arm so that the volatile liquid or compound, or any cloth is rapidly saturated with steam combination of these substances which at this point. The J-box capacity is are used to dissolve or suspend a non- such that cloth will remain hot for a volatile or slightly volatile substance sufficient time to complete the scour- for industrial utilization. It shall also ing action. It then passes a series of apply to such substances when used as washers with a squeeze roll in between. detergents or cleansing agents. It shall The cloth then passes through a second not apply to petroleum products when set of saturator, J-box, and washer, such products are used as fuel. where it is treated with the peroxide (36) Tenter frame. A tenter frame is a solution. By slight modification of the machine for drying cloth under ten- form of the unit, the same process can sion. It essentially consists of a pair of be applied to open-width cloth. endless traveling chains fitted with (30) Range (mercerizing). A mercerizing clips of fine pins and carried on tracks. range consists generally of a 3-bowl The cloth is firmly held at the selvages mangle, a tenter frame, and a number by the two chains which diverge as of boxes for washing and scouring. The they move forward so that the cloth is whole setup is in a straight line and all brought to the desired width. parts operate continuously. The com- (37) Warper. A warper is any machine bination is used to saturate the cloth for preparing and arranging the yarns with sodium hydroxide, stretch it while intended for the warp of a fabric, spe- saturated, and washing out most of the cifically, a beam warper. caustic before releasing tension. (c) General safety requirements—(1) (31) Sanforizing machine. A sanforizing Means of stopping machines. Every tex- machine is a machine consisting of a tile machine shall be provided with in- large steam-heated cylinder, an end- dividual mechanical or electrical less, thick, woolen felt blanket which means for stopping such machines. On is in close contact with the cylinder for machines driven by belts and shafting,

709

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00719 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.262 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

a locking-type shifter or an equivalent nip while the machinery is in oper- positive device shall be used. On oper- ation. ations where injury to the operator (4) Removal of foreign ferrous material. might result if motors were to restart All textile opener lines shall be after power failures, provision shall be equipped with magnetic separators, made to prevent machines from auto- tramp iron separators, or other means matically restarting upon restoration for the removal of foreign ferrous ma- of power. terial. (2) Handles. Stopping and starting (e) Cotton cards—(1) Enclosures. Cyl- handles shall be designed to the proper inder and lickerins shall be completely length to prevent the worker’s hand or protected and the doffers should be en- fingers from striking against any re- closed. volving part, gear guard, or any other (2) Enclosure fastenings. The enclo- part of the machine. sures or covers shall be kept in place (3)–(4) [Reserved] while the machine is in operation, ex- (5) Inspection and maintenance. All cept when stripping or grinding. guards and other safety devices, includ- (3) Stripping rolls. On operations call- ing starting and stopping devices, shall ing for flat strippings which are al- be properly maintained. lowed to fall on the doffer cover, where (6) Lighting. Lighting shall conform such strippings are removed by hand, to American National Standard A11.1— the doffer cover shall be kept closed 1965, which is incorporated by reference and securely fastened to prevent the as specified in § 1910.6. opening of the cover while the machine (7) Identification of piping systems. is in operation. When it becomes nec- Identification of piping systems shall essary to clean the cards while they conform to American National Stand- are in motion, a long-handled brush or ard A13.1—1956, which is incorporated dust mop shall be used. by reference as specified in § 1910.6. (f) Garnett machines—(1) Lickerin. Gar- (8) Identification of physical hazards. nett lickerins shall be enclosed. Identification of physical hazards shall (2) Fancy rolls. Garnett fancy rolls be in accordance with the requirements shall be enclosed by covers. These shall of § 1910.144. be installed in a way that keeps worker (9) Steam pipes. All pipes carrying rolls reasonably accessible for removal steam or hot water for process or serv- or adjustment. icing machinery, when exposed to con- (3) Underside of machine. The under- tact and located within seven feet of side of the garnett shall be guarded by the floor or working platform shall be a screen mesh or other form of enclo- covered with a heat-insulating mate- sure to prevent access. rial, or otherwise properly guarded. (g) Spinning mules—A substantial (d) Openers and pickers—(1) Beater fender of metal or hardwood shall be guards. When any opening or picker installed in front of the carriage machinery is equipped with a beater, wheels, the fender to extend to within such beater shall be provided with one-fourth inch of the rail. metal covers which will prevent con- (h) Slashers—(1) Cylinder dryers—(i) tact with the beater. Such covers shall Reducing valves, safety valves, and pres- be provided with an interlock which sure gages. Reducing valves, safety will prevent the cover from being valves, and pressure gages shall con- raised while the machine is in motion form to the ASME Pressure Vessel and prevent the operation of the ma- Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pressure chine while the cover is open. Vessels, 1968, which is incorporated by (2) Cleanout holes. Cleanout holes reference as specified in § 1910.6. within reaching distance of the fan or (ii) Vacuum relief valves. Vacuum re- picker beater shall have their covers lief valves shall conform to the ASME securely fastened and they shall not be Code for Pressure Vessels, Section VIII, opened while the machine is in motion. Unfired Pressure Vessels, 1968. (3) Feed rolls. The feed rolls on all (iii) Lever control. When slashers are opening and picking machinery shall operated by control levers, these levers be covered with a guard designed to shall be connected to a horizontal bar prevent the operator from reaching the or treadle located not more than 69

710

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00720 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.262

inches above the floor to control the TABLE R–1—GUARD OPENINGS operation from any point. [Openings in the guard or between the guard and working (iv) Pushbutton control. Slashers oper- surface shall not be greater than the following] ated by pushbutton control shall have Maximum Distance of opening from nip point width of stop and start buttons located at each opening end of the machine, and additional but- tons located on both sides of the ma- 0 to 11⁄2 ...... 1⁄4 11⁄2 to 21⁄2 ...... 3⁄8 chine, at the size box and the delivery 21⁄2 to 31⁄2 ...... 1⁄2 end. If calender rolls are used, addi- 31⁄2 to 51⁄2 ...... 5⁄8 tional buttons shall be provided at 51⁄2 to 61⁄2 ...... 3⁄4 61⁄2 to 71⁄2 ...... 7⁄8 both sides of the machine at points 71⁄2 to 81⁄2 ...... 11⁄4 near the nips, except when slashers are The measurements in Table R–1 are all in inches. equipped with an enclosed dryer. (v) Expansion chambers. Slasher ket- (v) Nip guards. All nip guards shall tles and cookers shall be provided with comply with the requirements of para- expansion chambers in the covers, or graph (h)(2)(iv) of this section. drains, to prevent surging over. Steam (vi) Cylinder enclosure. When enclo- control valves shall be so located that sures or hoods are used over cylinder they can be operated without exposing drying rolls, such enclosures or hoods the worker to moving parts, hot sur- shall be provided with an exhaust sys- faces, or steam. tem which will effectively prevent wet (i) Warpers—(1) Swiveled double-bar air and steam from escaping into the gates. Swiveled double-bar gates shall workroom. be installed on all warpers operating in (vii) Expansion chambers. Slasher ket- excess of 450 yards per minute. These tles and cookers shall be provided with gates shall be so interlocked that the expansion chambers in the covers, or machine cannot be operated until the drains, to prevent surging over. Steam- gate is in the ‘‘closed position,’’ except control valves shall be so located that for the purpose of inching or jogging. they can be operated without exposing (2) Closed position. Closed position the worker to moving parts, hot sur- shall mean that the top bar of the gate shall be at least 42 inches from the faces, or steam. floor or working platform; and the (2) Enclosed hot air dryer—(i) Lever lower bar shall be at least 21 inches control. When slashers are operated by from the floor or working platform; control levers, these levers shall be and the gate shall be located 15 inches connected to a horizontal bar or trea- from the vertical tangent to the beam dle located not more than 69 inches head. above the floor to control the oper- (j) Drawing frames, slubbers, roving ation from any point. parts, cotton combers, ring spinning (ii) Push-button control. Slashers op- frames, twisters. Gear housing covers on erated by push-button control shall all installations of drawing frames, have one start button at each end of slubbers, roving frames, cotton comb- the machine and stop buttons shall be ers, ring spinning frames, and twisters located on both sides of the machines shall be equipped with interlocks. at intervals spaced not more than 6 (k) Gill boxes—(1) Pin guard. A guard feet on centers. Inching buttons should shall be placed ahead of the feed end be installed. and shall be so designed that it will (iii) Dryer enclosure. The dryer enclo- prevent the worker’s fingers from being sure shall be provided with an exhaust caught in the pins of the intersecting system which will effectively prevent fallers. (2) Nip guards. All nip guards shall wet air and steam from escaping into comply with the requirements of para- the workroom. graph (h)(2)(iv) of this section. (iv) Nip guards. All nip guards shall (l) Heavy draw boxes, finishers, and comply with Table R–1. speeders used in worsted drawing—(1) Band pulley covers. Covers for band pul- leys shall be closed when the machine is in motion.

711

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00721 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.262 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

(2) Benches or working platforms. (2) Kier valve protection. Each valve Branches or working platforms ap- controlling the flow of steam, injurious proximately 10 inches in height and 8 gases, or liquids into a kier shall be inches in width should be installed equipped with a chain, lock, and key, along the entire running length of the so that any worker who enters the kier machine for the worker to stand on can lock the valve and retain the key while creeling the machine. Such in his possession. Any other method benches or platforms shall be covered which will prevent steam, injurious with an abrasive or nonslip material. gases, or liquids from entering the kier (m) Sliver and ribbon lappers (cotton). while the worker is in it will be accept- Cover guard. An interlocking cover able. guard shall be installed over the large (r) Gray and white bins. On new in- calender drums and the lap spool, de- stallations guard rails conforming to signed to prevent the operator from § 1910.23 shall be provided where work- coming in contact with the nip. ers are required to plait by hand from (n) Looms—(1) Shuttle guard. Each the top of the bin so as to protect the loom shall be equipped with a guard de- worker from falling to a lower level. signed to minimize the danger of the (s) Mercerizing range (piece goods)—(1) shuttle flying out of the shed. Stopping devices. A stopping device (2) Protection for loom fixer. Provisions shall be provided at each end of the shall be made so that every loom fixer machine. can prevent the loom from being start- (2) Frame ends. A guard shall be in- ed while he is at work on the loom. stalled at each end of the frame be- This may be accomplished by means of tween the in-running chain and the clip a lock, the key to which is retained in opener, to prevent the worker’s fingers the possession of the loom fixer, or by from being caught. some other effective means to prevent (3) Mangle and washers. The nip at starting the loom. the in-running rolls shall conform to (o) Shearing machines. All revolving § 1910.264. blades on shearing machines shall be (t) Tenter frames—(1) Stopping devices. guarded so that the opening between A stopping device shall be provided at the cloth surface and the bottom of the each end of the machine. guard will not exceed three-eighths (2) Frame ends. A guard shall be in- inch. stalled at each end of the frame at the (p) Continuous bleach range (cotton in-running chain and clip opener. and rayon)—(1) J-box protection. Each (3) Oil cups. Oil cups shall be safely valve controlling the flow of steam, in- located to permit easy access. jurious gases, or liquids into a J-box (u) Dyeing jigs—(1) Stopping devices. shall be equipped with a chain, lock, Each dye jig shall be equipped with in- and key, so that any worker who enters dividual mechanical or electrical the J-box can lock the valve and retain means for stopping the machine. the key in his possession. Any other (2) Roll arms. Roll arms on jigs shall method which will prevent steam, inju- be built to allow for extra large rious gases, or liquids from entering batches, and to prevent the center bar the J-box while the worker is in it will from being forced off, causing the be acceptable. batch to fall. (2) Open-width bleaching. The nip of (v) Padders—Nip guards. All nip all in-running rolls on open-width guards shall comply with the require- bleaching machine rolls shall be pro- ments of paragraph (h)(2)(iv) of this tected with a guard to prevent the section. worker from being caught at the nip. (w) Drying cans—(1) Pressure reducing The guard shall extend across the en- valves and pressure gages. Pressure re- tire length of the nip. ducing valves and pressure gages shall (q) Kiers—(1) Reducing valves, safety conform to the ASME Code for Pres- valves, and pressure gages. Reducing sure Vessels, Section VIII, 1968, Unfired valves, safety valves, and pressure Pressure Vessels. gages shall conform to the ASME Code (2) Vacuum collapse. If cans are not for Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section designed to prevent vacuum collapse, VIII, Unfired/Pressure Vessels, 1968. each can shall be equipped with one or

712

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00722 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.262

more vacuum relief valves with open- above the level on which the operator ings of sufficient size to prevent the stands and shall be readily accessible. collapse of the can if vacuum occurs. (bb) Rope washers—(1) Splash guard. (x) Flat-work ironer—(1) Feed rolls. Splash guards shall be installed on all The feed rolls shall be guarded to con- rope washers unless the machine is so form to § 1910.264. designed as to prevent the water or liq- (2) Pressure rolls. Pressure rolls shall uid from splashing the operator, the be covered or guarded to conform to floor, or working surface. § 1910.264. (2) Safety stop bar. A safety trip rod, (y) Extractors—(1) Centrifugal extrac- cable or wire center cord shall be pro- tor—(i) Cover. Each extractor shall be vided across the front and back of all equipped with a metal cover. rope washers extending the length of (ii) Interlocking device. Each extractor the face of the washer. It shall operate shall be equipped with an interlocking readily whether pushed or pulled. This device that will prevent the cover from safety trip shall be not more than 72 being opened while the basket is in mo- inches above the level on which the op- tion, and also prevent the power oper- erator stands and shall be readily ac- ation of the basket while the cover is cessible. open. (cc) Laundry washer tumbler or shak- (iii) Brakes. Each extractor shall be er—(1) Interlocking device. Each drying equipped with a mechanically or elec- tumbler, each double cylinder shaker trically operated brake to quickly stop or clothes tumbler, and each washing the basket when the power driving the machine shall be equipped with an basket is shut off. interlock device which will prevent the (iv) Maximum allowable speed. Each power operation of the inside cylinder centrifugal extractor shall be effec- when the outer door on the case or tively secured in position on the floor shell is open, and which will also pre- or foundation so as to eliminate unnec- vent the outer door on the case or shell essary vibration, and should not be op- from being opened without shutting off erated at a speed greater than the man- the power. ufacturer’s rating, which shall be (2) Means of holding covers or doors in stamped where easily visible in letters open position. Each enclosed barrel not less than one-quarter inch in shall also be equipped with adequate height. The maximum allowable speed means for holding open the doors or shall be given in revolutions per covers of the inner and outer cylinders minute (rpm). or shells while it is being loaded or un- (2) Engine drum extractor—Over-speed loaded. governor. Each engine individually (dd) Printing machine (roller type)—(1) driving an extractor shall be provided Nip guards. All nip guards shall comply with an approved engine stop and speed with the requirements of paragraph limit governor. (h)(2)(iv) of this section. (3) Squeezer or wringer extractor—Nip (2) Crown wheel and roller gear nip pro- guards. All nip guards shall comply tection. The engraved roller gears and with the requirements of paragraph the large crown wheel shall be provided (h)(2)(iv) of this section. with a protective disc which will en- (z) Nip guards. All nip guards for close the nips of the in-running gears. water mangle, starch mangle, back- Individual discs for each nip will be ac- washer (worsted yarn) crabbing ma- ceptable. chines, decating machines, shall com- (ee) Calenders. The nip at the in-run- ply with the requirements of paragraph ning side of the rolls shall be provided (h)(2)(iv). with a guard extending across the en- (aa) Sanforizing and palmer machine. A tire length of the nip and arranged to safety trip rod, cable, or wire center prevent the fingers of the workers from cord shall be provided across the front being pulled in between the rolls or be- and back of all palmer cylinders ex- tween the guard and the rolls, and con- tending the length of the face of the structed so that the cloth can be fed cylinder. It shall operate readily into the rolls safely. whether pushed or pulled. This safety (ff) Rotary staple cutters. A guard shall trip shall be not more than 72 inches be installed completely enclosing the

713

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00723 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.263 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

cutters to prevent the hands of the op- made for a copious and flowing supply erator from reaching the cutting zone. of fresh, clean water. (gg) [Reserved] [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 (hh) Hand bailing machine. An angle- FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 49 FR 5324, Feb. 10, iron-handle stop guard shall be in- 1984; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33467, stalled at the right angle to the frame June 18, 1998] of the machine. The stop guard shall be § 1910.263 Bakery equipment. so designed and so located that it will prevent the handle from traveling be- (a) General requirements—(1) Applica- yond the vertical position should the tion. The requirements of this section handle slip from the operator’s hand shall apply to the design, installation, when the pawl has been released from operation and maintenance of machin- the teeth of the takeup gear. ery and equipment used within a bak- (ii) Roll bench. Cleats shall be in- ery. (2) [Reserved] stalled on the ends of roll benches. (b) [Reserved] (jj) Cuttle or swing folder (overhead (c) General machine guarding. type). The bottom of the overhead fold- (1) [Reserved] ers shall be located not less than 7 feet (2) Gears. All gears shall be com- from the floor or working surface. pletely enclosed regardless of location. (kk) Color-mixing room. Floors in (3) Sprockets and V-belt drives. Sprock- color-mixing rooms shall be con- ets and V-belt drives located within structed to drain easily. reach from platforms or pasageways or (ll) Open tanks and vats for mixing and located within 8 feet 6 inches from the storage of hot or corrosive liquids—Shut- floor shall be completely enclosed. off valves. Boiling tanks, caustic tanks, (4) [Reserved] and hot liquid containers, so located (5) Lubrication. Where machinery that the operator cannot see the con- must be lubricated while in motion, tents from the floor or working area, stationary lubrication fittings inside a shall have emergency shutoff valves machine shall be provided with exten- controlled from a point not subject to sion piping to a point of safety so that danger of splash. Valves shall conform the employee will not have to reach to the ASME Pressure Vessel Code, sec- into any dangerous part of the machine tion VIII, Unfired Pressure Vessels, when lubricating. 1968. (6)–(7) [Reserved] (mm) Dye kettles and vats—Pipes or (8) Hot pipes. Exposed hot water and drains of sufficient capacity to carry steam pipes shall be covered with insu- the contents safely away from the lating material wherever necessary to working area shall be installed where protect employee from contact. there are dye kettles and vats which (d) Flour-handling equipment—(1) Gen- may at any time contain hot or corro- eral requirements for flour handling. (i) sive liquids. These shall not empty di- Wherever any of the various pieces of rectly onto the floor. apparatus comprising a flour-handling system are run in electrical unity with (nn) Acid carboys. Carboys shall be one another the following safeguards provided with inclinators, or the acid shall apply: shall be withdrawn from the carboys by (a) [Reserved] means of pumping without pressure in (b) Wherever a flour-handling system the carboy, or by means of hand oper- is of such size that the beginning of its ated siphons. operation is far remote from its final (oo) Handling caustic soda and caustic delivery end, all electric motors oper- potash. Means shall be provided for ating each apparatus comprising this handling and emptying caustic soda system shall be controlled at each of and caustic potash containers to pre- two points, one located at each remote vent workers from coming in contact end, either of which will stop all mo- with the caustic (see paragraph (qq) of tors. this section). (c) [Reserved] (pp) First aid. Wherever acids or (d) Control circuits for magnetic con- caustics are used, provision shall be trollers shall be so arranged that the

714

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00724 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.263

opening of any one of several limit position whenever it is necessary to switches, which may be on an indi- enter the bin. vidual unit, will serve to de-energize (iii) Storage bins where the side is all of the motors of that unit. more than 5 feet in depth shall be pro- (ii) [Reserved] vided with standard stationary safety (2) Bag chutes and bag lifts (bag-arm ladders, both inside and outside, to elevators). (i) Bag chutes (gravity reach from floor level to top of bin and chutes for handling flour bags) shall be from top of bin to inside bottom, keep- so designed so as to keep to a minimum ing the ladder end away from the mov- the speed of flour bags. If the chute in- ing screw conveyor. clines more than 30° from the hori- (iv)–(v) [Reserved] zontal, there shall be an upturn at the (vi) The main entrance cover of large lower end of the chute to slow down storage bins located at the interior exit the bags. ladder shall be provided with an elec- (ii) Bag-arm elevators with manual tric interlock for motors operating takeoff shall be designed to operate at both feed and unloading screw, so that a capacity not exceeding seven bags per these motors cannot operate while the minute. The arms on the conveyor cover is open. chain shall be so spaced as to obtain (7) Screw conveyors. the full capacity of the elevator with (i)–(ii) [Reserved] the lowest possible chain speed. There (iii) The covers of all screw con- shall be an electric limit switch at the veyors shall be made removable in con- unloading end of the bag-arm elevator venient sections, held on with sta- so installed as to automatically stop tionary clamps located at proper inter- the conveyor chain if any bag fails to vals keeping all covers dust-tight. clear the conveyor arms. Where drop or hinged bottom sections (iii) [Reserved] are provided this provision shall not (iv) Man lifts shall be prohibited in apply. bakeries. Bag or barrel lifts shall not (8) Sifters. (i) Enclosures of all types be used as man lifts. of flour sifters shall be so constructed (3) Dumpbin and blender. that they are dust-tight but readily ac- (i)–(iv) [Reserved] cessible for interior inspection. (v) All dumpbin and blender hoods (ii) [Reserved] shall be of sufficient capacity to pre- vent circulation of flour dust outside (9) Flour scales. the hoods. (i)–(ii) [Reserved] (vi) All dumpbins shall be of a suit- (iii) Traveling or track-type flour able height from floor to enable the op- scales shall be equipped with bar han- erator to dump flour from bags, with- dles for moving same. The bar should out causing undue strain or fatigue. be at least 1 inch in diameter and well Where the edge of any bin is more than away from trolley track wheels. 24 inches above the flour, a bag rest (e) Mixers—(1) Horizontal dough mix- step shall be provided. ers. (i) Mixers with external power ap- (vii) A control device for stopping the plication shall have all belts, chains, dumpbin and blender shall be provided gears, pulleys, sprockets, clutches, and close to the normal location of the op- other moving parts completely en- erator. closed. (4)–(5) [Reserved] (ii) [Reserved] (6) Storage bins. (iii) Each mixer shall be equipped (i) [Reserved] with an individual motor and control, (ii) Storage bins shall be provided and with a conveniently located man- with gaskets and locks or latches to ual switch to prevent the mixer from keep the cover closed, or other equiva- being started in the usual manner lent devices in order to insure the dust while the machine is being serviced tightness of the cover. Covers at open- and cleaned. ings where an employee may enter the (iv) All electrical control stations bin shall also be provided with a hasp shall be so located that the operator and a lock, so located that the em- must be in full view of the bowl in its ployee may lock the cover in the open open position. No duplication of such

715

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00725 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.263 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

controls other than a stop switch shall cover is open. The guard on the back be permitted. shall be hinged so that it cannot be (v) All mixers with power and manual completely removed and if a catch or dumping arrangements shall be brace is provided for holding the cover equipped with safety devices which open, it shall be designed so that it will shall: not release due to vibrations or minor (a) Engage both hands of the oper- bumping whereby the cover may drop ator, when the agitator is in motion on an employee. under power, and while the bowl is (g) Moulders—(1) Hoppers. Mechanical opened more than one-fifth of its total feed moulders shall be provided with opening. hoppers so designed and connected to (b) Prevent the agitator from being the proofer that an employee’s hands started, while the bowl is more than cannot get into the hopper where they one-fifth open, without engaging both will come in contact with the in-run- hands of the operator; ning rolls. (vi)–(vii) [Reserved] (2) Hand-fed moulders. Hand-fed (viii) Every mixer shall be equipped moulders shall be provided with a belt- with a full enclosure over the bowl feed device or the hopper shall be ex- which is closed at all times while the tended high enough so that the hands agitator is in motion. Only minor open- of the operator cannot get into the feed ings in this enclosure, such as ingre- rolls. The top edge of such a hopper dient doors, flour inlets, etc., each rep- shall be well rounded to prevent injury resenting less than 11⁄2 square feet in when it is struck or bumped by the em- area, shall be capable of being opened ployee’s hand. while the mixer is in operation. (3) Stopping devices. There shall be a (ix) [Reserved] stopping device within easy reach of (x) Overhead covers or doors which the operator who feeds the moulder and are subject to accidental closure shall another stopping device within the be counterbalanced to remain in an reach of the employee taking the open position or provided with means dough away from the moulder. to hold them open until positively re- (h) Manually fed dough brakes—(1) leased by the operator. Top-roll protection. The top roll shall be (xi)–(xvii) [Reserved] protected by a heavy gage metal shield (xviii) Valves and controls to regu- extending over the roll to go within 6 late the coolant in mixer jackets shall inches of the hopper bottom board. The be located so as to permit access by the shield may be perforated to permit ob- operator without jeopardizing his safe- servation of the dough entering the ty. rolls. (2) Vertical mixers. (i) Vertical mixers (2) Emergency stop bar—An emergency shall comply with paragraphs (e)(1) (i), stop bar shall be provided, and so lo- (iii), (ix) and (x), of this section. cated that the body of the operator will (ii) [Reserved] press against the bar if the operator (iii) Bowl locking devices shall be of slips and falls toward the rolls, or if a positive type which require the at- the operator gets his hand caught in tention of the operator for unlocking. the rolls. The bar shall apply the body (iv) Devices shall be made available pressure to open positively a circuit for moving bowls weighing more than that will deenergize the drive motor. In 80 pounds, with contents, into and out addition, a brake which is inherently of the mixing position on the machine. self-engaging by requiring power or (f) Dividers. force from an external source to cause (1)–(2) [Reserved] disengagement shall be activated at (3) Rear of divider. The back of the di- the same time causing the rolls to stop vider shall have a complete cover to instantly. The emergency stop bar enclose all of the moving parts, or each shall be checked for proper operation individual part shall be enclosed or every 30 days. guarded to remove the separate haz- (i) Miscellaneous equipment—(1) Proof ards. The rear cover shall be provided boxes. All door locks shall be operable with a limit switch in order that the both from within and outside the box. machine cannot operate when this Guide rails shall be installed to center

716

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00726 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.263

the rack as it enters, passes through, (ii) [Reserved] and leaves the proof box. (12) Chain tackle. (i) All chain tackle (2) Fermentation room. Fermentation shall be marked prominently, perma- room doors shall have nonshatterable nently, and legibly with maximum load wire glass or plastic panels for vision capacity. through doors. (ii) All chain tackle shall be marked (3) Troughs. Troughs shall be mount- permanently and legibly with min- ed on antifriction bearing casters thus imum support specification. making it possible for the operator to (iii) Safety hooks shall be used. move and direct the motion of the (13) Trough hoists, etc. (i) All hoists trough with a minimum of effort. shall be marked prominently, perma- (4) Hand trucks. (i) Casters shall be nently, and legibly with maximum load set back from corners to be out of the capacity. way of toes and heels, but not far (ii) All hoists shall be marked perma- enough back to cause the truck to be nently and legibly with minimum sup- unstable. port specifications. (ii) A lock or other device shall be (iii) Safety catches shall be provided provided to hold the handle in vertical for the chain so that the chain will position when the truck is not in use. hold the load in any position. (5) Lift trucks. A lock or other device shall be provided to hold the handle in (iv) Safety hooks shall be used. vertical position when the truck is not (14) Air-conditioning units. in use. (i) [Reserved] (6) Racks. (ii) On large units with doors to (i) [Reserved] chambers large enough to be entered, (ii) Racks shall be equipped with han- all door locks shall be operable from dles so located with reference to the both inside and outside. frame of the rack that no part of the (15) Pan washing tanks. operator’s hands extends beyond the (i) [Reserved] outer edge of the frame when holding (ii) The surface of the floor of the onto the handles. working platform shall be maintained (iii) Antifriction bearing casters in nonslip condition. shall be used to give the operator bet- (iii)–(iv) [Reserved] ter control of the rack. (v) Power ventilated exhaust hoods (7) Conveyors. (i) Wherever a conveyor shall be provided over the tanks. passes over a main aisleway, regularly (16)–(19) [Reserved] occupied work area, or passageway, the (20) Bread coolers, rack type. underside of the conveyor shall be com- (i) [Reserved] pletely enclosed to prevent broken (ii) All door locks shall be operable chains or other material from falling from both within and outside the cool- in the passageway. er. (ii) Stop bumpers shall be installed on all delivery ends of conveyors, wher- (21) [Reserved] ever manual removal of the product (22) Doughnut machines. Separate carried is practiced. flues shall be provided, (i) for venting (iii) Where hazard of getting caught vapors from the frying section, and (ii) exists a sufficient number of stop but- for venting products of combustion tons shall be provided to enable quick from the combustion chamber used to stopping of the conveyor. heat the fat. (8)–(10) [Reserved] (23) Open fat kettles. (i) The floor (11) Ingredient premixers, emulsifiers, around kettles shall be maintained in etc. (i) All top openings shall be pro- nonslip condition. vided with covers attached to the ma- (ii)–(iii) [Reserved] chines. These covers should be so ar- (iv) The top of the kettle shall be not ranged and interlocked that power will less than 36 inches above floor or work- be shut off whenever the cover is ing level. opened to a point where the operator’s (24) Steam kettles. (i) Positive locking fingers might come in contact with the devices shall be provided to hold ket- beaters. tles in the desired position.

717

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00727 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.263 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

(ii) Kettles with steam jackets shall (k) Biscuit and cracker equipment—(1) be provided with safety valves in ac- Meal, peanut, and fig grinders. (i) If the cordance with the ASME Pressure Ves- hopper is removable it shall be pro- sel Code, Section VIII, Unfired Pres- vided with an electric interlock so that sure Vessels, 1968, which is incor- the machine cannot be put in operation porated by reference as specified in when the hopper is removed. § 1910.6. (ii) Where grid guards cannot be used, (j) Slicers and wrappers—(1) Slicers. feed conveyors to hoppers, or baffle- (i)–(ii) [Reserved] type hoppers, shall be provided. Hop- (iii) The cover over the knife head of pers in such cases shall be enclosed and reciprocating-blade slicers shall be pro- provided with hinged covers, and vided with an interlocking arrange- equipped with electric interlock to pre- ment so that the machine cannot oper- vent operation of the machine with the ate unless the cover is in place. cover open. (iv) On slicers with endless band (2) Sugar and spice pulverizers. (i) All knives, each motor shall be equipped drive belts used in connection with with a magnet brake which operates sugar and spice pulverizers shall be whenever the motor is not energized. grounded by means of metal combs or Each door, panel, or other point of ac- other effective means of removing stat- cess to the cutting blades shall be ar- ic electricity. All pulverizing of sugar ranged by means of mechanical or elec- or spice grinding shall be done in ac- tric interlocks so that the motor will cordance with NFPA 62—1967 (Standard be deenergized if all such access doors, for Dust Hazards of Sugar and Cocoa) panels, or access points are not closed. and NFPA 656—1959 (Standard for Dust Hazards in Spice Grinding Plants), (v) When it is necessary to sharpen which are incorporated by reference as slicer blades on the machine, a barrier specified in § 1910.6. shall be provided leaving only suffi- (ii) Magnetic separators shall be pro- cient opening for the sharpening stone vided to reduce fire and explosion haz- to reach the knife blades. ards. (vi) [Reserved] (3) Cheese, fruit, and food cutters. (vii) Slicer wrapper conditions. These machines shall be protected in (a)–(b) [Reserved] accordance with the requirements of (c) Mechanical control levers for paragraph (k)(1) of this section. starting and stopping both slicing ma- (4) [Reserved] chine conveyors and wrapping ma- (5) Reversible dough brakes. Reversible chines shall be extended or so located brakes shall be provided with a guard that an operator in one location can or tripping mechanism on each side of control both machines. Such levers the rolls. These guards shall be so ar- should be provided wherever necessary, ranged as to stop the machine or re- but these should be so arranged that verse the direction of the rolls so that there is only one station capable of they are outrunning if the guard is starting the wrapping machine and moved by contact of the operator. conveyor assembly, and this starting (6) Cross-roll brakes. Cross-roll brakes station should be so arranged or guard- shall be provided with guards that are ed as to prevent accidental starting. similar in number and equal in effec- The electric control station for start- tiveness to guards on hand-fed brakes. ing and stopping the electric motor (7) Box- and roll-type dough sheeters. driving the wrapping machine and con- (i) [Reserved] veyor should be located near the clutch (ii) Hoppers for sheeters shall have an starting lever. automatic stop bar or automatic stop- (2) Wrappers. ping device along the back edge of the (i)–(ii) [Reserved] hopper. If construction does not permit (iii) Electrical heaters on wrappers location at the back edge, the auto- shall be protected by a cover plate matic stop bar or automatic stopping properly separated or insulated from device shall be located where it will be the heaters in order that accidental most effective to accomplish the de- contact with this cover plate will not sired protection. cause a burn to the operator. (8) [Reserved]

718

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00728 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.263

(9) Rotary, die machines, pretzel rolling, must enter the oven or when the oven and pretzel-stick extruding machines. is not in service. Dough hoppers shall have the entire (4)–(7) [Reserved] opening protected with substantial (8) Electrical heating equipment. grid-type guards to prevent the em- (i)–(ii) [Reserved] ployee from getting his hands caught (iii) A main disconnect switch or cir- in moving parts, or the hopper shall be cuit breaker shall be provided. This extended high enough so that the oper- switch or circuit breaker shall be so lo- ator’s hands cannot get into moving cated that it can be reached quickly parts. and safely. The main switch or circuit (10)–(11) [Reserved] breaker shall have provisions for lock- (12) Pan cooling towers. (i) Where pan ing it in the open position if any work cooling towers extend to two or more on the electrical equipment or inside floors, a lockout switch shall be pro- the oven must be performed. vided on each floor in order that me- (9) General requirements. (i) Protecting chanics working on the tower may devices shall be properly maintained positively lock the mechanism against and kept in working order. starting. Only one start switch shall be (ii) All safety devices on ovens shall used in the motor control circuit. be inspected at intervals of not less (ii) [Reserved] than twice a month by an especially (13) Chocolate melting, refining, and appointed, properly instructed bakery mixing kettles. Each kettle shall be pro- employee, and not less than once a vided with a cover to enclose the top of year by representatives of the oven the kettle. The bottom outlet of each manufacturers. kettle shall be of such size and shape (iii)(a) Protection of gas pilot lights that the operator cannot reach in to shall be provided when it is impracti- touch the revolving paddle or come in cable to protect the main flame of the contact with the shear point between burner and where the pilot flame can- the paddle and the side of the kettle. not contact the flame electrode with- (14)–(16) [Reserved] out being in the path of the main flame (17) Peanut cooling trucks. Mechani- of the burner. Failure of any gas pilot cally operated peanut cooling trucks shall automatically shut off the fuel shall have a grid-type cover over the supply to the burner. entire top. (b) Ovens with multiple burners shall (l) Ovens—(1) General location. be equipped with individual atmos- (i)–(vi) [Reserved] pheric pilot lights where there is suffi- (vii) Ovens shall be located so that cient secondary air in the baking possible fire or explosion will not ex- chamber and where gas is available; or pose groups of persons to possible in- else each burner shall be equipped with jury. For this reason ovens shall not an electric spark-type ignition device. adjoin lockers, lunch or sales rooms, (iv) Burners of a capacity exceeding main passageways, or exits. 150,000 B.t.u. per hour equipped with (2) [Reserved] electric ignition shall be protected in (3) Safeguards of mechanical parts. (i) addition by quick-acting combustion Emergency stop buttons shall be pro- safeguards. vided on mechanical ovens near the (a) The high-tension current for any point where operators are stationed. electric spark-type ignition device (ii) All piping at ovens shall be tested shall originate in a power supply line to be gastight. which is interlocked with the fuel sup- (iii) Main shutoff valves, operable ply for the oven in such a way that in separately from any automatic valve, case of current failure both the source shall be provided to permit turning off of electricity to the high-tension cir- the fuel or steam in case of an emer- cuits and the fuel supply shall be gency. turned off simultaneously. (a) Main shutoff valves shall be lo- (b) [Reserved] cated so that explosions, fires, etc. will (c) Combustion safeguards used in not prevent access to these valves. connection with electric ignition sys- (b) Main shutoff valves shall be tems on ovens shall be so designed as locked in the closed position when men to prevent an explosive mixture from

719

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00729 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.263 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

accumulating inside the oven before ig- (a) Explosion doors which have a sub- nition has taken place. stantial weight shall be attached by (v) When fuel is supplied and used at chains or similar means to prevent fly- line pressure, safety shutoff valves ing parts from injuring the personnel shall be provided in the fuel line lead- in case of an explosion. ing to the burner. (b) Where explosion vents are so lo- (a) When fuel is supplied in excess of cated that flying parts or gases might line pressure, safety shutoff valves endanger the personnel working on or shall be provided in the fuel line lead- near the oven, internal or external pro- ing to the burners, unless the fuel sup- tecting means shall be provided in the ply lines are equipped with other auto- form of heavily constructed shields or matic valves which will prevent the deflectors made from noncombustible flow of fuel when the compressing material. equipment is stopped. (c) Specifically exempted from the (b) The safety shutoff valve shall be provisions of paragraph paragraph positively tight and shall be tested at (l)(8)(viii) of this section are heating least twice monthly. systems on ovens in which the fuel is (c)–(d) [Reserved] admitted only to enclosed spaces which (e) A safety shutoff valve shall re- shall have been tested to prove that quire manual operation for reopening their construction will resist repeated after it has closed, or the electric cir- explosions without deformation are ex- cuit shall be so arranged that it will re- empt from the requirements of para- quire a manual operation for reopening graph (l)(8)(viii) (a) and (b) of this sec- the safety shutoff valve. tion. (f) Manual reset-type safety shutoff (ix)–(x) [Reserved] valves shall be so arranged that they (xi) Where the gas supply pressure is cannot be locked in an open position by substantially higher than that at external means. which the burners of an oven are de- (g) Where blowers are used for sup- signed to operate, a gas pressure regu- plying the air for combustion the safe- lator shall be employed. ty shutoff valve shall be interlocked so (a)–(c) [Reserved] that it will close in case of air failure. (d) A relief valve shall be placed on (h) Where gas or electric ignition is the outlet side of gas pressure regu- used, the safety shutoff valve shall lators where gas is supplied at high close in case of ignition failure. On pressure. The discharge from this valve burners equipped with combustion safe- shall be piped to the outside of the guards, the valve shall close in case of building. burner flame failure. (10) Direct-fired ovens. (i) Direct-fired (vi) One main, manually operated, ovens shall be safeguarded against fail- fuel shutoff valve shall be provided on ure of fuel, air, or ignition. each oven, and shall be located ahead (ii) To prevent the possible accumu- of all other valves in the system. lation of explosive gases from being ig- (vii) All individual gas or oil burners nited after a shutdown, all direct-fired with a heating capacity over 150,000 ovens with a heating capacity over B.t.u. per hour shall be protected by a 150,000 B.t.u. per hour shall be venti- safeguard which is actuated by the lated before the ignition system, com- flame and which will react to flame bustion air blower, and the fuel can be failure in a time interval not to exceed turned on. The preventilation shall in- 2 seconds. All safeguards, once having sure at least four complete changes of shut down a gas or oil burner, shall re- atmosphere in the baking chamber by quire manual resetting and starting of discharging the oven atmosphere to the the burner or burners. outside of the building and entraining (viii) Any space in an oven (except di- fresh air into it. The preventilation rect fired ovens) which could be filled shall be repeated whenever the heating with an explosive mixture shall be pro- equipment is shut down by a safety de- tected by explosion vents. Explosion vice. vents shall be made of minimum (11) Direct recirculating ovens. (i) Each weight consistent with adequate insu- circulating fan in direct recirculating lation. ovens shall be interconnected with the

720

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00730 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.264

burner in such a manner that the fuel (v) Exception. Provisions of paragraph is shut off by a safety valve when the (c)(2) (iii), (iv)(a)(1), and (iv)(b) of this fan is not running. section shall not apply to shakeout or (ii) The flame of the burner or burn- conditioning tumblers where the ers in direct recirculating ovens shall clothes are loaded into the open end of be protected by a quick-acting flame- the revolving cylinder and are auto- sensitive safeguard which will auto- matically discharged out of the oppo- matically shut off the fuel supply in site end. case of burner failure. (3) [Reserved] (12)–(14) [Reserved] (4) Miscellaneous machines and equip- (15) Indirect recirculating ovens. ment. (i)–(ii) [Reserved] (i)–(ii) [Reserved] (iii) Duct systems (in ovens) oper- (iii) Steam pipes. (a) All steam pipes ating under pressure shall be tested for that are within 7 feet of the floor or tightness in the initial starting of the oven and also at intervals not farther working platform, and with which the apart than 6 months. worker may come into contact, shall be insulated or covered with a heat-re- [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 sistive material or shall be otherwise FR 49765, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51760, Nov. 7, properly guarded. 1978; 61 FR 9241, Mar. 7, 1996] (b) Where pressure-reducing valves § 1910.264 Laundry machinery and op- are used, one or more relief or safety erations. valves shall be provided on the low- (a) [Reserved] pressure side of the reducing valve, in (b) General requirements. This section case the piping or equipment on the applies to moving parts of equipment low-pressure side does not meet the re- used in laundries and to conditions pe- quirements for full initial pressure. culiar to this industry, with special The relief or safety valve shall be lo- reference to the point of operation of cated adjacent to, or as close as pos- laundry machines. This section does sible to, the reducing valve. Proper not apply to dry-cleaning operations. protection shall be provided to prevent (c) Point-of-operation guards—(1) injury or damage caused by fluid escap- Washroom machines. ing from relief or safety valves if vent- (i) [Reserved] ed to the atmosphere. The vents shall (ii) Washing machine. be of ample size and as short and direct (a) [Reserved] as possible. The combined discharge ca- (b) Each washing machine shall be pacity of the relief valves shall be such provided with means for holding open that the pressure rating of the lower- the doors or covers of inner and outer pressure piping and equipment will not cylinders or shells while being loaded be exceeded if the reducing valve sticks or unloaded. or fails to open. (2) Starching and drying machines. (d) Operating rules—(1) General. (i)–(ii) [Reserved] (i)–(ii) [Reserved] (iii) Drying tumbler. (iii) Markers. Markers and others (a) [Reserved] handling soiled clothes shall be warned (b) Each drying tumbler shall be pro- against touching the eyes, mouth, or vided with means for holding open the any part of the body on which the skin doors or covers of inner and outer cyl- has been broken by a scratch or abra- inders or shells while being loaded or sion; and they shall be cautioned not to unloaded. touch or eat food until their hands (iv) Shaker (clothes tumbler). (a) through (b)(1) [Reserved] have been thoroughly washed. (2) Each shaker or clothes tumbler of (iv) [Reserved] the double-cylinder type shall be pro- (v) Instruction of employees. Employ- vided with means for holding open the ees shall be properly instructed as to doors or covers of inner and outer cyl- the hazards of their work and be in- inders or shells while being loaded or structed in safe practices, by bulletins, unloaded. printed rules, and verbal instructions.

721

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00731 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.265 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

(2) Mechanical—(i) Safety guards. (a) face of the saw, and which contains ap- No safeguard, safety appliance, or de- paratus to hold a log securely and ad- vice attached to, or forming an inte- vance it towards the saw. gral part of any machinery shall be re- (9) Carrier. The term carrier means an moved or made ineffective except for industrial truck so designed and con- the purpose of making immediate re- structed that it straddles the load to be pairs or adjustments. Any such safe- transported with mechanisms to pick guard, safety appliance, or device re- up the load and support it during trans- moved or made ineffective during the portation. repair or adjustment of such machin- (10) Chipper. The term chipper means ery shall be replaced immediately upon a machine which cuts material into the completion of such repairs or ad- chips. justments. (11) Chock (bunk block) (cheese block). (b) [Reserved] The terms chock, bunk block, and cheese [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 43 block mean a wedge that prevents logs FR 49767, Oct. 24, 1978; 43 FR 51760, Nov. 7, or loads from moving. 1978] (12) Cold deck. The term cold deck means a pile of logs stored for future § 1910.265 Sawmills. removal. (a) General requirements—Application. (13) Crotch lines. The term crotch lines This section includes safety require- means two short lines attached to a ments for sawmill operations includ- hoisting line by a ring or shackle, the ing, but not limited to, log and lumber lower ends being attached to loading handling, sawing, trimming, and hooks. planing; waste disposal; operation of (14) Dog (carriage dog). The term dog dry kilns; finishing; shipping; storage; means a steel tooth, one or more of yard and yard equipment; and for which are attached to each carriage power tools and affiliated equipment knee to hold log firmly in place on car- used in connection with such oper- riage. ations, but excluding the manufacture (15) Drag saw. The term drag saw of plywood, cooperage, and veneer. means a power-driven, reciprocating (b) Definitions applicable to this sec- crosscut saw mounted on suitable tion—(1) A-frame. The term A-frame frame and used for bucking logs. means a structure made of two inde- (16) Head block. The term head block pendent columns fastened together at means that part of a carriage which the top and separated at the bottom for holds the log and upon which it rests. stability. It generally consists of base, knee, (2) Annealing. The term annealing taper set, and mechanism. means heating then cooling to soften (17) Head rig. The term head rig and render less brittle. means a combination of head saw and (3) Binder. The term binder means a log carriage used for the initial break- chain, cable, rope, or other approved down of logs into timbers, cants, and material used for binding loads. boards. (4) Boom. The term boom means logs (18) Hog. The term hog means a ma- or timbers fastened together end to end chine for cutting or grinding slabs and and used to contain floating logs. The other coarse residue from the mill. term includes enclosed logs. (19) Husk. The term husk means a (5) Brow log. The term brow log means head saw framework on a circular mill. a log placed parallel to a roadway at a (20) Industrial truck. The term indus- landing or dump to protect vehicles trial truck means a mobile powerdriven while loading or unloading. truck or tractor. (6) Bunk. The term bunk means a (21) Kiln tender. The term kiln tender cross support for a load. means the operator of a kiln. (7) Cant. The term cant means a log (22) Lift truck. The term lift truck slabbed on one or more sides. means an industrial truck used for lat- (8) Carriage (log carriage). The term eral transportation and equipped with carriage means a framework mounted a power-operated lifting device, usually on wheels which runs on tracks or in in the form of forks, for piling or grooves in a direction parallel to the unpiling lumber units or packages.

722

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00732 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.265

(23) Live rolls. The term live rolls (38) Spreader wheel. The term spreader means cylinders of wood or metal wheel means a metal wheel that sepa- mounted on horizontal axes and ro- rates the board from the log in back of tated by power, which are used to con- circular saws to prevent binding. vey slabs, lumber, and other wood (39) Splitter. The term splitter means a products. knife-type, nonrotating spreader. (24) Loading boom. The term loading (40) Sticker. The term sticker means a boom means any structure projecting strip of wood or other material used to from a pivot point to guide a log when separate layers of lumber. lifted. (41) Stiff boom. The term stiff boom (25) Log deck. The term Log deck means the anchored, stationary boom means a platform in the sawmill on sticks which are tied together and on which the logs remain until needed for which boom men work. sawing. (42) Swifter. The term swifter is a (26) Lumber hauling truck. The term means of tying boom sticks together to lumber hauling truck means an indus- prevent them from spreading while trial truck, other than a lift truck or a being towed. carrier, used for the transport of lum- (43) Telltale. The term telltale means a ber. device used to serve as a warning for (27) Log haul. The term log haul overhead objects. means a conveyor for transferring logs (44) Top saw. The term top saw means to mill. the upper of two circular saws on a (28) Package. The term package means head rig, both being on the same husk. a unit of lumber. (45) Tramway. The term tramway means a way for trams, usually con- (29) Peavy. The term peavy means a sisting of parallel tracks laid on wood- stout wooden handle fitted with a spike en beams. and hook and used for rolling logs. (46) Trestle. The term trestle means a (30) Pike pole. The term pike pole braced framework of timbers, piles or means a long pole whose end is shod steelwork for carrying a road or rail- with a sharp pointed spike. road over a depression. (31) Pitman rod. The term pitman rod (c) Building facilities, and isolated means connecting rod. equipment—(1) Safety factor. All build- (32) Resaw. The term resaw means ings, docks, tramways, walkways, log band, circular, or sash gang saws used dumps, and other structures shall be to break down slabs, cants, or flitches designed, constructed and maintained into lumber. so as to support the imposed load in ac- (33) Running line. The term running cordance with a safety factor. line means any moving rope as distin- (2) Work areas. Work areas under guished from a stationary rope such as mills shall be as evenly surfaced as a guyline. local conditions permit. They shall be (34) Safety factor. The term safety fac- free from unnecessary obstructions and tor means a calculated reduction factor provided with lighting facilities in ac- which may be applied to laboratory cordance with American National test values to obtain safe working Standard for Industrial Lighting stresses for wooden beams and other A11.1—1965, which is incorporated by mechanical members; ratio of breaking reference as specified in § 1910.6. load to safe load. (3) Floors. Flooring in buildings and (35) Saw guide. The term saw guide on ramps and walkways shall be con- means a device for steadying a circular structed and installed in accordance or bandsaw. with established principles of mechan- (36) Setwork. The term setwork means ics and sound engineering practices. a mechanism on a sawmill carriage They shall be of adequate strength to which enables an operator to move the support the estimated or actual dead log into position for another cut. and live loads acting on them with the (37) Sorting gaps. The term sorting resultant stress not exceeding the al- gaps means the areas on a log pond en- lowable stress for the material being closed by boom sticks into which logs used. are sorted. (i) [Reserved]

723

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00733 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.265 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

(ii) Areas beneath floor openings. Areas wide there shall be a standard handrail under floor openings shall, where prac- at each side, and where more than tical, be fenced off. When this is not eight feet wide, a third standard hand- practical, they shall be plainly marked rail shall be erected in the center of and telltales shall be installed to hang the stairway. over these areas. (iii) Lighting. All stairways shall be (iii) Floor maintenance. The flooring adequately lighted as prescribed in of buildings, docks, and passageways paragraph (c)(9) of this section. shall be kept in good repair. When a (6) Emergency exits including doors and hazardous condition develops that can- fire escapes—(i) Opening. Doors shall not be immediately repaired, the area not open directly on or block a flight of shall be guarded until adequate repairs stairs, and shall swing in the direction are made. of exit travel. (iv) Nonslip floors. Floors, footwalks, (ii) Identification. Exits shall be lo- and passageways in the work area cated and identified in a manner that around machines or other places where affords ready exit from all work areas. a person is required to stand or walk (iii) Swinging doors. All swinging shall be provided with effective means doors shall be provided with windows; to minimize slipping. with one window for each section of (4) Walkways, docks, and platforms—(i) double swinging doors. Such windows Width. Walkways, docks, and platforms shall be of shatterproof or safety glass shall be of sufficient width to provide unless otherwise protected against adequate passage and working areas. breakage. (ii) Maintenance. Walkways shall be (iv) Sliding doors. Where sliding doors evenly floored and kept in good repair. are used as exits, an inner door shall be (iii) Docks. Docks and runways used cut inside each of the main doors and for the operation of lift trucks and arranged to open outward. other vehicles shall have a substantial (v) Barriers and warning signs. Where guard or shear timber except where a doorway opens upon a railroad track loading and unloading are being per- or upon a tramway or dock over which formed. vehicles travel, a barrier or other (iv) Elevated walks. All elevated warning device shall be placed to pre- walks, runways, or platforms, if 4 feet vent workmen from stepping into mov- or more from the floor level, shall be ing traffic. provided with a standard railing except (7) Air requirements. Ventilation shall on loading or unloading sides of plat- be provided to supply adequate fresh forms. If height exceeds 6 feet, a stand- healthful air to rooms, buildings, and ard toe board also shall be provided to work areas. prevent material from rolling or falling (8) Vats and tanks. All open vats and off. tanks into which workmen could fall (v) Elevated platforms. Where elevated shall be guarded. platforms are used routinely on a daily (9) Lighting—(i) Adequacy. Illumina- basis they shall be equipped with stair- tion shall be provided and designed to ways or fixed ladders in accordance supply adequate general and local with § 1910.27. lighting to rooms, buildings, and work (vi) Hazardous locations. Where re- areas during the time of use. quired, walkways and stairways with (ii) Effectiveness. Factors upon which standard handrails shall be provided in the adequacy and effectiveness of illu- elevated and hazardous locations. mination will be judged, include the Where such passageways are over walk- following: ways or work areas, standard toe (a) The quantity of light in foot-can- boards shall be provided. dle intensity shall be sufficient for the (5) Stairways—(i) Construction. Stair- work being done. ways shall be constructed in accord- (b) The quality of the light shall be ance with § 1910.24. such that it is free from glare, and has (ii) Handrails. Stairways shall be pro- correct direction, diffusion, and dis- vided with a standard handrail on at tribution. least one side or on any open side. (c) Shadows and extreme contrasts Where stairs are more than four feet shall be avoided or kept to a minimum.

724

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00734 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.265

(10) [Reserved] (20) Blower, collecting, and exhaust sys- (11) Hazard marking. Physical hazard tems—(i) Design, construction, and main- marking shall be as specified in tenance. Blower collecting, and exhaust § 1910.144 of this part. systems should be designed, con- (12) [Reserved] structed, and maintained in accordance (13) Hydraulic systems. Means shall be with American National Standards provided to block, chain, or otherwise Z33.1—1961 (For the Installation of secure equipment normally supported Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, by hydraulic pressure so as to provide Stock, and Vapor Removal or Con- for safe maintenance. veying) and Z12.2—1962 (R1969) (Code (14) [Reserved] for the Prevention of Dust Explosion in (15) Gas piping and appliances. All gas Woodworking and Wood Flour Manu- piping and appliances shall be installed facturing Plants), which are incor- in accordance with the American Na- porated by reference as specified in tional Standard Requirements for the § 1910.6. Installation of Gas Appliances and Gas (ii) Collecting systems. All mills con- Piping Z21.30—1964, which is incor- taining one or more machines that cre- porated by reference as specified in ate dust, shavings, chips, or slivers § 1910.6. during a period of time equal to or (16)–(17) [Reserved] greater than one-fourth of the working (18) Conveyors—(i) Standards. Con- day, shall be equipped with a collecting struction, operation, and maintenance system. It may be either continuous or of conveyors shall be in accordance automatic, and shall be of sufficient with American National Standard strength and capacity to enable it to B20.1—1957, which is incorporated by remove such refuse from points of oper- reference as specified in § 1910.6. ation and immediate vicinities of ma- (ii) Guarding. Spiked live rolls shall chines and work areas. be guarded. (iii) Exhaust or conveyor systems. Each (19) Stationary tramways and trestles— woodworking machine that creates (i) Foundations and walkways. Tram- dust, shavings, chips, or slivers shall be ways and trestles shall have substan- equipped with an exhaust or conveyor tial mud sills or foundations which system located and adjusted to remove shall be frequently inspected and kept the maximum amount of refuse from in repair. When vehicles are operated the point of operation and immediate on tramways and trestles which are vicinity. used for foot passage, traffic shall be (iv) [Reserved] controlled or a walkway with standard (v) Dust chambers. Exhaust pipes shall handrails at the outer edge and shear not discharge into an unconfined out- timber on the inner edge shall be pro- side pile if uncontrolled fire or explo- vided. This walkway shall be wide sion hazards are created. They may enough to allow adequate clearance to empty into settling or dust chambers, vehicles. When walkways cross over designed to prevent the dust or refuse other thoroughfares, they shall be sol- from entering any work area. Such idly fenced at the outer edge to a chambers shall be constructed and op- height of 42 inches over such thorough- erated to minimize the danger of fire fares. or dust explosion. (ii) Clearance. Stationary tramways (vi) Hand removal of refuse. Provision and trestles shall have a vertical clear- for the daily removal of refuse shall be ance of 22 feet over railroad rails. When made in all operations not required to constructed over carrier docks or have an exhaust system or having roads, they shall have a clearance of 6 refuse too heavy, bulky, or otherwise feet above the driver’s foot rest on the unsuitable to be handled by the ex- carrier, and in no event shall this haust system. clearance be less than 12 feet from the (21) Chippers—(i) Whole-log chippers. roadway. In existing operations where The feed system to the chipper shall be it is impractical to obtain such clear- arranged so the operator does not ance, telltales, electric signals, signs stand in direct line with the chipper or other precautionary measures shall spout (hopper). The chipper spout shall be installed. be enclosed to a height of not less than

725

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00735 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.265 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

36 inches from the floor or the opera- (iii) Work by qualified persons. Instal- tor’s platform. A safety belt and life- lation, inspection, maintenance, re- line shall be worn by workmen when pair, and testing of ropes, cables, working at or near the spout unless the slings, and chains shall be done only by spout is guarded. The lifeline shall be persons qualified to do such work. short enough to prevent workers from (iv) Slings. Proper storage shall be falling into the chipper. provided for slings while not in use. (ii) Hogs. (a) Hog mills shall be so de- (v) Ropes or cables. (a) Wire rope or signed and arranged that from no posi- cable shall be inspected when installed tion on the rim of the chute shall the and once each week thereafter, when in distance to the cutter knives be less use. It shall be removed from hoisting than 40 inches. or load-carrying service when kinked (b) Hog feed chutes shall be provided or when one of the following conditions with suitable and approved baffles, exists: which shall minimize material from (1) When three broken wires are being thrown from the mill. found in one lay of 6 by 6 wire rope. (c) Employees feeding hog mills shall (2) When six broken wires are found be provided with safety belts and lines in one lay of 6 by 19 wire rope. unless guarded. (3) When nine broken wires are found (22) [Reserved] in one lay of 6 by 37 wire rope. (23) Bins, bunkers, hoppers, and fuel (4) When eight broken wires are houses—(i) Guarding. Open bins, bunk- found in one lay of 8 by 19 wire rope. ers, and hoppers whose upper edges ex- tend less than 3 feet above working (5) When marked corrosion appears. level shall be equipped with standard (6) Wire rope of a type not described handrails and toe boards, or have their herein shall be removed from service tops covered by a substantial grill or when 4 percent of the total number of grating with openings small enough to wires composing such rope are found to prevent a man from falling through. be broken in one lay. (ii) Use of wheeled equipment to load (b) Wire rope removed from service bins. Where automotive or other due to defects shall be plainly marked wheeled equipment is used to move ma- or identified as being unfit for further terials into bins, bunkers, and hoppers, use on cranes, hoists, and other load- adequate guard rails shall be installed carrying devices. along each side of the runway, and a (c) The ratio between the rope diame- substantial bumper stop provided when ter and the drum, block, sheave, or pul- necessary. ley tread diameter shall be such that (iii) Exits, lighting, and safety devices. the rope will adjust itself to the bend Fuel houses and bins shall have ade- without excessive wear, deformation, quate exits and lighting, and all nec- or injury. In no case shall the safe essary safety devices shall be provided value of drums, blocks, sheaves, or pul- and shall be used by persons entering leys be reduced when replacing such these structures. items unless compensating changes are (iv) Walkways. Where needed, fuel made for rope used and for safe loading houses and bins shall have a standard limits. railed platform or walkway near the (vi) Drums, sheaves, and pulleys. top. Drums, sheaves, and pulleys shall be (24) Ropes, cables, slings, and chains— smooth and free from surface defects (i) Safe usage. Ropes, cables, slings, and liable to injure rope. Drums, sheaves, chains shall be used in accordance with or pulleys having eccentric bores or safe use practices recommended by the cracked hubs, spokes, or flanges shall manufacturer or within safe limits rec- be removed from service. ommended by the equipment manufac- (vii) Connections. Connections, fit- turer when used in conjunction with it. tings, fastenings, and other parts used (ii) Hooks. No open hook shall be used in connection with ropes and cables in rigging to lift any load where there shall be of good quality and of proper is hazard from relieving the tension on size and strength, and shall be installed the hook from the load or hook catch- in accordance with the manufacturer’s ing or fouling. recommendations.

726

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00736 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.265

(viii) Socketing, splicing, and seizing. (e) Broken chains shall not be spliced (a) Socketing, splicing, and seizing of by inserting a bolt between two links cables shall be performed only by with the head of the bolt and nut sus- qualified persons. taining the load, or by passing one link (b) All eye splices shall be made in an through another and inserting a bolt or approved manner and wire rope thim- nail to hold it. bles of proper size shall be fitted in the (x) Fiber rope. (a) Frozen fiber rope eye, except that in slings the use of shall not be used in load carrying serv- thimbles shall be optional. ice. (c) Wire rope clips attached with U- (b) Fiber rope that has been subjected bolts shall have these bolts on the dead to acid or excessive heat shall not be or short end of the rope. The U-bolt used for load carrying purposes. nuts shall be retightened immediately (c) Fiber rope shall be protected from after initial load carrying use and at abrasion by padding where it is fas- frequent intervals thereafter. tened or drawn over square corners or (d) When a wedge socket-type fas- sharp or rough surfaces. tening is used, the dead or short end of (25) [Reserved] the cable shall be clipped with a U-bolt (26) Mechanical stackers and or otherwise made secure against loos- unstackers. ening. (i) [Reserved] (e) Fittings. Hooks, shackles, rings, (ii) Lumber lifting devices. Lumber lift- pad eyes, and other fittings that show ing devices on all stackers shall be de- excessive wear or that have been bent, signed and arranged so as to minimize twisted, or otherwise damaged shall be the possibility of lumber falling from removed from service. such devices. (f) Running lines. Running lines of (iii) Blocking hoisting platform. Means hoisting equipment located within 6 shall be provided to positively block feet 6 inches of the ground or working the hoisting platform when employees level shall be boxed off or otherwise must go beneath the stacker or guarded, or the operating area shall be unstacker hoist. restricted. (iv) Identifying controls. Every manu- ally operated control switch shall be (g) Number of wraps on drum. There properly identified and so located as to shall be not less than two full wraps of be readily accessible to the operator. hoisting cable on the drum of cranes (v) Locking main control switches. and hoists at all times of operation. Main control switches shall be so de- (h) Drum flanges. Drums shall have a signed that they can be locked in the flange at each end to prevent the cable open position. from slipping off. (vi) Guarding side openings. The (i) Sheave guards. Bottom sheaves hoistway side openings at the top level shall be protected by close fitting of the stacker and unstacker shall be guards to prevent cable from jumping protected by enclosures of standard the sheave. railings. (j) Preventing abrasion. The reeving of (vii) Guarding hoistway openings. a rope shall be so arranged as to mini- When the hoist platform or top of the mize chafing or abrading while in use. load is below the working platform, the (ix) Chains. (a) Chains used in load hoistway openings shall be guarded. carrying service shall be inspected be- (viii) Guarding lower landing area. The fore initial use and weekly thereafter. lower landing area of stackers and (b) Chain shall be normalized or an- unstackers shall be guarded by enclo- nealed periodically as recommended by sures that prevent entrance to the area the manufacturer. or pit below the hoist platform. En- (c) If at any time any 3-foot length of trances should be protected by elec- chain is found to have stretched one- trically interlocked gates which, when third the length of a link it shall be open, will disconnect the power and set discarded. the hoist brakes. When the interlock is (d) Bolts or nails shall not be placed not installed, other positive means of between two links to shorten or join protecting the entrance shall be pro- chains. vided.

727

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00737 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.265 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

(ix) Inspection. Every stacker and (29) Burners—(i) Guying. If the burner unstacker shall be inspected at fre- stack is not self-supporting, it shall be quent intervals and all defective parts guyed or otherwise supported. shall be immediately repaired or re- (ii) Runway. The conveyor runway to placed. the burner shall be equipped with a (x) Cleaning pits. Safe means of en- standard handrail. If the runway trance and exit shall be provided to crosses a roadway or thoroughfare, permit cleaning of pits. standard toe boards shall be provided (xi) Preventing entry to hazardous in addition. area. Where the return of trucks from (30) Vehicles—(i) Scope. Vehicles shall unstacker to stacker is by mechanical include all mobile equipment normally power or gravity, adequate signs, warn- used in sawmill, planing mill, storage, ing devices, or barriers shall be erected shipping, and yard operations. to prevent entry into the hazardous (ii) Warning signals and spark arres- area. tors. All vehicles shall be equipped with (27) Lumber piling and storage—(i) Pile audible warning signals and where foundations. In stacking units of lum- practicable shall have spark arrestors. ber, pile foundations shall be designed (iii) Lights. All vehicles operated in and arranged to support maximum the dark or in poorly lighted areas loads without sinking, sagging, or per- shall be equipped with head and tail lights. mitting the piles to topple. In unit (iv) Overhead guard. All vehicles op- package piles, substantial bolsters or erated in areas where overhead hazards unit separators shall be placed between exist shall be equipped with an ap- each package directly over the stick- proved overhead guard. See American ers. National Standard Safety Code for (ii) Stacking dissimilar unit packages. Powered Industrial Trucks, B56.1—1969, Long units of lumber shall not be which is incorporated by reference as stacked upon shorter packages except specified in § 1910.6. where a stable pile can be made with (v) Platform guard. Where the oper- the use of package separators. ator is exposed to hazard from backing (iii) Unstable piles. Piles of lumber the vehicle into objects, an approved which have become unstable shall be platform guard shall be provided and so immediately made safe, or the area arranged as to not impede exit of driv- into which they might fall shall be er from vehicle. fenced or barricaded and employees (vi) [Reserved] prohibited from entering it. (vii) Operation in buildings. Vehicles (iv) Stickers. Unit packages of lumber powered by internal combustion en- shall be provided with stickers as nec- gines shall not operate in buildings un- essary to insure stability under ordi- less the buildings are adequately venti- nary operating conditions. lated. (v) Sticker alignment. Stickers shall (viii) Load limits. No vehicle shall be extend the full width of the package, operated with loads exceeding its safe shall be uniformly spaced, and shall be load capacity. aligned one above the other. Stickers (ix) Brakes. All vehicles shall be may be lapped with a minimum over- equipped with brakes capable of hold- lapping of 12 inches. Stickers shall not ing and controlling the vehicle and ca- protrude more than 2 inches beyond pacity load upon any incline or grade the sides of the package. over which they may be operated. (vi) Pile height. The height of unit (x) [Reserved] package piles shall be dependent on the (xi) Carriers. (a) Carriers shall be so dimensions of the packages and shall designed and constructed that the op- be such as to provide stability under erator’s field of vision shall not be un- normal operating conditions. Adjacent necessarily restricted. lumber piles may be tied together with (b) Carriers shall be provided with an separators to increase stability. access ladder or equivalent. (28) Lumber loading. Loads shall be (xii) Lumber hauling trucks. (a) On built and secured to insure stability in trucks where movement of load on transit. stopping would endanger the operator,

728

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00738 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.265

a substantial bulkhead shall be in- with brakes capable of controlling or stalled behind the operator’s seat. This holding the maximum load in midair. shall extend to the top of the opera- (b) The lifting cylinders of all hy- tor’s compartment. draulically operated log handling ma- (b) Stakes, stake pockets, racks, chines shall be equipped with a positive tighteners, and binders shall provide device for preventing the uncontrolled adequate means to secure the load lowering of the load or forks in case of against any movement during transit. a failure in the hydraulic system. (c) Where rollers are used, at least (c) A limit switch shall be installed two shall be equipped with locks which on powered log handling machines to shall be locked when supporting loads prevent the lift arms from traveling during transit. too far in the event the control switch (31) Traffic control and flow—(i) Haz- is not released in time. ardous crossings. Railroad tracks and (d) When forklift-type machines are other hazardous crossings shall be used to load trailers, a means of secur- plainly posted. ing the loading attachment to the fork (ii) Restricted overhead clearance. All shall be installed and used. areas of restricted side or overhead (e) A-frames and similar log unload- clearance shall be plainly marked. ing devices shall have adequate height (iii) Pickup and unloading points. to provide safe clearance for swinging Pickup and unloading points and paths loads and to provide for adequate for lumber packages on conveyors and crotch lines and spreader bar devices. transfers and other areas where accu- (f) Log handling machines used to rate spotting is required, shall be stack logs or lift loads above operator’s plainly marked and wheel stops pro- head shall be equipped with adequate vided where necessary. overhead protection. (iv) Aisles, passageways, and roadways. (g) All mobile log handling machines Aisles, passageways, and roadways shall be equipped with headlights and shall be sufficiently wide to provide backup lights. safe side clearance. One-way aisles may (h) Unloading devices shall be be used for two-way traffic if suitable equipped with a horn or other plainly turnouts are provided. audible signaling device. (d) Log handling, sorting, and storage— (i) Movement of unloading equipment (1) Log unloading methods, equipment, shall be coordinated by audible or hand and facilities—(i) Unloading methods. (a) signals when operator’s vision is im- Stakes and chocks which trip shall be paired or operating in the vicinity of constructed in such manner that the other employees. tripping mechanism that releases the (j) Wood pike poles shall be made of stake or chocks is activated at the op- straight-grained, select material. posite side of the load being tripped. Metal or conductive pike poles shall (b) Binders on logs shall not be re- not be used around exposed energized leased prior to securing with unloading electrical conductors. Defective, blunt, lines or other unloading device. or dull pike poles shall not be used. (c) Binders shall be released only (2) Log unloading and storage areas— from the side on which the unloader (i) General. (a) Log dumps, booms, operates, except when released by re- ponds, or storage areas used at night mote control devices or except when shall be illuminated in accordance with person making release is protected by the requirements of American National racks or stanchions or other equivalent Standard A11.1–1965 (R–1970) Standard means. Practice for Industrial Lighting, which (d) Loads on which a binder is fouled is incorporated by reference as speci- by the unloading machine shall have fied in § 1910.6. an extra binder or metal band of equal (b) Log unloading areas shall be ar- strength placed around the load, or the ranged and maintained to provide a load shall be otherwise secured so the safe working area. fouled binder can be safely removed. (c) Where skids are used, space ade- (ii) Unloading equipment and facilities. quate to clear a man’s body shall be (a) Machines used for hoisting, unload- maintained between the top of the ing, or lowering logs shall be equipped skids and the ground.

729

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00739 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.265 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

(d) Signs prohibiting unauthorized mine when repair or removal from foot or vehicle traffic in log unloading service is necessary. and storage areas shall be posted. (e) The banks of the log pond in the (ii) Water log dumps. (a) Ungrounded vicinity of the log haul shall be rein- electrically powered hoists using forced to prevent caving in. handheld remote control in grounded (f) Artificial log ponds shall be locations, such as log dumps or mill log drained, cleaned, and refilled when lifts, shall be actuated by circuits oper- unhealthy stagnation or pollution oc- ating at less than 50 volts to ground. curs. (b) Roadbeds at log dumps shall be of (g) Employees whose duties require sufficient width and evenness to insure them to work from boats, floating logs, safe operation of equipment. boom sticks, or walkways along or on (c) An adequate brow log or skid tim- water shall be provided with and shall bers or the equivalent shall be provided wear appropriate buoyant devices while where necessary. Railroad-type dumps, performing such duties. when located where logs are dumped di- (h) Stiff booms shall be two float logs rectly into water or where entire loads wide secured by boom chains or other are lifted from vehicle, may be exempt- connecting devices, and of a width ade- ed providing such practice does not cre- quate for the working needs. Walking ate a hazardous exposure of personnel surfaces shall be free of loose material or equipment. and maintained in good repair. (d) Unloading lines shall be arranged (i) Boom sticks shall be fastened to- so that it is not necessary for the em- gether with adequate crossties or cou- ployees to attach them from the pond plings. or dump side of the load except when (j) Floating donkeys or other power- entire loads are lifted from the log- driven machinery used on booms shall transporting vehicle. be placed on a raft or float with enough (e) Unloading lines, crotch lines, or buoyancy to keep the deck well above equally effective means shall be ar- water. ranged and used in a manner to mini- (k) All sorting gaps shall have a sub- mize the possibility of any log from stantial stiff boom on each side. swinging or rolling back. (f) When logs are unloaded with (iv) Pond boats and rafts. The applica- peavys or similar manual methods, ble provisions of the Standard for Fire means shall be provided and used that Protection for Motorcraft, NFPA No. will minimize the danger from rolling 302—1968, which is incorporated by ref- or swinging logs. erence as specified in § 1910.6, shall be (g) Guardrails, walkways, and stand- complied with. ard handrails shall be installed (a) Decks of pond boats shall be cov- (h) Approved life rings (see: 46 CFR ered with nonslip material. 160.099 and 46 CFR 160.050) with line at- (b) Powered pond boats or rafts shall tached and maintained to retain buoy- be provided with at least one approved ancy shall be provided. fire extinguisher, and one lifering with (iii) Log booms and ponds. (a) Walk- line attached. ways and floats shall be installed and (c) Boat fuel shall be transported and securely anchored to provide adequate stored in approved safety containers. passageway for employees. Refer to § 1910.155(c)(3) for definition of (b) All regular boom sticks and foot approved. logs shall be reasonably straight, with (d) Inspection, maintenance, and ven- no protruding knots and bark, and tilation of the bilge area shall be pro- shall be capable of supporting, above vided to prevent accumulation of high- the water line at either end, the weight ly combustible materials. of an employee and equipment. (e) Adequate ventilation shall be pro- (c) Permanent cable swifters shall be vided for the cabin area on enclosed so arranged that it will not be nec- cabin-type boats to prevent accumula- essary to roll boom sticks in order to tion of harmful gases or vapors. attach or detach them. (v) Dry deck storage. (a) Dry deck (d) Periodic inspection of cable or storage areas shall be kept orderly and dogging lines shall be made to deter- shall be maintained in a condition

730

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00740 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.265

which is conducive to safe operation of over the log deck in such manner as to mobile equipment. strike employees. (b) Logs shall be stored in a safe and (v) Swing saws. Swing saws on log orderly manner, and roadways and decks shall be equipped with a barri- traffic lanes shall be maintained at a cade and stops for protection of em- width adequate for safe travel of log ployees who may be on the opposite handling equipment. side of the log haul chute. (c) Logs shall be arranged to mini- (vi) Drag saws. Where reciprocating mize the chance of accidentally rolling log cutoff saws (drag saws) are pro- from the deck. vided, they shall not project into walk- (vi) Log hauls and slips. (a) Walkways way or aisle. along log hauls shall have a standard (vii) Circular cutoff saws. Circular log handrail on the outer edge, and cleats bucking or cutoff saws shall be so lo- or other means to assure adequate cated and guarded as to allow safe en- footing and enable employees to walk trance to and exit from the building. clear of the log chute. (viii) Entrance doorway. Where the (b) Log haul bull chains or cable shall cutoff saw partially blocks the en- be designed, installed, and maintained trance from the log haul runway, the to provide adequate safety for the work entrance shall be guarded. need. (4) Mechanical barkers—(i) Rotary (c) Log haul gear and bull chain drive barkers. Rotary barking devices shall mechanism shall be guarded. be so guarded as to protect employees ( ) Substantial troughs for the return d from flying chips, bark, or other extra- strand of log haul chains shall be pro- neous material. vided over passageways. (ii) Elevating ramp. If an elevating (e) Log haul controls shall be located ramp or gate is used, it shall be pro- and identified to operate from a posi- vided with a safety chain, hook, or tion where the operator will, at all other means of suspension while em- times, be in the clear of logs, machin- ployees are underneath. ery, lines, and rigging. In operations where control is by lever exposed to in- (iii) Area around barkers. The haz- coming logs, the lever shall be ar- ardous area around ring barkers and ranged to operate the log haul only their conveyors shall be fenced off or when moved toward the log slip or to- posted as a prohibited area for unau- ward the log pond. thorized persons. (f) A positive stop shall be installed (iv) Enclosing hydraulic barkers. Hy- on all log hauls to prevent logs from draulic barkers shall be enclosed with traveling too far ahead in the mill. strong baffles at the inlet and outlet. (g) Overhead protection shall be pro- The operator shall be protected by ade- vided for employees working below logs quate safety glass or equivalent. being moved to the log deck. (v) Holddown rolls. Holddown rolls (h) Log wells shall be provided with shall be installed at the infeed and safeguards to minimize the possibility outfeed sections of mechanical ring of logs rolling back into well from log barkers to control the movement of deck. logs. (3) Log decks—(i) Access. Safe access (e) Log breakdown and related machin- to the head rig shall be provided. ery and facilities—(1) Log carriages and (ii) Stops. Log decks shall be provided carriage runways—(i) Bumpers. A sub- with adequate stops, chains, or other stantial stop or bumper with adequate safeguards to prevent logs from rolling shock-absorptive qualities shall be in- down the deck onto the carriage or its stalled at each end of the carriage run- runway. way. (iii) Barricade. A barricade or other (ii) Footing. Rider-type carriages positive stop of sufficient strength to shall be floored to provide secure foot- stop any log shall be erected between ing and a firm working platform for the sawyer’s stand and the log deck. the block setter. (iv) Loose chains. Loose chains from (iii) Sheave housing. Sheaves on rope- overhead canting devices or other driven carriages shall be guarded at equipment shall not be allowed to hang floor line with substantial housings.

731

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00741 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.265 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

(iv) Carriage control. A positive means tion of the upper wheel immediately shall be provided to prevent unintended around the point where the blade movement of the carriage. This may leaves the wheel, to permit operator to involve a control locking device, a car- observe movement of equipment. Nec- riage tie-down, or both. essary ventilating and observation (v) Barriers and warning signs. A bar- ports may be permitted. Substantial rier shall be provided to prevent em- doors or gates are allowed for repair, ployees from entering the space nec- lubrication, and saw changes; such essary for travel of the carriage, with doors or gates shall be closed securely headblocks fully receded, for the full during operation. Band head rigs shall length and extreme ends of carriage be equipped with a saw catcher or runways. Warning signs shall be posted guard of substantial construction. at possible entry points to this area. (iii) Single circular head saws. (a) Cir- (vi) For a rider- Overhead clearance. cular head saws shall not be operated type carriage adequate overhead clear at speeds in excess of those specified by space above the carriage deck shall be the manufacturer. Maximum speed provided for the full carriage runway shall be etched on the saw. length. (vii) Sweeping devices. Carriage track (b) Circular head saws shall be sweeping devices shall be used to keep equipped with safety guides which can track rails clear of debris. be readily adjusted without use of hand (viii) Dogs. Dogging devices shall be tools. adequate to secure logs, cants, or (c) The upper saw of a double circular boards, during sawing operations. mill shall be provided with a substan- (2) Head saws—(i) Band head saws. (a) tial hood or guard. A screen or other Band head saws shall not be operated suitable device shall be placed so as to at speeds in excess of those rec- protect the sawyer from flying par- ommended by the manufacturer ticles. (b) Band head saws shall be thor- (d) All circular sawmills where live oughly inspected for cracks, splits, bro- rolls are not used behind the head saw ken teeth, and other defects. A band- shall be equipped with a spreader wheel saw with a crack greater than one- or splitter. tenth the width of the saw shall not be (iv) Twin circular head saws. Twin cir- placed in service until width of saw is cular head saw rigs such as scrag saws reduced to eliminate crack, until shall meet the specifications for single cracked section is removed, or crack circular head saws in paragraph development is stopped. (e)(1)(iii) of this section where applica- (c) Provisions shall be made for alert- ble. ing and warning employees before (v) Whole-log sash gang saws (Swedish starting band head saws, and measures gangs). (a) Cranks, pitman rods, and shall be taken to insure that all per- other moving parts shall be adequately sons are in the clear. guarded. (ii) Bandsaw wheels. (a) No bandsaw (b) Feed rolls shall be enclosed by a wheel shall be run at a peripheral speed cover over the top, front, and open ends in excess of that recommended by the except where guarded by location. manufacturer. The manufacturer’s rec- Drive mechanism to feed rolls shall be ommended maximum speed shall be enclosed. stamped in plainly legible figures on some portion of the wheel. (c) Carriage cradles of whole-log sash (b) Band head saw wheels shall be gang saws (Swedish gangs), shall be of subjected to monthly inspections. adequate height to prevent logs from Hubs, spokes, rims, bolts, and rivets kicking out while being loaded. shall be thoroughly examined in the (3) Resaws—(i) Band resaws. Band course of such inspections. A loose or resaws shall meet the specifications for damaged hub, a rim crack, or loose band head saws as required by para- spokes shall make the wheel unfit for graph (e)(2)(i) of this section. service. (ii) Circular gang resaws. (a) Banks of (c) Band wheels shall be completely circular gang resaws shall be guarded encased or guarded, except for a por- by a hood.

732

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00742 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.265

(b) Circular gang resaws shall be pro- kickbacks or guarding against them. A vided with safety fingers or other barricade in line with the edger, if antikickback devices. properly fenced off, may be used if safe- (c) Circular gang resaws shall not be ty fingers are not feasible to install. operated at speeds exceeding those rec- (b) A controlling device shall be in- ommended by the manufacturer. stalled and located so that the operator (d) [Reserved] can stop the feed mechanism without (e) Feed rolls shall be guarded. releasing the tension of the pressure (f) Each circular gang resaw, except rolls. self-feed saws with a live roll or wheel (iv) Operating speed of live rolls. Live at back of saw, shall be provided with rolls and tailing devices in back of spreaders. edger shall operate at a speed not less (iii) Sash gang resaws. Sash gang than the speed of the edger feed rolls. resaws shall meet the safety specifica- (6) Planers—(i) Guards. (a) All cutting tions of whole-log sash gang saws in ac- heads shall be guarded. cordance with the requirements of (b) Side head hoods shall be of suffi- paragraph (e)(2)(v) of this section. cient height to safeguard the head set- (4) Trimmer saws—(i) Maximum speed. screw. Trimmer saws shall not be run at pe- (c) Pressure feed rolls and ‘‘pine- ripheral speeds in excess of those rec- apples’’ shall be guarded. ommended by the manufacturer. (d) Levers or controls shall be so ar- (ii) Guards. (a) Trimmer saws shall be ranged or guarded as to reduce the pos- guarded in front by adequate baffles to sibility of accidental operation. protect against flying debris and they (f) Dry kilns and facilities—(1) Kiln shall be securely bolted to a substan- foundations. Dry kilns shall be con- tial frame. These guards for a series of structed upon solid foundations to pre- saws shall be set as close to the top of vent tracks from sagging the trimmer table as is practical. (2) Passageways. A passageway shall (b) The end saws on trimmer shall be be provided to give adequate clearance guarded. on at least one side or in the center of (c) The rear of trimmer saws shall end-piled kilns and on two sides of have a guard the full width of the saws cross-piled kilns. and as much wider as practical. (3) Doors—(i) Main kiln doors. (a) Main (iii) Safety stops. Automatic trimmer kiln doors shall be provided with a saws shall be provided with safety method of holding them open while stops or hangers to prevent saws from kiln is being loaded. dropping on table. (b) Counterweights on vertical lift (5) Edgers—(i) Location. (a) Where doors shall be boxed or otherwise vertical arbor edger saws are located guarded. ahead of the main saw, they shall be so (c) Adequate means shall be provided guarded that an employee cannot con- to firmly secure main doors, when they tact any part of the edger saw from his are disengaged from carriers and hang- normal position. ers, to prevent toppling. (b) Edgers shall not be located in the (ii) Escape doors. (a) If operating pro- main roll case behind the head saws. cedures require access to kilns, kilns (ii) Guards. (a) The top and the open- shall be provided with escape doors ings in end and side frames of edgers that operate easily from the inside, shall be adequately guarded and gears swing in the direction of exit, and are and chains shall be fully housed. located in or near the main door at the Guards may be hinged or otherwise ar- end of the passageway. ranged to permit oiling and the re- (b) Escape doors shall be of adequate moval of saws. height and width to accommodate an (b) All edgers shall be equipped with average size man. pressure feed rolls. (4) Pits. Pits shall be well ventilated, (c) Pressure feed rolls on edgers shall drained, and lighted, and shall be large be guarded against accidental contact. enough to safely accommodate the kiln (iii) Antikickback devices. (a) Edgers operator together with operating de- shall be provided with safety fingers or vices such as valves, dampers, damper other approved methods of preventing rods, and traps.

733

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00743 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.266 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

(5) Steam mains. All high-pressure 4. Chipping steam mains located in or adjacent to 5. Yarding an operating pit shall be covered with 6. Loading and unloading 7. Transport heat-insulating material. 8. Storage (6) Ladders. A fixed ladder, in accord- i. Training ance with the requirements of § 1910.27 j. Appendices or other adequate means shall be pro- APPENDIX A—MINIMUM FIRST-AID SUPPLIES vided to permit access to the roof. APPENDIX B—MINIMUM FIRST-AID TRAINING Where controls and machinery are APPENDIX C—CORRESPONDING ISO AGREE- mounted on the roof, a permanent MENTS stairway with standard handrail shall (b) Scope and application. (1) This standard establishes safety practices, be installed in accordance with the re- means, methods and operations for all quirements of § 1910.24. types of logging, regardless of the end (7) Chocks. A means shall be provided use of the wood. These types of logging for chocking or blocking cars. include, but are not limited to, pulp- (8) Kiln tender room. A warm room wood and timber harvesting and the shall be provided for kiln employees to logging of sawlogs, veneer bolts, poles, stay in during cold weather after leav- pilings and other forest products. This ing a hot kiln. standard does not cover the construc- [39 FR 23502, June 27, 1974, as amended at 40 tion or use of cable yarding systems. FR 23073, May 28, 1975; 43 FR 49751, Oct. 24, (2) This standard applies to all log- 1978; 43 FR 51760, Nov. 7, 1978; 53 FR 12123, ging operations as defined by this sec- Apr. 12, 1988; 55 FR 32015, Aug. 6, 1990; 61 FR tion. 9241, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR 33467, June 18, 1998; (3) Hazards and working conditions 70 FR 53929, Sept. 13, 2005] not specifically addressed by this sec- § 1910.266 Logging operations. tion are covered by other applicable sections of part 1910. (a) Table of contents. (c) Definitions applicable to this sec- This paragraph contains the list of tion. paragraphs and appendices contained Arch. An open-framed trailer or built- in this section. up framework used to suspend the lead- a. Table of contents ing ends of trees or logs when they are b. Scope and application skidded. c. Definitions Backcut (felling cut). The final cut in d. General requirements a felling operation. 1. Personal protective equipment Ballistic nylon. A nylon fabric of high 2. First-aid kits tensile properties designed to provide 3. Seat belts 4. Fire extinguishers protection from lacerations. 5. Environmental conditions Buck. To cut a felled tree into logs. 6. Work areas Butt. The bottom of the felled part of 7. Signaling and signal equipment a tree. 8. Overhead electric lines Cable yarding. The movement of 9. Flammable and combustible liquids felled trees or logs from the area where 10. Explosives and blasting agents they are felled to the landing on a sys- e. Hand and portable powered tools tem composed of a cable suspended 1. General requirements from spars and/or towers. The trees or 2. Chain saws f. Machines logs may be either dragged across the 1. General requirements ground on the cable or carried while 2. Machine operation suspended from the cable. 3. Protective structures Chock. A block, often wedge shaped, 4. Overhead guards which is used to prevent movement; 5. Machine access e.g., a log from rolling, a wheel from 6. Exhaust systems turning. 7. Brakes Choker. A sling used to encircle the 8. Guarding end of a log for yarding. One end is g. Vehicles h. Tree harvesting passed around the load, then through a 1. General requirements loop eye, end fitting or other device at 2. Manual felling the other end of the sling. The end that 3. Bucking and limbing passed through the end fitting or other

734

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00744 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.266

device is then hooked to the lifting or powerplant, that is operated off-road pulling machine. and used for the movement of material. Danger tree. A standing tree that pre- Machines include, but are not limited sents a hazard to employees due to con- to, tractors, skidders, front-end load- ditions such as, but not limited to, de- ers, scrapers, graders, bulldozers, swing terioration or physical damage to the yarders, log stackers, log loaders, and root system, trunk, stem or limbs, and mechanical felling devices, such as tree the direction and lean of the tree. shears and feller-bunchers. Machines Debark. To remove bark from trees or do not include airplanes or aircraft logs. (e.g., helicopters). Deck. A stack of trees or logs. Rated capacity. The maximum load a Designated person. An employee who system, vehicle, machine or piece of has the requisite knowledge, training equipment was designed by the manu- and experience to perform specific du- facturer to handle. ties. Root wad. The ball of a tree root and Domino felling. The partial cutting of dirt that is pulled from the ground multiple trees which are left standing when a tree is uprooted. and then pushed over with a pusher Serviceable condition. A state or abil- tree. ity of a tool, machine, vehicle or other Fell (fall). To cut down trees. device to operate as it was intended by Feller (faller). An employee who fells the manufacturer to operate. trees. Skidding. The yarding of trees or logs Grounded. The placement of a compo- by pulling or towing them across the nent of a machine on the ground or on ground. a device where it is firmly supported. Slope (grade). The increase or de- Guarded. Covered, shielded, fenced, crease in altitude over a horizontal dis- enclosed, or otherwise protected by tance expressed as a percentage. For means of suitable enclosures, covers, example, a change of altitude of 20 feet casings, shields, troughs, railings, (6 m) over a horizontal distance of 100 screens, mats, or platforms, or by loca- feet (30 m) is expressed as a 20 percent tion, to prevent injury. slope. Health care provider. A health care Snag. Any standing dead tree or por- practitioner operating with the scope tion thereof. of his/her license, certificate, registra- Spring pole. A tree, segment of a tree, tion or legally authorized practice. limb, or sapling which is under stress Landing. Any place where logs are or tension due to the pressure or laid after being yarded, and before weight of another object. transport from the work site. Limbing. To cut branches off felled Tie down. Chain, cable, steel strips or trees. fiber webbing and binders attached to a Lodged tree (hung tree). A tree leaning truck, trailer or other conveyance as a against another tree or object which means to secure loads and to prevent prevents it from falling to the ground. them from shifting or moving when Log. A segment sawed or split from a they are being transported. felled tree, such as, but not limited to, Undercut. A notch cut in a tree to a section, bolt, or tree length. guide the direction of the tree fall and Logging operations. Operations associ- to prevent splitting or kickback. ated with felling and moving trees and Vehicle. A car, bus, truck, trailer or logs from the stump to the point of de- semi-trailer owned, leased or rented by livery, such as, but not limited to, the employer that is used for transpor- marking danger trees and trees/logs to tation of employees or movement of be cut to length, felling, limbing, buck- material. ing, debarking, chipping, yarding, load- Winching. The winding of cable or ing, unloading, storing, and trans- rope onto a spool or drum. porting machines, equipment and per- Yarding. The movement of logs from sonnel to, from and between logging the place they are felled to a landing. sites. (d) General requirements—(1) Personal Machine. A piece of stationary or mo- protective equipment. (i) The employer bile equipment having a self-contained shall assure that personal protective

735

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00745 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.266 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

equipment, including any personal pro- each employee who works in an area tective equipment provided by an em- where there is potential for head injury ployee, is maintained in a serviceable from falling or flying objects wears condition. head protection meeting the require- (ii) The employer shall assure that ments of subpart I of part 1910. personal protective equipment, includ- (vii) The employer shall provide, at ing any personal protective equipment no cost to the employee, and assure provided by an employee, is inspected that each employee wears the fol- before initial use during each lowing: workshift. Defects or damage shall be (A) Eye protection meeting the re- repaired or the unserviceable personal quirements of subpart I of part 1910 protective equipment shall be replaced where there is potential for eye injury before work is commenced. due to falling or flying objects; and (iii) The employer shall provide, at (B) Face protection meeting the re- no cost to the employee, and assure quirements of subpart I of part 1910 that each employee handling wire rope where there is potential for facial in- wears, hand protection which provides jury such as, but not limited to, oper- adequate protection from puncture ating a chipper. Logger-type mesh wounds, cuts and lacerations. screens may be worn by employees per- (iv) The employer shall provide, at no forming chain-saw operations and cost to the employee, and assure that yarding. each employee who operates a chain saw wears leg protection constructed NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (d)(1)(vii): The em- ployee does not have to wear a separate eye with cut-resistant material, such as protection device where face protection cov- ballistic nylon. The leg protection ering both the eyes and face is worn. shall cover the full length of the thigh to the top of the boot on each leg to (2) First-aid kits. (i) The employer protect against contact with a moving shall provide first-aid kits at each chain saw. Exception: This requirement work site where trees are being cut does not apply when an employee is (e.g., felling, bucking, limbing), at each working as a climber if the employer active landing, and on each employee demonstrates that a greater hazard is transport vehicle. The number of first- posed by wearing leg protection in the aid kits and the content of each kit particular situation, or when an em- shall reflect the degree of isolation, the ployee is working from a vehicular number of employees, and the hazards mounted elevating and rotating work reasonably anticipated at the work platform meeting the requirements of site. 29 CFR 1910.68. (ii) At a minimum, each first-aid kit (v) The employer shall assure that shall contain the items listed in appen- each employee wears foot protection, dix A at all times. such as heavy-duty logging boots that (iii) The employer also may have the are waterproof or water repellant, number and content of first-aid kits re- cover and provide support to the ankle. viewed and approved annually by a The employer shall assure that each health care provider. employee who operates a chain saw (iv) The employer shall maintain the wears foot protection that is con- contents of each first-aid kit in a serv- structed with cut-resistant material iceable condition. which will protect the employee (3) Seat belts. For each vehicle or ma- against contact with a running chain chine (equipped with ROPS/FOPS or saw. Sharp, calk-soled boots or other overhead guards), including any vehi- slip-resistant type boots may be worn cle or machine provided by an em- where the employer demonstrates that ployee, the employer shall assure: they are necessary for the employee’s (i) That a seat belt is provided for job, the terrain, the timber type, and each vehicle or machine operator; the weather conditions, provided that (ii) That each employee uses the foot protection otherwise required by available seat belt while the vehicle or this paragraph is met. machine is being operated; (vi) The employer shall provide, at no (iii) That each employee securely and cost to the employee, and assure that tightly fastens the seat belt to restrain

736

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00746 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.266

the employee within the vehicle or ma- (iv) The employer shall account for chine cab; each employee at the end of each (iv) That each machine seat belt workshift. meets the requirements of the Society (7) Signaling and signal equipment. (i) of Automotive Engineers Standard Hand signals or audible contact, such SAE J386, June 1985, ‘‘Operator Re- as but not limited to, whistles, horns, straint Systems for Off-Road Work Ma- or radios, shall be utilized whenever chines’’, which is incorporated by ref- noise, distance, restricted visibility, or erence as specified in § 1910.6. other factors prevent clear under- (v) That seat belts are not removed standing of normal voice communica- from any vehicle or machine. The em- tions between employees. ployer shall replace each seat belt (ii) Engine noise, such as from a which has been removed from any vehi- chain saw, is not an acceptable means cle or machine that was equipped with of signaling. Other locally and region- seat belts at the time of manufacture; ally recognized signals may be used. and (vi) That each seat belt is maintained (iii) Only a designated person shall in a serviceable condition. give signals, except in an emergency. (4) Fire extinguishers. The employer (8) Overhead electric lines. (i) Logging shall provide and maintain portable operations near overhead electric lines fire extinguishers on each machine and shall be done in accordance with the vehicle in accordance with the require- requirements of 29 CFR 1910.333(c)(3). ments of subpart L of part 1910. (ii) The employer shall notify the (5) Environmental conditions. All work power company immediately if a felled shall terminate and each employee tree makes contact with any power shall move to a place of safety when line. Each employee shall remain clear environmental conditions, such as but of the area until the power company not limited to, electrical storms, advises that there are no electrical strong winds which may affect the fall hazards. of a tree, heavy rain or snow, extreme (9) Flammable and combustible liquids. cold, dense fog, fires, mudslides, and (i) Flammable and combustible liquids darkness, create a hazard for the em- shall be stored, handled, transported, ployee in the performance of the job. and used in accordance with the re- (6) Work areas. (i) Employees shall be quirements of subpart H of part 1910. spaced and the duties of each employee (ii) Flammable and combustible liq- shall be organized so the actions of one uids shall not be transported in the employee will not create a hazard for driver compartment or in any pas- any other employee. senger-occupied area of a machine or (ii) Work areas shall be assigned so vehicle. that trees cannot fall into an adjacent (iii) Each machine, vehicle, and port- occupied work area. The distance be- able powered tool shall be shut off dur- tween adjacent occupied work areas ing fueling. Diesel-powered machines shall be at least two tree lengths of the and vehicles may be fueled while they trees being felled. The distance be- are at idle, provided that continued op- tween adjacent occupied work areas shall reflect the degree of slope, the eration is intended and that the em- density of the growth, the height of the ployer follows safe fueling and oper- trees, the soil structure and other haz- ating procedures. ards reasonably anticipated at that (iv) Flammable and combustible liq- work site. A distance of greater than uids, including chain-saw and diesel two tree lengths shall be maintained fuel, may be used to start a fire, pro- between adjacent occupied work areas vided the employer assures that in the on any slope where rolling or sliding of particular situation its use does not trees or logs is reasonably foreseeable. create a hazard for an employee. (iii) Each employee performing a log- (10) Explosives and blasting agents. (i) ging operation at a logging work site Explosives and blasting agents shall be shall work in a position or location stored, handled, transported, and used that is within visual or audible contact in accordance with the requirements of with another employee. subpart H of part 1910.

737

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00747 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.266 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

(ii) Only a designated person shall that a hazard is not created for any ve- handle or use explosives and blasting hicle operator or passenger. agents. (2) Chain saws. (i) Each chain saw (iii) Explosives and blasting agents placed into initial service after the ef- shall not be transported in the driver fective date of this section shall be compartment or in any passenger-occu- equipped with a chain brake and shall pied area of a machine or vehicle. otherwise meet the requirements of the (e) Hand and portable powered tools— ANSI B175.1–1991 ‘‘Safety Requirements (1) General requirements. (i) The em- for Gasoline-Powered Chain Saws’’, ployer shall assure that each hand and which is incorporated by reference as portable powered tool, including any specified in § 1910.6. Each chain saw tool provided by an employee, is main- placed into service before the effective tained in serviceable condition. date of this section shall be equipped (ii) The employer shall assure that with a protective device that mini- each tool, including any tool provided mizes chain-saw kickback. No chain- by an employee, is inspected before ini- saw kickback device shall be removed tial use during each workshift. At a or otherwise disabled. minimum, the inspection shall include (ii) Each gasoline-powered chain saw the following: shall be equipped with a continuous (A) Handles and guards, to assure pressure throttle control system which that they are sound, tight-fitting, will stop the chain when pressure on properly shaped, free of splinters and the throttle is released. sharp edges, and in place; (iii) The chain saw shall be operated (B) Controls, to assure proper func- and adjusted in accordance with the tion; manufacturer’s instructions. (C) Chain-saw chains, to assure prop- (iv) The chain saw shall be fueled at er adjustment; least 10 feet (3 m) from any open flame (D) Chain-saw mufflers, to assure or other source of ignition. that they are operational and in place; (v) The chain saw shall be started at (E) Chain brakes and nose shielding least 10 feet (3 m) from the fueling devices, to assure that they are in area. place and function properly; (vi) The chain saw shall be started on (F) Heads of shock, impact-driven the ground or where otherwise firmly and driving tools, to assure that there supported. Drop starting a chain saw is is no mushrooming; prohibited. (G) Cutting edges, to assure that they (vii) The chain saw shall be started are sharp and properly shaped; and with the chain brake engaged. (H) All other safety devices, to assure (viii) The chain saw shall be held that they are in place and function with the thumbs and fingers of both properly. hands encircling the handles during op- (iii) The employer shall assure that eration unless the employer dem- each tool is used only for purposes for onstrates that a greater hazard is which it has been designed. posed by keeping both hands on the (iv) When the head of any shock, im- chain saw in that particular situation. pact-driven or driving tool begins to (ix) The chain-saw operator shall be chip, it shall be repaired or removed certain of footing before starting to from service. cut. The chain saw shall not be used in (v) The cutting edge of each tool a position or at a distance that could shall be sharpened in accordance with cause the operator to become off-bal- manufacturer’s specifications when- ance, to have insecure footing, or to re- ever it becomes dull during the linquish a firm grip on the saw. workshift. (x) Prior to felling any tree, the (vi) Each tool shall be stored in the chain-saw operator shall clear away provided location when not being used brush or other potential obstacles at a work site. which might interfere with cutting the (vii) Racks, boxes, holsters or other tree or using the retreat path. means shall be provided, arranged and (xi) The chain saw shall not be used used for the transportation of tools so to cut directly overhead.

738

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00748 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.266

(xii) The chain saw shall be carried in otherwise recommended by the manu- a manner that will prevent operator facturer. contact with the cutting chain and (vii) The machine shall be operated muffler. at such a distance from employees and (xiii) The chain saw shall be shut off other machines such that operation or the throttle released before the will not create a hazard for an em- feller starts his retreat. ployee. (xiv) The chain saw shall be shut (viii) No employee other than the op- down or the chain brake shall be en- erator shall ride on any mobile ma- gaged whenever a saw is carried further chine unless seating, seat belts and than 50 feet (15.2 m). The chain saw other protection equivalent to that shall be shut down or the chain brake provided for the operator are provided. shall be engaged when a saw is carried (ix) No employee shall ride on any less than 50 feet if conditions such as, load. but not limited to, the terrain, under- (x) Before the operator leaves the op- brush and slippery surfaces, may create erator’s station of a machine, it shall a hazard for an employee. be secured as follows: (f) Machines—(1) General requirements. (A) The parking brake or brake locks (i) The employer shall assure that each shall be applied; machine, including any machine pro- (B) The transmission shall be placed vided by an employee, is maintained in in the manufacturer’s specified park serviceable condition. position; and (ii) The employer shall assure that (C) Each moving element such as, but each machine, including any machine not limited to blades, buckets, saws provided by an employee, is inspected and shears, shall be lowered to the before initial use during each ground or otherwise secured. workshift. Defects or damage shall be (xi) If a hydraulic or pneumatic stor- repaired or the unserviceable machine age device can move the moving ele- shall be replaced before work is com- ments such as, but not limited to, menced. blades, buckets, saws and shears, after the machine is shut down, the pressure (iii) The employer shall assure that or stored energy from the element operating and maintenance instruc- shall be discharged as specified by the tions are available on the machine or manufacturer. in the area where the machine is being (xii) The rated capacity of any vehi- operated. Each machine operator and cle transporting a machine shall not be maintenance employee shall comply exceeded. with the operating and maintenance (xiii) The machine shall be loaded, instructions. secured and unloaded so that it will (2) (i) The machine Machine operation. not create a hazard for any employee. shall be started and operated only by a (3) Protective structures. (i) Each trac- designated person. tor, skidder, swing yarder, log stacker, (ii) Stationary logging machines and log loader and mechanical felling de- their components shall be anchored or vice, such as tree shears or feller- otherwise stabilized to prevent move- buncher, placed into initial service ment during operation. after February 9, 1995, shall be (iii) The rated capacity of any ma- equipped with falling object protective chine shall not be exceeded. structure (FOPS) and/or rollover pro- (iv) To maintain stability, the ma- tective structure (ROPS). The em- chine must be operated within the lim- ployer shall replace FOPS or ROPS itations imposed by the manufacturer which have been removed from any ma- as described in the operating and main- chine. Exception: This requirement does tenance instructions for that machine. not apply to machines which are capa- (v) Before starting or moving any ble of 360 degree rotation. machine, the operator shall determine (ii)(A) ROPS shall be tested, in- that no employee is in the path of the stalled, and maintained in serviceable machine. condition. (vi) The machine shall be operated (B) Each machine manufactured after only from the operator’s station or as August 1, 1996, shall have ROPS tested,

739

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00749 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.266 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

installed, and maintained in accord- required for the lower portion of the ance with the Society of Automotive cab where there are control panels or Engineers SAE J1040, April 1988, ‘‘Per- similar obstructions in the cab, or formance Criteria for Rollover Protec- where visibility is not necessary for tive Structures (ROPS) for Construc- safe operation of the machine. tion, Earthmoving, Forestry, and Min- (viii) Each machine manufactured on ing Machines’’, which is incorporated or before August 1, 1996 shall have a by reference as specified in § 1910.6. cab which meets the requirements (C) This incorporation by reference specified in paragraph (f)(3)(vii) or a was approved by the Director of the protective canopy for the operator Federal Register in accordance with 5 which meets the following require- U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Copies ments: may be obtained from the Society of (A) The protective canopy shall be Automotive Engineers, 400 Common- constructed to protect the operator wealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096. from injury due to falling trees, limbs, Copies may be inspected at the Docket saplings or branches which might enter Office, Occupational Safety and Health the compartment side areas and from Administration, U.S. Department of snapping winch lines or other objects; Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue NW., (B) The lower portion of the cab shall room N2625, Washington, DC 20210, or be fully enclosed with solid material, at the National Archives and Records except at entrances, to prevent the op- Administration (NARA). For informa- erator from being injured from obsta- tion on the availability of this mate- cles entering the cab; rial at NARA, call 202–741–6030, or go (C) The upper rear portion of the cab to: http://www.archives.gov/ shall be fully enclosed with open mesh federal register/ l material with openings of such size as code of federal regulations/ l l l to reject the entrance of an object larg- ibr locations.html. l er than 2 inches in diameter. It shall (iii) FOPS shall be installed, tested provide maximum rearward visibility; and maintained in accordance with the and Society of Automotive Engineers SAE J231, January 1981, ‘‘Minimum Per- (D) Open mesh shall be extended for- formance Criteria for Falling Object ward as far as possible from the rear Protective Structures (FOPS)’’, which corners of the cab sides so as to give is incorporated by reference as speci- the maximum protection against ob- fied in § 1910.6. stacles, branches, etc., entering the cab (iv) ROPS and FOPS shall meet the area. requirements of the Society of Auto- (ix) The enclosure of the upper por- motive Engineers SAE J397, April 1988, tion of each cab shall allow maximum ‘‘Deflection Limiting Volume-ROPS/ visibility. FOPS Laboratory Evaluation’’, which (x) When transparent material is is incorporated by reference as speci- used to enclose the upper portion of the fied in § 1910.6. cab, it shall be made of safety glass or (v) Each protective structure shall be other material that the employer dem- of a size that does not impede the oper- onstrates provides equivalent protec- ator’s normal movements. tion and visibility. (vi) The overhead covering of each (xi) Transparent material shall be cab shall be of solid material and shall kept clean to assure operator visi- extend over the entire canopy. bility. (vii) Each machine manufactured (xii) Transparent material that may after August 1, 1996, shall have a cab create a hazard for the operator, such that is fully enclosed with mesh mate- as but not limited to, cracked, broken rial with openings no greater than 2 or scratched safety glass, shall be re- inches (5.08 cm) at its least dimension. placed. The cab may be enclosed with other (xiii) Deflectors shall be installed in material(s) where the employer dem- front of each cab to deflect whipping onstrates such material(s) provides saplings and branches. Deflectors shall equivalent protection and visibility. be located so as not to impede visi- Exception: Equivalent visibility is not bility and access to the cab.

740

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00750 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.266

(xiv) The height of each cab entrance the slopes over which it is being oper- shall be at least 52 inches (1.3 meters) ated. from the floor of the cab. (ii) Each machine placed into initial (xv) Each machine operated near service on or after September 8, 1995 cable yarding operations shall be shall also be equipped with: back-up or equipped with sheds or roofs of suffi- secondary brakes that are capable of cient strength to provide protection stopping the machine regardless of the from breaking lines. direction of travel or whether the en- (4) Overhead guards. Each forklift gine is running; and parking brakes shall be equipped with an overhead that are capable of continuously hold- guard meeting the requirements of the ing a stopped machine stationary. American Society of Mechanical Engi- (8) Guarding. (i) Each machine shall neers, ASME B56.6–1992 (with addenda), be equipped with guarding to protect ‘‘Safety Standard for Rough Terrain employees from exposed moving ele- Forklift Trucks’’, which is incor- ments, such as but not limited to, porated by reference as specified in shafts, pulleys, belts on conveyors, and § 1910.6. gears, in accordance with the require- (5) Machine access. (i) Machine access ments of subpart O of part 1910. systems, meeting the specifications of (ii) Each machine used for debarking, the Society of Automotive Engineers, limbing and chipping shall be equipped SAE J185, June 1988, ‘‘Recommended with guarding to protect employees Practice for Access Systems for Off- from flying wood chunks, logs, chips, Road Machines’’, which is incorporated bark, limbs and other material in ac- by reference as specified in § 1910.6, cordance with the requirements of sub- shall be provided for each machine part O of part 1910. where the operator or any other em- (iii) The guarding on each machine ployee must climb onto the machine to shall be in place at all times the ma- enter the cab or to perform mainte- chine is in operation. nance. (g) Vehicles. (1) The employer shall (ii) Each machine cab shall have a assure that each vehicle used to per- second means of egress. form any logging operation is main- (iii) Walking and working surfaces of tained in serviceable condition. each machine and machine work sta- (2) The employer shall assure that tion shall have a slip resistant surface each vehicle used to perform any log- to assure safe footing. ging operation is inspected before ini- (iv) The walking and working surface tial use during each workshift. Defects of each machine shall be kept free of or damage shall be repaired or the un- waste, debris and any other material serviceable vehicle shall be replaced which might result in fire, slipping, or before work is commenced. falling. (3) The employer shall assure that (6) Exhaust systems. (i) The exhaust operating and maintenance instruc- pipes on each machine shall be located tions are available in each vehicle. so exhaust gases are directed away Each vehicle operator and maintenance from the operator. employee shall comply with the oper- (ii) The exhaust pipes on each ma- ating and maintenance instructions. chine shall be mounted or guarded to (4) The employer shall assure that protect each employee from accidental each vehicle operator has a valid oper- contact. ator’s license for the class of vehicle (iii) The exhaust pipes shall be being operated. equipped with spark arresters. Engines (5) Mounting steps and handholds equipped with turbochargers do not re- shall be provided for each vehicle wher- quire spark arresters. ever it is necessary to prevent an em- (iv) Each machine muffler provided ployee from being injured when enter- by the manufacturer, or their equiva- ing or leaving the vehicle. lent, shall be in place at all times the (6) The seats of each vehicle shall be machine is in operation. securely fastened. (7) Brakes. (i) Service brakes shall be (7) The requirements of paragraphs sufficient to stop and hold each ma- (f)(2)(iii), (f)(2)(v), (f)(2)(vii), (f)(2)(x), chine and its rated load capacity on (f)(2)(xiii), and (f)(7) of this section

741

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00751 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.266 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

shall also apply to each vehicle used to (viii) Felling on any slope where roll- transport any employee off public ing or sliding of trees or logs is reason- roads or to perform any logging oper- ably foreseeable shall be done uphill ation, including any vehicle provided from, or on the same level as, pre- by an employee. viously felled trees. (h) Tree harvesting—(1) General re- (ix) Domino felling of trees is prohib- quirements. (i) Trees shall not be felled ited. in a manner that may create a hazard NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (h)(1)(ix): The defini- for an employee, such as but not lim- tion of domino felling does not include the ited to, striking a rope, cable, power felling of a single danger tree by felling an- line, or machine. other single tree into it. (ii) The immediate supervisor shall (2) Manual felling. (i) Before felling is be consulted when unfamiliar or unusu- started, the feller shall plan and clear ally hazardous conditions necessitate a retreat path. The retreat path shall the supervisor’s approval before cut- extend diagonally away from the ex- ting is commenced. pected felling line unless the employer (iii) While manual felling is in demonstrates that such a retreat path progress, no yarding machine shall be poses a greater hazard than an alter- operated within two tree lengths of nate path. Once the backcut has been trees being manually felled. Exception: made the feller shall immediately This provision does not apply to move a safe distance away from the yarding machines performing tree pull- tree on the retreat path. ing operations. (ii) Before each tree is felled, condi- (iv) No employee shall approach a tions such as, but not limited to, snow feller closer than two tree lengths of and ice accumulation, the wind, the trees being felled until the feller has lean of tree, dead limbs, and the loca- acknowledged that it is safe to do so, tion of other trees, shall be evaluated unless the employer demonstrates that by the feller and precautions taken so a team of employees is necessary to a hazard is not created for an em- manually fell a particular tree. ployee. (v) No employee shall approach a me- (iii) Each tree shall be checked for chanical felling operation closer than accumulations of snow and ice. Accu- two tree lengths of the trees being mulations of snow and ice that may felled until the machine operator has create a hazard for an employee shall acknowledged that it is safe to do so. be removed before felling is com- (vi) Each danger tree shall be felled, menced in the area or the area shall be removed or avoided. Each danger tree, avoided. including lodged trees and snags, shall (iv) When a spring pole or other tree be felled or removed using mechanical under stress is cut, no employee other or other techniques that minimize em- than the feller shall be closer than two ployee exposure before work is com- trees lengths when the stress is re- menced in the area of the danger tree. leased. If the danger tree is not felled or re- (v) An undercut shall be made in each moved, it shall be marked and no work tree being felled unless the employer shall be conducted within two tree demonstrates that felling the par- lengths of the danger tree unless the ticular tree without an undercut will employer demonstrates that a shorter not create a hazard for an employee. distance will not create a hazard for an The undercut shall be of a size so the employee. tree will not split and will fall in the (vii) Each danger tree shall be care- intended direction. fully checked for signs of loose bark, (vi) A backcut shall be made in each broken branches and limbs or other tree being felled. The backcut shall damage before they are felled or re- leave sufficient hinge wood to hold the moved. Accessible loose bark and other tree to the stump during most of its damage that may create a hazard for fall so that the hinge is able to guide an employee shall be removed or held the tree’s fall in the intended direction. in place before felling or removing the (vii) The backcut shall be above the tree. level of the horizontal facecut in order

742

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00752 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.266

to provide an adequate platform to pre- the signal and wait for a confirming vent kickback. Exception: The backcut signal before moving any line. may be at or below the horizontal (vi) No load shall exceed the rated ca- facecut in tree pulling operations. pacity of the pallet, trailer, or other carrier. NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (h)(2)(vii): This re- quirement does not apply to open face felling (vii) Towed equipment, such as but where two angled facecuts rather than a hor- not limited to, skid pans, pallets, arch- izontal facecut are used. es, and trailers, shall be attached to each machine or vehicle in such a man- (3) Limbing and bucking. (i) Limbing and bucking on any slope where rolling ner as to allow a full 90 degree turn; to or sliding of trees or logs is reasonably prevent overrunning of the towing ma- foreseeable shall be done on the uphill chine or vehicle; and to assure that the side of each tree or log. operator is always in control of the (ii) Before bucking or limbing wind- towed equipment. thrown trees, precautions shall be (viii) The yarding machine or vehi- taken to prevent the root wad, butt or cle, including its load, shall be oper- logs from striking an employee. These ated with safe clearance from all ob- precautions include, but are not lim- structions that may create a hazard for ited to, chocking or moving the tree to an employee. a stable position. (ix) Each yarded tree shall be placed (4) Chipping (in-woods locations). (i) in a location that does not create a Chipper access covers or doors shall hazard for an employee and an orderly not be opened until the drum or disc is manner so that the trees are stable be- at a complete stop. fore bucking or limbing is commenced. (ii) Infeed and discharge ports shall (6) Loading and unloading. (i) The be guarded to prevent contact with the transport vehicle shall be positioned to disc, knives, or blower blades. provide working clearance between the (iii) The chipper shall be shut down vehicle and the deck. and locked out in accordance with the (ii) Only the loading or unloading requirements of 29 CFR 1910.147 when machine operator and other personnel an employee performs any servicing or the employer demonstrates are essen- maintenance. tial shall be in the loading or unload- (iv) Detached trailer chippers shall ing work area during this operation. be chocked during usage on any slope (iii) No transport vehicle operator where rolling or sliding of the chipper shall remain in the cab during loading is reasonably foreseeable. and unloading if the logs are carried or (5) Yarding. (i) No log shall be moved moved over the truck cab, unless the until each employee is in the clear. employer demonstrates that it is nec- (ii) Each choker shall be hooked and essary for the operator to do so. Where unhooked from the uphill side or end of the transport vehicle operator remains the log, unless the employer dem- in the cab, the employer shall provide onstrates that is it not feasible in the operator protection, such as but not particular situation to hook or unhook limited to, reinforcement of the cab. the choker from the uphill side. Where (iv) Each log shall be placed on a the choker is hooked or unhooked from transport vehicle in an orderly manner the downhill side or end of the log, the and tightly secured. log shall be securely chocked to pre- (v) The load shall be positioned to vent rolling, sliding or swinging. prevent slippage or loss during han- (iii) Each choker shall be positioned dling and transport. near the end of the log or tree length. (vi) Each stake and chock which is (iv) Each machine shall be positioned used to trip loads shall be so con- during winching so the machine and structed that the tripping mechanism winch are operated within their design is activated on the side opposite the re- limits. lease of the load. (v) No yarding line shall be moved (vii) Each tie down shall be left in unless the yarding machine operator place over the peak log to secure all has clearly received and understood the logs until the unloading lines or other signal to do so. When in doubt, the protection the employer demonstrates yarding machine operator shall repeat is equivalent has been put in place. A

743

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00753 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.266 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

stake of sufficient strength to with- specific work tasks, including the use stand the forces of shifting or moving of measures and work practices to pre- logs, shall be considered equivalent vent or control those hazards; protection provided that the logs are (iv) Recognition, prevention and con- not loaded higher than the stake. trol of other safety and health hazards (viii) Each tie down shall be released in the logging industry; only from the side on which the un- (v) Procedures, practices and require- loading machine operates, except as ments of the employer’s work site; and follows: (vi) The requirements of this stand- (A) When the tie down is released by ard. a remote control device; and (4) Training of an employee due to (B) When the employee making the unsafe job performance, or assignment release is protected by racks, stan- of new work tasks, tools, equipment, chions or other protection the em- machines, or vehicles; may be limited ployer demonstrates is capable of with- to those elements in paragraph (i)(3) of standing the force of the logs. this section which are relevant to the (7) Transport. The transport vehicle circumstances giving rise to the need operator shall assure that each tie for training. down is tight before transporting the (5) Portability of training. (i) Each cur- load. While enroute, the operator shall rent employee who has received train- check and tighten the tie downs when- ing in the particular elements specified ever there is reason to believe that the in paragraph (i)(3) of this section shall tie downs have loosened or the load has not be required to be retrained in those shifted. elements. (8) Storage. Each deck shall be con- structed and located so it is stable and (ii) Each new employee who has re- provides each employee with enough ceived training in the particular ele- room to safely move and work in the ments specified in paragraph (i)(3) of area. this section shall not be required to be retrained in those elements prior to (i) Training. (1) The employer shall provide training for each employee, in- initial assignment. cluding supervisors, at no cost to the (iii) The employer shall train each employee. current and new employee in those ele- (2) Frequency. Training shall be pro- ments for which the employee has not vided as follows: received training. (i) As soon as possible but not later (iv) The employer is responsible for than the effective date of this section ensuring that each current and new for initial training for each current and employee can properly and safely per- new employee; form the work tasks and operate the (ii) Prior to initial assignment for tools, equipment, machines, and vehi- each new employee; cles used in their job. (iii) Whenever the employee is as- (6) Each new employee and each em- signed new work tasks, tools, equip- ployee who is required to be trained as ment, machines or vehicles; and specified in paragraph (i)(2) of this sec- (iv) Whenever an employee dem- tion, shall work under the close super- onstrates unsafe job performance. vision of a designated person until the (3) Content. At a minimum, training employee demonstrates to the em- shall consist of the following elements: ployer the ability to safely perform (i) Safe performance of assigned work their new duties independently. tasks; (7) First-aid training. (i) The employer (ii) Safe use, operation and mainte- shall assure that each employee, in- nance of tools, machines and vehicles cluding supervisors, receives or has re- the employee uses or operates, includ- ceived first-aid and CPR training meet- ing emphasis on understanding and fol- ing at least the requirements specified lowing the manufacturer’s operating in appendix B. and maintenance instructions, warn- (ii) The employer shall assure that ings and precautions; each employee’s first-aid and CPR (iii) Recognition of safety and health training and/or certificate of training hazards associated with the employee’s remain current.

744

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00754 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.266

(8) All training shall be conducted by 9. (f)(7)(ii)—insofar as it requires parking a designated person. brakes to be able to stop a moving machine. (9) The employer shall assure that all 10. (g)(1) and (g)(2) insofar as they require training required by this section is pre- inspection and maintenance of employee- owned vehicles. sented in a manner that the employee 11. (h)(2)(vii)—insofar as it precludes is able to understand. The employer backcuts at the level of the horizontal cut of shall assure that all training materials the undercut when the Humboldt cutting used are appropriate in content and vo- method is used. cabulary to the educational level, lit- eracy, and language skills of the em- APPENDIX A TO § 1910.266—FIRST-AID KITS (MANDATORY) ployees being trained. (10) Certification of training. (i) The The following list sets forth the minimally employer shall verify compliance with acceptable number and type of first-aid sup- paragraph (i) of this section by pre- plies for first-aid kits required under para- graph (d)(2) of the logging standard. The con- paring a written certification record. tents of the first-aid kit listed should be ade- The written certification record shall quate for small work sites, consisting of ap- contain the name or other identity of proximately two to three employees. When the employee trained, the date(s) of the larger operations or multiple operations are training, and the signature of the per- being conducted at the same location, addi- son who conducted the training or the tional first-aid kits should be provided at the signature of the employer. If the em- work site or additional quantities of supplies ployer relies on training conducted should be included in the first-aid kits: 1. Gauze pads (at least 4×4 inches). prior to the employee’s hiring or com- 2. Two large gauze pads (at least 8×10 pleted prior to the effective date of this inches). section, the certification record shall 3. Box adhesive bandages (band-aids). indicate the date the employer deter- 4. One package gauze roller bandage at mined the prior training was adequate. least 2 inches wide. (ii) The most recent training certifi- 5. Two triangular bandages. cation shall be maintained. 6. Wound cleaning agent such as sealed (11) Safety and health meetings. The moistened towelettes. 7. Scissors. employer shall hold safety and health 8. At least one blanket. meetings as necessary and at least 9. Tweezers. each month for each employee. Safety 10. Adhesive tape. and health meetings may be conducted 11. Latex gloves. individually, in crew meetings, in larg- 12. Resuscitation equipment such as resus- er groups, or as part of other staff citation bag, airway, or pocket mask. meetings. 13. Two elastic wraps. (j) Appendices. Appendices A and B of 14. Splint. 15. Directions for requesting emergency as- this section are mandatory. The infor- sistance. mation contained in appendix C of this section is informational and is not in- APPENDIX B TO § 1910.266—FIRST-AID AND CPR tended to create any additional obliga- TRAINING (MANDATORY) tions not otherwise imposed or to de- The following is deemed to be the minimal tract from existing regulations. acceptable first-aid and CPR training pro- NOTE: In the FEDERAL REGISTER of August gram for employees engaged in logging ac- 9, 1995, OSHA extended the stay of the fol- tivities. lowing paragraphs of § 1910.266 until Sep- First-aid and CPR training shall be con- tember 8, 1995. The remaining requirements ducted using the conventional methods of of § 1910.266, which became effective on Feb- training such as lecture, demonstration, ruary 9, 1995, are unaffected by the extension practical exercise and examination (both of the partial stay: written and practical). The length of train- 1. (d)(1)(v)—insofar as it requires foot pro- ing must be sufficient to assure that trainees tection to be chain-saw resistant. understand the concepts of first aid and can 2. (d)(1)(vii)—insofar as it required face demonstrate their ability to perform the var- protection. ious procedures contained in the outline 3. (d)(2)(iii). below. 4. (f)(2)(iv). At a minimum, first-aid and CPR training 5. (f)(2)(xi). shall consist of the following: 6. (f)(3)(ii). 1. The definition of first aid. 7. (f)(3)(vii). 2. Legal issues of applying first aid (Good 8. (f)(3)(viii). Samaritan Laws).

745

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00755 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.268 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

3. Basic anatomy. 6. Application of dressings and slings. 4. Patient assessment and first aid for the 7. Treatment of strains, sprains, and frac- following: tures. a. Respiratory arrest. 8. Immobilization of injured persons. b. Cardiac arrest. 9. Handling and transporting injured per- c. Hemorrhage. sons. d. Lacerations/abrasions. 10. Treatment of bites, stings, or contact e. Amputations. with poisonous plants or animals. f. Musculoskeletal injuries. g. Shock. APPENDIX C TO § 1910.266—COMPARABLE ISO h. Eye injuries. STANDARDS (NON-MANDATORY) i. Burns. j. Loss of consciousness. The following International Labor Organi- k. Extreme temperature exposure (hypo- zation (ISO) standards are comparable to the thermia/hyperthermia) corresponding Society of Automotive Engi- l. Paralysis neers (Standards that are referenced in this m. Poisoning. standard.) n. Loss of mental functioning (psychosis/ Utilization of the ISO standards in lieu of hallucinations, etc.). Artificial ventilation. the corresponding SAE standards should re- o. Drug overdose. sult in a machine that meets the OSHA 5. CPR. standard.

SAE standard ISO standard Subject

SAE J1040 ISO 3471–1 Performance Criteria for Rollover Protective Structures (ROPS) for Construction, Earthmoving, Forestry and Mining Machines. SAE J397 ISO 3164 Deflection Limiting Volume—ROPS/FOPS Laboratory Evaluation. SAE J231 ISO 3449 Minimum Performance Criteria for Falling Object Protective Structures (FOPS). SAE J386 ISO 6683 Operator Restraint Systems for Off-Road Work Machines. SAE J185 ISO 2897 Access Systems for Off-Road Machines.

[59 FR 51741, Oct. 12, 1994, as amended at 60 FR 7449, Feb. 8, 1995; 60 FR 40458, Aug. 9, 1996; 60 FR 47035–47037, Sept. 8, 1995; 61 FR 9241, 9242, Mar. 7, 1996; 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004; 71 FR 16673, Apr. 3, 2006]

§ 1910.268 Telecommunications. the exclusive control of electric utili- ties used for the purpose of commu- (a) (1) This section sets Application. nications or metering, or for genera- forth safety and health standards that tion, control, transformation, trans- apply to the work conditions, prac- mission, and distribution of electric tices, means, methods, operations, in- energy, which are located in buildings stallations and processes performed at used exclusively by the electric utili- telecommunications centers and at ties for such purposes, or located out- telecommunications field installations, doors on property owned or leased by which are located outdoors or in build- the electric utilities or on public high- ing spaces used for such field installa- ways, streets, roads, etc., or outdoors tions. Center work includes the instal- by established rights on private prop- lation, operation, maintenance, rear- erty. rangement, and removal of commu- (3) Operations or conditions not spe- nications equipment and other associ- cifically covered by this section are ated equipment in telecommunications subject to all the applicable standards switching centers. Field work includes contained in this part 1910. See the installation, operation, mainte- § 1910.5(c). Operations which involve nance, rearrangement, and removal of construction work, as defined in conductors and other equipment used § 1910.12 are subject to all the applica- for signal or communication service, ble standards contained in part 1926 of and of their supporting or containing this chapter. structures, overhead or underground, (b) General—(1) Buildings containing on public or private rights of way, in- telecommunications centers—(i) Illumina- cluding buildings or other structures. tion. Lighting in telecommunication (2) These standards do not apply: (i) centers shall be provided in an ade- To construction work, as defined in quate amount such that continuing § 1910.12, nor (ii) to installations under work operations, routine observations,

746

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00756 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.268

and the passage of employees can be instructed in emergency procedures carried out in a safe and healthful such as dealing with accidental acid manner. Certain specific tasks in cen- spills. ters, such as splicing cable and the (ii) Electrolyte (acid or base, and dis- maintenance and repair of equipment tilled water) for battery cells shall be frame lineups, may require a higher mixed in a well ventilated room. Acid level of illumination. In such cases, the or base shall be poured gradually, while employer shall install permanent light- stirring, into the water. Water shall ing or portable supplemental lighting never be poured into concentrated to attain a higher level of illumination (greater than 75 percent) acid solu- shall be provided as needed to permit tions. Electrolyte shall never be placed safe performance of the required task. in metal containers nor stirred with (ii) Working surfaces. Guard rails and metal objects. toe boards may be omitted on distribu- (iii) When taking specific gravity tion frame mezzanine platforms to per- readings, the open end of the hydrom- mit access to equipment. This exemp- eter shall be covered with an acid re- tion applies only on the side or sides of sistant material while moving it from the platform facing the frames and cell to cell to avoid splashing or throw- only on those portions of the platform ing the electrolyte. adjacent to equipped frames. (3) Employers must provide employ- (iii) Working spaces. Maintenance ees with readily accessible, adequate, aisles, or wiring aisles, between equip- and appropriate first aid supplies. A ment frame lineups are working spaces non-mandatory example of appropriate and are not an exit route for purposes supplies is listed in Appendix A to 29 of 29 CFR 1910.34. CFR 1910.151. (iv) Special doors. When blastproof or (4) Hazardous materials. Highway mo- power actuated doors are installed in bile vehicles and trailers stored in ga- specially designed hardsite security rages in accordance with § 1910.110 may buildings and spaces, they shall be de- be equipped to carry more than one signed and installed so that they can LP-gas container, but the total capac- be used as a means of egress in emer- ity of LP-gas containers per work vehi- gencies. cle stored in garages shall not exceed (v) Equipment, machinery and machine 100 pounds of LP-gas. All container guarding. When power plant machinery valves shall be closed when not in use. in telecommunications centers is oper- (5) Compressed gas. When using or ated with commutators and couplings transporting nitrogen cylinders in a uncovered, the adjacent housing shall horizontal position, special compart- be clearly marked to alert personnel to ments, racks, or adequate blocking the rotating machinery. shall be provided to prevent cylinder (2) Battery handling. (i) Eye protec- movement. Regulators shall be re- tion devices which provide side as well moved or guarded before a cylinder is as frontal eye protection for employees transported. shall be provided when measuring stor- (6) Support structures. No employee, or age battery specific gravity or han- any material or equipment, may be dling electrolyte, and the employer supported or permitted to be supported shall ensure that such devices are used on any portion of a pole structure, by the employees. The employer shall platform, ladder, walkway or other ele- also ensure that acid resistant gloves vated structure or aerial device unless and aprons shall be worn for protection the employer ensures that the support against spattering. Facilities for quick structure is first inspected by a com- drenching or flushing of the eyes and petent person and it is determined to body shall be provided unless the stor- be adequately strong, in good working age batteries are of the enclosed type condition and properly secured in and equipped with explosion proof place. vents, in which case sealed water rinse (7) Approach distances to exposed ener- or neutralizing packs may be sub- gized overhead power lines and parts. The stituted for the quick drenching or employer shall ensure that no em- flushing facilities. Employees assigned ployee approaches or takes any conduc- to work with storage batteries shall be tive object closer to any electrically

747

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00757 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.268 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

energized overhead power lines and the training, and the date the training parts than prescribed in Table R–2, un- was completed. The certification less: record shall be prepared at the comple- (i) The employee is insulated or tion of training and shall be main- guarded from the energized parts (insu- tained on file for the duration of the lating gloves rated for the voltage in- employee’s employment. The certifi- volved shall be considered adequate in- cation record shall be made available sulation), or upon request to the Assistant Sec- (ii) The energized parts are insulated retary for Occupational Safety and or guarded from the employee and any Health. Such training shall, where ap- other conductive object at a different propriate, include the following sub- potential, or jects: (iii) The power conductors and equip- (1) Recognition and avoidance of dan- ment are deenergized and grounded. gers relating to encounters with harm- ful substances and animal, insect, or TABLE R–2—APPROACH DISTANCES TO EX- plant life; POSED ENERGIZED OVERHEAD POWER LINES (2) Procedures to be followed in emer- AND PARTS gency situations; and, Approach (3) First aid training, including in- Voltage range (phase to phase, RMS) distance struction in artificial respiration. (inches) (d) Employee protection in public work 300 V and less ...... (1) areas. (1) Before work is begun in the Over 300V, not over 750V ...... 12 vicinity of vehicular or pedestrian traf- Over 750V not over 2 kV ...... 18 Over 2 kV, not over 15 kV ...... 24 fic which may endanger employees, Over 15 kV, not over 37 kV ...... 36 warning signs and/or flags or other Over 37 kV, not over 87.5 kV ...... 42 traffic control devices shall be placed Over 87.5 kV, not over 121 kV ...... 48 Over 121 kV, not over 140 kV ...... 54 conspicuously to alert and channel ap- proaching traffic. Where further pro- 1 Avoid contact. tection is needed, barriers shall be uti- (8) Illumination of field work. When- lized. At night, warning lights shall be ever natural light is insufficient to prominently displayed, and excavated adequately illuminate the worksite, ar- areas shall be enclosed with protective tificial illumination shall be provided barricades. to enable the employee to perform the (2) If work exposes energized or mov- work safely. ing parts that are normally protected, (c) Training. Employers shall provide danger signs shall be displayed and bar- training in the various precautions and ricades erected, as necessary, to warn safe practices described in this section other personnel in the area. and shall insure that employees do not (3) The employer shall insure that an engage in the activities to which this employee finding any crossed or fallen section applies until such employees wires which create or may create a have received proper training in the hazardous situation at the work area: various precautions and safe practices (i) Remains on guard or adopts other required by this section. However, adequate means to warn other employ- where the employer can demonstrate ees of the danger and (ii) has the proper that an employee is already trained in authority notified at the earliest prac- the precautions and safe practices re- tical moment. quired by this section prior to his em- (e) Tools and personal protective equip- ployment, training need not be pro- ment—Generally. Personal protective vided to that employee in accordance equipment, protective devices and spe- with this section. Where training is re- cial tools needed for the work of em- quired, it shall consist of on-the-job ployees shall be provided and the em- training or classroom-type training or ployer shall ensure that they are used a combination of both. The employer by employees. Before each day’s use shall certify that employees have been the employer shall ensure that these trained by preparing a certification personal protective devices, tools, and record which includes the identity of equipment are carefully inspected by a the person trained, the signature of the competent person to ascertain that employer or the person who conducted they are in good condition.

748

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00758 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.268

(f) Rubber insulating equipment. (1) in § 1910.6 (50-hour test). Surfaces shall Rubber insulating equipment designed be smooth and free of sharp edges. Pro- for the voltage levels to be encountered duction samples of lineman’s safety shall be provided and the employer straps, body belts and lanyards shall be shall ensure that they are used by em- approved by a nationally recognized ployees as required by this section. The testing laboratory, as having been test- requirements of § 1910.137, Electrical ed in accordance with and as meeting Protective Equipment, shall be fol- the requirements of this paragraph. lowed except for Table I–6. (B) All buckles shall withstand a (2) The employer is responsible for 2,000-pound tensile test with a max- the periodic retesting of all insulating imum permanent deformation no gloves, blankets, and other rubber in- greater than one sixty-forth inch. sulating equipment. This retesting (C) D rings shall withstand a 5,000- shall be electrical, visual and mechan- pound tensile test without cracking or ical. The following maximum retesting breaking. intervals shall apply: (D) Snaphooks shall withstand a 5,000-pound tensile test, or shall with- Gloves, blankets, and other insu- Natural Synthetic lating equipment rubber rubber stand a 3,000-pound tensile test and a 180° bend test. Tensile failure is indi- Months cated by distortion of the snaphook New ...... 12 18 sufficient to release the keeper; bend Re-issued ...... 9 15 test failure is indicated by cracking of the snaphook. (3) Gloves and blankets shall be (ii) Specific requirements. (A)(1) All marked to indicate compliance with fabric used for safety straps shall be the retest schedule, and shall be capable of withstanding an A.C. dielec- marked with the date the next test is tric test of not less than 25,000 volts per due. Gloves found to be defective in the foot ‘‘dry’’ for 3 minutes, without visi- field or by the tests set forth in para- ble deterioration. graph (f)(2) of this section shall be de- (2) All fabric and leather used shall stroyed by cutting them open from the be tested for leakage current. Fabric or finger to the gauntlet. leather may not be used if the leakage (g) Personal climbing equipment—(1) current exceeds 1 milliampere when a General. Safety belts and straps shall potential of 3,000 volts is applied to the be provided and the employer shall en- electrodes positioned 12 inches apart. sure their use when work is performed (3) In lieu of alternating current at positions more than 4 feet above tests, equivalent direct current tests ground, on poles, and on towers, except may be performed. as provided in paragraphs (n)(7) and (n)(8) of this section. No safety belts, (B) The cushion part of the body belt safety straps or lanyards acquired after shall: July 1, 1975 may be used unless they (1) Contain no exposed rivets on the meet the tests set forth in paragraph inside. This provision does not apply to (g)(2) of this section. The employer belts used by craftsmen not engaged in shall ensure that all safety belts and line work. straps are inspected by a competent (2) Be at least three inches in width; person prior to each day’s use to deter- (3) Be at least five thirty-seconds mine that they are in safe working (5⁄32) inch thick, if made of leather; and condition. (C) [Reserved] (2) Telecommunication lineman’s body (D) Suitable copper, steel, or equiva- belts, safety straps, and lanyards—(i) lent liners shall be used around the General requirements. (A) Hardware for bars of D rings to prevent wear be- lineman’s body belts, safety straps, and tween these members and the leather lanyards shall be drop forged or pressed or fabric enclosing them. steel and shall have a corrosion resist- (E) All stitching shall be done with a ant finish tested to meet the require- minimum 42-pound weight nylon or ments of the American Society for equivalent thread and shall be lock Testing and Materials B117–64, which is stitched. Stitching parallel to an edge incorporated by reference as specified may not be less than three-sixteenths

749

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00759 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.268 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

(3⁄16) inch from the edge of the nar- exist, the defect shall be corrected be- rowest member caught by the thread. fore the climbers are used. The use of cross stitching on leather is (iii) Pole climbers shall be inspected prohibited. as required in this paragraph (g)(3) be- (F) The keepers of snaphooks shall fore each day’s use and a gaff cut-out have a spring tension that will not test performed at least weekly when in allow the keeper to begin to open when use. a weight of 21⁄2 pounds or less is ap- (iv) Pole climbers may not be worn plied, but the keepers shall begin to when: open when a weight of four pounds is (A) Working in trees (specifically de- applied. In making this determination, signed tree climbers shall be used for the weight shall be supported on the tree climbing), keeper against the end of the nose. (G) Safety straps, lanyards, and body (B) Working on ladders, belts shall be tested in accordance with (C) Working in an aerial lift, the following procedure: (D) Driving a vehicle, nor (1) Attach one end of the safety strap (E) Walking on rocky, hard, frozen, or lanyard to a rigid support, and the brushy or hilly terrain. other end to a 250-pound canvas bag of (h) Ladders. (1) The employer shall sand; ensure that no employee nor any mate- (2) Allow the 250-pound canvas bag of rial or equipment may be supported or sand to free fall 4 feet when testing permitted to be supported on any por- safety straps and 6 feet when testing tion of a ladder unless it is first deter- lanyards. In each case, the strap or lan- mined, by inspections and checks con- yard shall stop the fall of the 250-pound ducted by a competent person that bag; such ladder is adequately strong, in (3) Failure of the strap or lanyard good condition, and properly secured in shall be indicated by any breakage or place, as required in subpart D of this slippage sufficient to permit the bag to part and as required in this section. fall free from the strap or lanyard. (2) The spacing between steps or (4) The entire ‘‘body belt assembly’’ rungs permanently installed on poles shall be tested using on D ring. A safe- and towers shall be no more than 18 ty strap or lanyard shall be used that is inches (36 inches on any one side). This capable of passing the ‘‘impact loading requirement also applies to fixed lad- test’’ described in paragraph ders on towers, when towers are so (g)(2)(ii)(G)(2) of this section and at- equipped. Spacing between steps shall tached as required in paragraph be uniform above the initial unstepped (g)(2)(ii)(G)(1) of this section. The body section, except where working, stand- belt shall be secured to the 250-pound ing, or access steps are required. Fixed bag of sand at a point which simulates ladder rungs and step rungs for poles the waist of a man and shall be dropped and towers shall have a minimum di- as stated in paragraph (g)(2)(ii)(G)(2) of ameter of 5⁄8″. Fixed ladder rungs shall this section. Failure of the body belt have a minimum clear width of 12 shall be indicated by any breakage or inches. Steps for poles and towers shall slippage sufficient to permit the bag to 1 fall free from the body belt. have a minimum clear width of 4 ⁄2 (3) Pole climbers. (i) Pole climbers inches. The spacing between detachable may not be used if the gaffs are less steps may not exceed 30 inches on any one side, and these steps shall be prop- than 11⁄4 inches in length as measured on the underside of the gaff. The gaffs erly secured when in use. of pole climbers shall be covered with (3) Portable wood ladders intended safety caps when not being used for for general use may not be painted but their intended use. may be coated with a transclucent non- (ii) The employer shall ensure that conductive coating. Portable wood lad- pole climbers are inspected by a com- ders may not be longitudinally rein- petent person for the following condi- forced with metal. tions: Fractured or cracked gaffs or leg (4) Portable wood ladders that are irons, loose or dull gaffs, broken straps not being carried on vehicles and are or buckles. If any of these conditions not in active use shall be stored where

750

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00760 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.268

they will not be exposed to the ele- rails flaring at the base to increase sta- ments and where there is good ventila- bility. tion. (iii) The spacing of rungs or steps (5) The provisions of § 1910.25(c)(5) shall be on 12-inch centers. shall apply to rolling ladders used in (iv) Connections between rungs or telecommunications centers, except steps and siderails shall be constructed that such ladders shall have a min- to insure rigidity as well as strength. imum inside width, between the side (v) Rungs and steps shall be cor- rails, of at least eight inches. rugated, knurled, dimpled, coated with (6) Climbing ladders or stairways on skid-resistant material, or otherwise scaffolds used for access and egress treated to minimize the possibility of shall be affixed or built into the scaf- slipping. fold by proper design and engineering, (vi) Ladder hardware shall meet the and shall be so located that their use strength requirements of the ladder’s will not disturb the stability of the component parts and shall be of a ma- scaffold. The rungs of the climbing de- terial that is protected against corro- vice shall be equally spaced, but may sion unless inherently corrosion-resist- not be less than 12 inches nominal nor ant. Metals shall be so selected as to more than 16 inches nominal apart. avoid excessive galvanic action. Horizontal end rungs used for platform (i) Other tools and personal protective support may also be utilized as a equipment—(1) Head protection. Head climbing device if such rungs meet the protection meeting the requirements of spacing requirement of this paragraph ANSI Z89.2–1971, ‘‘Safety Requirements (h)(6), and if there is sufficient clear- for Industrial Protective Helmets for ance between the rung and the edge of Electrical Workers, Class B’’ shall be the platform to afford an adequate provided whenever there is exposure to handhold. If a portable ladder is affixed possible high voltage electrical con- to the scaffold, it shall be securely at- tact, and the employer shall ensure tached and shall have rungs meeting that the head protection is used by em- the spacing requirements of this para- ployees. ANSI Z89.2–1971 is incor- graph (h)(6). Clearance shall be pro- porated by reference as specified in vided in the back of the ladder of not § 1910.6. less than 6 inches from center of rung (2) Eye protection. Eye protection to the nearest scaffold structural mem- meeting the requirements of § 1910.133 ber. (a)(2) thru (a)(6) shall be provided and (7) When a ladder is supported by an the employer shall ensure its use by aerial strand, and ladder hooks or employees where foreign objects may other supports are not being used, the enter the eyes due to work operations ladder shall be extended at least 2 feet such as but not limited to: above the strand and shall be secured (i) Drilling or chipping stone, brick to it (e.g. lashed or held by a safety or masonry, breaking concrete or pave- strap around the strand and ladder side ment, etc. by hand tools (sledge- rail). When a ladder is supported by a hammer, etc.) or power tools such as pole, it shall be securely lashed to the pneumatic drills or hammers; pole unless the ladder is specifically (ii) Working on or around high speed designed to prevent movement when emery or other grinding wheels unpro- used in this application. tected by guards; (8) The following requirements apply (iii) Cutting or chipping terra cotta to metal manhole ladders. (i) Metal ducts, tile, etc.; manhole ladders shall be free of struc- (iv) Working under motor vehicles re- tural defects and free of accident haz- quiring hammering; ards such as sharp edges and burrs. The (v) Cleaning operations using com- metal shall be protected against corro- pressed air, steam, or sand blast; sion unless inherently corrosion-resist- (vi) Acetylene welding or similar op- ant. erations where sparks are thrown off; (ii) These ladders may be designed (vii) Using powder actuated stud with parallel side rails, or with side drivers; rails varying uniformly in separation (viii) Tree pruning or cutting under- along the length (tapered), or with side brush;

751

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00761 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.268 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

(ix) Handling battery cells and solu- metal parts of these devices shall be tions, such as taking battery readings grounded, unless these tools or appli- with a hydrometer and thermometer; ances are protected by a system of dou- (x) Removing or rearranging strand ble insulation, or its equivalent. Where or open wire; and such a system is employed, the equip- (xi) Performing lead sleeve wiping ment shall be distinctively marked to and while soldering. indicate double insulation. (3) Tent heaters. Flame-type heaters (8) Soldering devices. Grounding shall may not be used within ground tents or be omitted when using soldering irons, on platforms within aerial tents unless: guns or wire-wrap tools on tele- (i) The tent covers are constructed of communications circuits. fire resistant materials, and (9) Lead work. The wiping of lead (ii) Adequate ventilation is provided joints using melted solder, gas fueled to maintain safe oxygen levels and torches, soldering irons or other appro- avoid harmful buildup of combustion priate heating devices, and the sol- products and combustible gases. dering of wires or other electrical con- (4) Torches. Torches may be used on nections do not constitute the welding, aerial splicing platforms or in buckets cutting and brazing described in sub- enclosed by tents provided the tent ma- part Q of this part. When operated from terial is constructed of fire resistant commercial power the metal housing of material and the torch is turned off electric solder pots shall be grounded. when not in actual use. Aerial tents Electric solder pots may be used with shall be adequately ventilated while the power equipment described in para- the torch is in operation. graph (i)(5) of this section without a (5) Portable power equipment. Nominal grounding conductor. The employer 120V, or less, portable generators used shall ensure that wiping gloves or for providing power at work locations cloths and eye protection are used in do not require grounding if the output lead wiping operations. A drip pan to circuit is completely isolated from the catch hot lead drippings shall also be frame of the unit. provided and used. (6) Vehicle-mounted utility generators. (j) Vehicle-mounted material handling Vehicle-mounted utility generators devices and other mechanical equipment— used for providing nominal 240V AC or (1) General. (i) The employer shall en- less for powering portable tools and sure that visual inspections are made equipment need not be grounded to of the equipment by a competent per- earth if all of the following conditions son each day the equipment is to be are met: used to ascertain that it is in good con- (i) One side of the voltage source is dition. solidly strapped to the metallic struc- (ii) The employer shall ensure that ture of the vehicle; tests shall be made at the beginning of (ii) Grounding-type outlets are used, each shift by a competent person to in- with a ‘‘grounding’’ conductor between sure the vehicle brakes and operating the outlet grounding terminal and the systems are in proper working condi- side of the voltage source that is tion. strapped to the vehicle; (2) Scrapers, loaders, dozers, graders (iii) All metallic encased tools and and tractors. (i) All rubber-tired, self- equipment that are powered from this propelled scrapers, rubber-tired front system are equipped with three-wire end loaders, rubber-tired dozers, agri- cords and grounding-type attachment cultural and industrial tractors, crawl- plugs, except as designated in para- er tractors, crawler-type loaders, and graph (i)(7) of this section. motor graders, with or without attach- (7) Portable lights, tools, and appli- ments, that are used in telecommuni- ances. Portable lights, tools, and appli- cations work shall have rollover pro- ances having noncurrent-carrying ex- tective structures that meet the re- ternal metal housing may be used with quirements of subpart W of part 1926 of power equipment described in para- this Title. graph (i)(5) of this section without an (ii) Eye protection shall be provided equipment grounding conductor. When and the employer shall ensure that it is operated from commercial power such used by employees when working in

752

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00762 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.268

areas where flying material is gen- necessary repairs made, if corrective erated. action was required. (3) Vehicle-mounted elevating and ro- (G) Modifications or additions to the tating work platforms. These devices derrick and its associated equipment shall not be operated with any conduc- that alter its capacity or affect its safe tive part of the equipment closer to ex- operation shall be made only with writ- posed energized power lines than the ten certification from the manufac- clearances set forth in Table R–2 of turer, or other equivalent entity, such this section. as a nationally recognized testing lab- (4) Derrick trucks and similar equip- oratory, that the modification results ment. (i) This equipment shall not be in the equipment being safe for its in- operated with any conductive part of tended use. Such changes shall require the equipment closer to exposed ener- the changing and posting of revised ca- gized power lines than the clearances pacity and instruction decals or plates. set forth in Table R–2 of this section. These new ratings or limitations shall (ii) When derricks are used to handle be as provided by the manufacturer or poles near energized power conductors, other equivalent entity. these operations shall comply with the (H) Wire rope used with derricks requirements contained in paragraphs shall be of improved plow steel or (b)(7) and (n)(11) of this section. equivalent. Wire rope safety factors (iii) Moving parts of equipment and shall be in accordance with American machinery carried on or mounted on National Standards Institute B30.6– telecommunications line trucks shall 1969. be guarded. This may be done with bar- (I) Wire rope shall be taken out of ricades as specified in paragraph (d)(2) service, or the defective portion re- of this section. moved, when any of the following con- (iv) Derricks and the operation of ditions exist: (1) The rope strength has derricks shall comply with the fol- been significantly reduced due to cor- lowing requirements: (A) Manufactur- rosion, pitting, or excessive heat, or er’s specifications, load ratings and in- (2) The thickness of the outer wires structions for derrick operation shall of the rope has been reduced to two- be strictly observed. thirds or less of the original thickness, (B) Rated load capacities and instruc- or tions related to derrick operation shall (3) There are more than six broken be conspicuously posted on a perma- wires in any one rope lay, or nent weather-resistant plate or decal (4) There is excessive permanent dis- in a location on the derrick that is tortion caused by kinking, crushing, or plainly visible to the derrick operator. severe twisting of the rope. (C) Prior to derrick operation the (k) Materials handling and storage—(1) parking brake must be set and the sta- Poles. When working with poles in piles bilizers extended if the vehicle is so or stacks, work shall be performed equipped. When the vehicle is situated from the ends of the poles as much as on a grade, at least two wheels must be possible, and precautions shall be chocked on the downgrade side. taken for the safety of employees at (D) Only persons trained in the oper- the other end of the pole. During pole ation of the derrick shall be permitted hauling operations, all loads shall be to operate the derrick. secured to prevent displacement. (E) Hand signals to derrick operators Lights, reflectors and/or flags shall be shall be those prescribed by ANSI displayed on the end and sides of the B30.6–1969, ‘‘Safety Code for Derricks’’, load as necessary. The requirements which is incorporated by reference as for installation, removal, or other han- specified in § 1910.6. dling of poles in pole lines are pre- (F) The employer shall ensure that scribed in paragraph (n) of this section the derrick and its associated equip- which pertains to overhead lines. In ment are inspected by a competent per- the case of hoisting machinery son at intervals set by the manufac- equipped with a positive stop turer but in no case less than once per loadholding device, it shall be permis- year. Records shall be maintained in- sible for the operator to leave his posi- cluding the dates of inspections, and tion at the controls (while a load is

753

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00763 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.268 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

suspended) for the sole purpose of as- purpose shall have sufficient conduc- sisting in positioning the load prior to tivity to carry at least 500 amperes for landing it. Prior to unloading steel, a period of one second without fusing. poles, crossarms, and similar material, (4) Suitable protective grounding. Ac- the load shall be thoroughly examined ceptable grounds for protective ground- to ascertain that the load has not ing are as follows: shifted, that binders or stakes have not (i) A vertical ground wire which has broken, and that the load is not other- been tested, found safe, and is con- wise hazardous to employees. nected to a power system multi- (2) Cable reels. Cable reels in storage grounded neutral or the grounded neu- shall be checked or otherwise re- tral of a power secondary system where strained when there is a possibility there are at least three services con- that they might accidentally roll from nected; position. (ii) Communications cable sheath or (l) Cable fault locating and testing. (1) shield and its supporting strand where Employees involved in using high the sheath or shield is: voltages to locate trouble or test ca- bles shall be instructed in the pre- (A) Bonded to an underground or bur- cautions necessary for their own safety ied cable which is connected to a cen- and the safety of other employees. tral office ground, or (2) Before the voltage is applied, (B) Bonded to an underground metal- cable conductors shall be isolated to lic piping system, or the extent practicable. Employees (C) Bonded to a power system multi- shall be warned, by such techniques as grounded neutral or grounded neutral briefing and tagging at all affected lo- of a power secondary system which has cations, to stay clear while the voltage at least three services connected; is applied. (iii) Guys which are bonded to the (m) Grounding for employee protec- grounds specified in paragraphs (m)(4) tion—pole lines—(1) Power conductors. (i) and (ii) of this section and which Electric power conductors and equip- have continuity uninterrupted by an ment shall be considered as energized insulator; and unless the employee can visually deter- (iv) If all of the preceding grounds mine that they are bonded to one of are not available, arrays of driven the grounds listed in paragraph (m)(4) ground rods where the resultant resist- of this section. ance to ground will be low enough to (2) Nonworking open wire. Nonworking eliminate danger to personnel or per- open wire communications lines shall mit prompt operation of protective de- be bonded to one of the grounds listed vices. in paragraph (m)(4) of this section. (5) Attaching and removing temporary (3) Vertical power conduit, power bonds. When attaching grounds (bonds), ground wires and street light fixtures. (i) the first attachment shall be made to Metal power conduit on joint use poles, the protective ground. When removing exposed vertical power ground wires, bonds, the connection to the line or and street light fixtures which are equipment shall be removed first. Insu- below communications attachments or less than 20 inches above these attach- lating gloves shall be worn during ments, shall be considered energized these operations. and shall be tested for voltage unless (6) Temporary grounding of suspension the employee can visually determine strand. (i) The suspension strand shall that they are bonded to the commu- be grounded to the existing grounds nications suspension strand or cable listed in paragraph (m)(4) of this sec- sheath. tion when being placed on jointly used (ii) If no hazardous voltage is shown poles or during thunderstorm activity. by the voltage test, a temporary bond (ii) Where power crossings are en- shall be placed between such street countered on nonjoint lines, the strand light fixture, exposed vertical power shall be bonded to an existing ground grounding conductor, or metallic power listed in paragraph (m)(4) of this sec- conduit and the communications cable tion as close as possible to the cross- strand. Temporary bonds used for this ing. This bonding is not required where

754

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00764 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.268

crossings are made on a common cross- lated probe before they are handled ei- ing pole unless there is an upward ther with bare hands or with metal change in grade at the pole. tools. (iii) Where roller-type bonds are (v) The employer shall insure that used, they shall be restrained so as to the transmitting technician warn the avoid stressing the electrical connec- riggers about adjacent lines which are, tions. or may become energized. (iv) Bonds between the suspension (vi) The employer shall insure that strand and the existing ground shall be when antenna work has been com- at least No. 6AWG copper. pleted, the rigger in charge of the job (v) Temporary bonds shall be left in returns to the transmitter, notifies the place until the strand has been ten- transmitting technician in charge that sioned, dead-ended, and permanently work has been completed, and person- grounded. ally removes the tag from the antenna (vi) The requirements of paragraphs ground switch. (m)(6)(i) through (m)(6)(v) of this sec- (n) Overhead lines—(1) Handling sus- tion do not apply to the installation of pension strand. (i) The employer shall insulated strand. insure that when handling cable sus- (7) Antenna work-radio transmitting pension strand which is being installed stations 3–30 MHZ. (i) Prior to ground- on poles carrying exposed energized ing a radio transmitting station an- power conductors, employees shall tenna, the employer shall insure that wear insulating gloves and shall avoid the rigger in charge: body contact with the strand until (A) Prepares a danger tag signed with after it has been tensioned, dead-ended his signature, and permanently grounded. (B) Requests the transmitting techni- (ii) The strand shall be restrained cian to shutdown the transmitter and against upward movement during in- to ground the antenna with its ground- stallation: ing switch, (A) On joint-use poles, where there is (C) Is notified by the transmitting an upward change in grade at the pole, technician that the transmitter has and been shutdown, and (B) On non-joint-use poles, where the (D) Tags the antenna ground switch line croses under energized power con- personally in the presence of the trans- ductors. mitting technician after the antenna has been grounded by the transmitting (2) Need for testing wood poles. Unless technician. temporary guys or braces are attached, (ii) Power shall not be applied to the the following poles shall be tested in antenna, nor shall the grounding accordance with paragraph (n)(3) of switch be opened under any cir- this section and determined to be safe cumstances while the tag is affixed. before employees are permitted to (iii)(A) Where no grounding switches climb them: are provided, grounding sticks shall be (i) Dead-end poles, except properly used, one on each side of line, and tags braced or guyed ‘‘Y’’ or ‘‘T’’ cable junc- shall be placed on the grounding sticks, tion poles, antenna switch, or plate power switch (ii) Straight line poles which are not in a conspicuous place. storm guyed and where adjacent span (B) When necessary to further reduce lengths exceed 165 feet, excessive radio frequency pickup, (iii) Poles at which there is a down- ground sticks or short circuits shall be ward change in grade and which are placed directly on the transmission not guyed or braced corner poles or lines near the transmitter in addition cable junction poles, to the regular grounding switches. (iv) Poles which support only tele- (C) In other cases, the antenna lines phone drop wire, and may be disconnected from ground and (v) Poles which carry less than ten the transmitter to reduce pickup at the communication line wires. On joint use point in the field. poles, one power line wire shall be con- (iv) All radio frequency line wires sidered as two communication wires shall be tested for pickup with an insu- for purposes of this paragraph (n)(2)(v).

755

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00765 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.268 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

(3) Methods for testing wood poles. One the double rope and slowly transfer of the following methods or an equiva- their entire weight to the rope and at- lent method shall be used for testing tempt to raise themselves off the wood poles: ground. If only one employee is (i) Rap the pole sharply with a ham- present, one end of the rope which has mer weighing about 3 pounds, starting been passed over the strand shall be near the ground line and continuing tied to the bumper of the truck, or upwards circumferentially around the other equally secure anchorage. The pole to a height of approximately 6 employee then shall grasp the other feet. The hammer will produce a clear end of the rope and attempt to raise sound and rebound sharply when strik- himself off the ground. ing sound wood. Decay pockets will be (6) Inspection of strand. Where strand indicated by a dull sound and/or a less passes over electric power wires or rail- pronounced hammer rebound. When road tracks, it shall be inspected from decay pockets are indicated, the pole an elevated working position at each shall be considered unsafe. Also, prod pole supporting the span in question. the pole as near the ground line as pos- The strand may not be used to support sible using a pole prod or a screwdriver any splicing platform, scaffold or cable with a blade at least 5 inches long. If car, if any of the following conditions substantial decay is encountered, the exist: pole shall be considered unsafe. (i) Corrosion so that no galvanizing (ii) Apply a horizontal force to the can be detected, pole and attempt to rock it back and (ii) One or more wires of the strand forth in a direction perpendicular to are broken, the line. Caution shall be exercised to (iii) Worn spots, or avoid causing power wires to swing to- gether. The force may be applied either (iv) Burn marks such as those caused by pushing with a pike pole or pulling by contact with electric power wires. with a rope. If the pole cracks during (7) Outside work platforms. Unless ade- the test, it shall be considered unsafe. quate railings are provided, safety (4) Unsafe poles or structures. Poles or straps and body belts shall be used structures determined to be unsafe by while working on elevated work plat- test or observation may not be climbed forms such as aerial splicing platforms, until made safe by guying, bracing or pole platforms, ladder platforms and other adequate means. Poles deter- terminal balconies. mined to be unsafe to climb shall, until (8) Other elevated locations. Safety they are made safe, be tagged in a con- straps and body belts shall be worn spicuous place to alert and warn all when working at elevated positions on employees of the unsafe condition. poles, towers or similar structures, (5) Test requirements for cable suspen- which do not have adequately guarded sion strand. (i) Before attaching a splic- work areas. ing platform to a cable suspension (9) Installing and removing wire and strand, the strand shall be tested and cable. Before installing or removing determined to have strength sufficient wire or cable, the pole or structure to support the weight of the platform shall be guyed, braced, or otherwise and the employee. Where the strand supported, as necessary, to prevent crosses above power wires or railroad failure of the pole or structure. tracks it may not be tested but shall be (10) Avoiding contact with energized inspected in accordance with paragraph power conductors or equipment. When (n)(6) of this section. cranes, derricks, or other mechanized (ii) The following method or an equipment are used for setting, mov- equivalent method shall be used for ing, or removing poles, all necessary testing the strength of the strand: A precautions shall be taken to avoid rope, at least three-eighths inch in di- contact with energized power conduc- ameter, shall be thrown over the tors or equipment. strand. On joint lines, the rope shall be (11) Handling poles near energized passed over the strand using tree prun- power conductors. (i) Joint use poles er handles or a wire raising tool. If two may not be set, moved, or removed employees are present, both shall grip where the nominal voltage of open

756

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00766 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.268

electrical power conductors exceeds sign posts. To the extent feasible, re- 34.5kV phase to phase (20kV to ground). main on the vehicle as long as the pos- (ii) Poles that are to be placed, sibility of contact exists. moved or removed during heavy rains, (B) When it is necessary to leave the sleet or wet snow in joint lines car- vehicle, step onto an insulating blan- rying more than 8.7kV phase to phase ket and break all contact with the ve- voltage (5kV to ground) shall be guard- hicle before stepping off the blanket ed or otherwise prevented from direct and onto the ground. As a last resort, if contact with overhead energized power a blanket is not available, the em- conductors. ployee may jump cleanly from the ve- (iii)(A) In joint lines where the power hicle. voltage is greater than 750 volts but (C) When it is necessary to enter the less than 34.5kV phase to phase (20 kV vehicle, first step onto an insulating to ground), wet poles being placed, blanket and break all contact with the moved or removed shall be insulated ground, grounded objects and other with either a rubber insulating blan- persons before touching the truck or ket, a fiberglass box guide, or equiva- derrick. lent protective equipment. (12) Working position on poles. Climb- (B) In joint lines where the power ing and working are prohibited above voltage is greater than 8.7 kV phase to the level of the lowest electric power phase (5kV to ground) but less than conducter on the pole (exclusive of 34.5kV phase to phase (20 kV to vertical runs and street light wiring), ground), dry poles being placed, moved, except: or removed shall be insulated with ei- (i) Where communications facilities ther a rubber insulating blanket, a fi- are attached above the electric power berglass box guide, or equivalent pro- conductors, and a rigid fixed barrier is tective equipment. installed between the electric power fa- (C) Where wet or dry poles are being cility and the communications facility, removed, insulation of the pole is not or required if the pole is cut off 2 feet or (ii) Where the electric power conduc- more below the lowest power wire and tors are cabled secondary service drops also cut off near the ground line. carrying less than 300 volts to ground (iv) Insulating gloves shall be worn and are attached 40 inches or more when handling the pole with either below the communications conductors hands or tools, when there exists a pos- or cables. sibility that the pole may contact a (13) Metal tapes and ropes. (i) Metal power conductor. Where the voltage to measuring tapes, metal measuring ground of the power conductor exceeds ropes, or tapes containing conductive 15kV to ground, Class II gloves (as de- strands may not be used when working fined in ANSI J6.6–1971) shall be used. near exposed energized parts. For voltages not exceeding 15kV to (ii) Where it is necessary to measure ground, insulating gloves shall have a clearances from energized parts, only breakdown voltage of at least 17kV. nonconductive devices shall be used. (v) The guard or insulating material (o) Underground lines. The provisions used to protect the pole shall meet the of this paragraph apply to the guarding appropriate 3 minute proof test voltage of manholes and street openings, and requirements contained in the ANSI to the ventilation and testing for gas J6.4–1971. in manholes and unvented vaults, (vi) When there exists a possibility of where telecommunications field work contact between the pole or the vehi- is performed on or with underground cle-mounted equipment used to handle lines. the pole, and an energized power con- (1) Guarding manholes and street open- ductor, the following precautions shall ings. (i) When covers of manholes or be observed: vaults are removed, the opening shall (A) When on the vehicle which car- be promptly guarded by a railing, tem- ries the derrick, avoid all contact with porary cover, or other suitable tem- the ground, with persons standing on porary barrier which is appropriate to the ground, and with all grounded ob- prevent an accidental fall through the jects such as guys, tree limbs, or metal opening and to protect employees

757

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00767 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.268 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

working in the manhole from foreign cable vaults that are adequately venti- objects entering the manhole. lated. (ii) While work is being performed in (B) The requirements of paragraphs the manhole, a person with basic first (o)(2) (i) and (ii) of this section apply to aid training shall be immediately work in unvented vaults. available to render assistance if there (3) Joint power and telecommunication is cause for believing that a safety haz- manholes. While work is being per- ard exists, and if the requirements con- formed in a manhole occupied jointly tained in paragraphs (d)(1) and (o)(1)(i) by an electric utility and a tele- of this section do not adequately pro- communication utility, an employee tect the employee(s). Examples of man- with basic first aid training shall be hole worksite hazards which shall be considered to constitute a safety haz- available in the immediate vicinity to ard include, but are not limited to: render emergency assistance as may be (A) Manhole worksites where safety required. The employee whose presence hazards are created by traffic patterns is required in the immediate vicinity that cannot be corrected by provisions for the purposes of rendering emer- of paragraph (d)(1) of this section. gency assistance is not to be precluded (B) Manhole worksites that are sub- from occasionally entering a manhole ject to unusual water hazards that can- to provide assistance other than in an not be abated by conventional means. emergency. The requirement of this (C) Manhole worksites that are occu- paragraph (o)(3) does not preclude a pied jointly with power utilities as de- qualified employee, working alone, scribed in paragraph (o)(3) of this sec- from entering for brief periods of time, tion. a manhole where energized cables or (2) Requirements prior to entering man- equipment are in service, for the pur- holes and unvented vaults. (i) Before an pose of inspection, housekeeping, tak- employee enters a manhole, the fol- ing readings, or similar work if such lowing steps shall be taken: work can be performed safely. (A) The internal atmosphere shall be (4) Ladders. Ladders shall be used to tested for combustible gas and, except enter and exit manholes exceeding 4 when continuous forced ventilation is feet in depth. provided, the atmosphere shall also be (5) When open flames are used tested for oxygen deficiency. Flames. (B) When unsafe conditions are de- in manholes, the following precautions tected by testing or other means, the shall be taken to protect against the work area shall be ventilated and oth- accumulation of combustible gas: erwise made safe before entry. (i) A test for combustible gas shall be (ii) An adequate continuous supply of made immediately before using the air shall be provided while work is per- open flame device, and at least once formed in manholes under any of the per hour while using the device; and following conditions: (ii) a fuel tank (e.g., acetylene) may (A) Where combustible or explosive not be in the manhole unless in actual gas vapors have been initially detected use. and subsequently reduced to a safe (p) Microwave transmission—(1) Eye level by ventilation, protection. Employers shall insure that (B) Where organic solvents are used employees do not look into an open in the work procedure, waveguide which is connected to an en- (C) Where open flame torches are ergized source of microwave radiation. used in the work procedure, (2) Hazardous area. Accessible areas (D) Where the manhole is located in associated with microwave commu- that portion of a public right of way nication systems where the electro- open to vehicular traffic and/or exposed to a seepage of gas or gases, or magnetic radiation level exceeds the (E) Where a toxic gas or oxygen defi- radiation protection guide given in ciency is found. § 1910.97 shall be posted as described in (iii)(A) The requirements of para- that section. The lower half of the graphs (o)(2) (i) and (ii) of this section warning symbol shall include the fol- do not apply to work in central office lowing:

758

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00768 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.268

Radiation in this area may exceed hazard not be readily apparent. This rule does limitations and special precautions are re- not apply when operations are per- quired. Obtain specific instruction before en- formed by or on behalf of, the system tering. operator/owner. (3) Protective measures. When an em- (2) Working in proximity to electrical ployee works in an area where the elec- hazards. (i) Employers shall ensure tromagnetic radiation exceeds the ra- that a close inspection is made by the diation protection guide, the employer employee and by the foremen or super- shall institute measures that insure visor in charge before climbing, enter- that the employee’s exposure is not ing, or working around any tree, to de- greater than that permitted by the ra- termine whether an electrical power diation guide. Such measures shall in- conductor passes through the tree, or clude, but not be limited to those of an passes within reaching distance of an administrative or engineering nature employee working in the tree. If any of or those involving personal protective these conditions exist either directly equipment. or indirectly, an electrical hazard shall (q) Tree trimming—electrical hazards— (1) General. (i) Employees engaged in be considered to exist unless the sys- pruning, trimming, removing, or clear- tem operator/owner has caused the haz- ing trees from lines shall be required to ard to be removed by deenergizing the consider all overhead and underground lines, or installing protective equip- electrical power conductors to be ener- ment. gized with potentially fatal voltages, (ii) Only qualified employees or never to be touched (contacted) either trainees, familiar with the special directly or indirectly. techniques and hazards involved in line (ii) Employees engaged in line-clear- clearance, shall be permitted to per- ing operations shall be instructed that: form the work if it is found that an (A) A direct contact is made when electrical hazard exists. any part of the body touches or con- (iii) During all tree working oper- tacts an energized conductor, or other ations aloft where an electrical hazard energized electrical fixture or appa- of more than 750V exists, there shall be ratus. a second employee or trainee qualified (B) An indirect contact is made when in line clearance tree trimming within any part of the body touches any ob- normal voice communication. ject in contact with an energized elec- (iv) Where tree work is performed by trical conductor, or other energized fix- employees qualified in line-clearance ture or apparatus. tree trimming and trainees qualified in (C) An indirect contact can be made line-clearance tree trimming, the through conductive tools, tree clearances from energized conductors branches, trucks, equipment, or other given in Table R–3 shall apply. objects, or as a result of communica- tions wires, cables, fences, or guy wires TABLE R–3—MINIMUM WORKING DISTANCES being accidentally energized. FROM ENERGIZED CONDUCTORS FOR LINE- (D) Electric shock will occur when an CLEARANCE TREE TRIMMERS AND LINE- employee, by either direct or indirect CLEARANCE TREE-TRIMMER TRAINEES contact with an energized conductor, energized tree limb, tool, equipment, Minimum Voltage range (phase to phase) (kilovolts) working dis- or other object, provides a path for the tance flow of electricity to a grounded object or to the ground itself. Simultaneous 2.1 to 15.0 ...... 2 ft. 0 in. contact with two energized conductors 15.1 to 35.0 ...... 2 ft. 4 in. will also cause electric shock which 35.1 to 46.0 ...... 2 ft. 6 in. 46.1 to 72.5 ...... 3 ft. 0 in. may result in serious or fatal injury. 72.6 to 121.0 ...... 3 ft. 4 in. (iii) Before any work is performed in 138.0 to 145.0 ...... 3 ft. 6 in. proximity to energized conductors, the 161.0 to 169.0 ...... 3 ft. 8 in. system operator/owner of the energized 230.0 to 242.0 ...... 5 ft. 0 in. conductors shall be contacted to ascer- 345.0 to 362.0 ...... 7 ft. 0 in. tain if he knows of any hazards associ- 500.0 to 552.0 ...... 11 ft. 0 in. ated with the conductors which may 700.0 to 765.0 ...... 15 ft. 0 in.

759

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00769 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.268 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

(v) Branches hanging on an energized guy ropes for anchoring it, and a device conductor may only be removed using for raising and lowering it with a appropriately insulated equipment. handline. (vi) Rubber footwear, including (3) Aerial tent. A small tent usually lineman’s overshoes, shall not be con- constructed of vinyl coated canvas sidered as providing any measure of which is usually supported by light safety from electrical hazards. metal or plastic tubing. It is designed (vii) Ladders, platforms, and aerial to protect employees in inclement devices, including insulated aerial de- weather while working on ladders, aer- vices, may not be brought in contact ial splicing platforms, or aerial de- with an electrical conductor. Reliance vices. shall not be placed on their dielectric (4) Alive or live (energized). Elec- capabilities. trically connected to a source of poten- (viii) When an aerial lift device con- tial difference, or electrically charged tacts an electrical conductor, the truck so as to have a potential significantly supporting the aerial lift device shall different from that of the earth in the be considered as energized. vicinity. The term live is sometimes (3) Storm work and emergency condi- used in the place of the term current- tions. (i) Since storm work and emer- carrying, where the intent is clear, to gency conditions create special haz- avoid repetition of the longer term. ards, only authorized representatives (5) Barricade. A physical obstruction of the electric utility system operator/ such as tapes, cones, or ‘‘A’’ frame type owner and not telecommunication wood and/or metal structure intended workers may perform tree work in to warn and limit access to a work these situations where energized elec- area. trical power conductors are involved. (6) Barrier. A physical obstruction (ii) When an emergency condition de- which is intended to prevent contact velops due to tree operations, work with energized lines or equipment, or shall be suspended and the system op- to prevent unauthorized access to work erator/owner shall be notified imme- area. diately. (7) Bond. An electrical connection (r) Buried facilities—Communications from one conductive element to an- lines and power lines in the same trench. other for the purpose of minimizing po- [Reserved] tential differences or providing suit- (s) Definitions—(1) Aerial lifts. Aerial able conductivity for fault current or lifts include the following types of ve- for mitigation of leakage current and hicle-mounted aerial devices used to electrolytic action. elevate personnel to jobsites above (8) Cable. A conductor with insula- ground: tion, or a stranded conductor with or (i) Extensible boom platforms, without insulation and other coverings (ii) Aerial ladders, (single-conductor cable), or a combina- (iii) Articulating boom platforms, tion of conductors insulated from one (iv) Vertical towers, another (multiple-conductor cable). (v) A combination of any of the above (9) Cable sheath. A protective cov- defined in ANSI A92.2–1969, which is in- ering applied to cables. corporated by reference as specified in § 1910.6. These devices are made of NOTE: A cable sheath may consist of mul- metal, wood, fiberglass reinforced plas- tiple layers of which one or more is conduc- tive. tic (FRP), or other material; are pow- ered or manually operated; and are (10) Circuit. A conductor or system of deemed to be aerial lifts whether or not conductors through which an electric they are capable of rotating about a current is intended to flow. substantially vertical axis. (11) Communication lines. The conduc- (2) Aerial splicing platform. This con- tors and their supporting or containing sists of a platform, approximately 3 ft. structures for telephone, telegraph, × 4 ft., used to perform aerial cable railroad signal, data, clock, fire, po- work. It is furnished with fiber or syn- lice-alarm, community television an- thetic ropes for supporting the plat- tenna and other systems which are form from aerial strand, detachable used for public or private signal or

760

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00770 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.268

communication service, and which op- wire, or the neutral point of trans- erate at potentials not exceeding 400 former or generator windings) is inten- volts to ground or 750 volts between tionally grounded, either solidly or any two points of the circuit, and the through a current-limiting device (not transmitted power of which does not a current-interrupting device). exceed 150 watts. When communica- (21) Grounding electrode conductor. tions lines operate at less than 150 (Grounding conductor). A conductor volts to ground, no limit is placed on used to connect equipment or the the capacity of the system. Specifi- grounded circuit of a wiring system to cally designed communications cables a grounding electrode. may include communication circuits (22) Insulated. Separated from other not complying with the preceding limi- conducting surfaces by a dielectric sub- tations, where such circuits are also stance (including air space) offering a used incidentally to supply power to high resistance to the passage of cur- communication equipment. rent. (12) Conductor. A material, usually in the form of a wire, cable, or bus bar, NOTE: When any object is said to be insu- suitable for carrying an electric cur- lated, it is understood to be insulated in suitable manner for the conditions to which rent. it is subjected. Otherwise, it is, within the (13) Effectively grounded. Inten- purpose of these rules, uninsulated. Insu- tionally connected to earth through a lating coverings of conductors in one means ground connection or connections of of making the conductor insulated. sufficiently low impedance and having (23) Insulation (as applied to cable). sufficient current-carrying capacity to That which is relied upon to insulate prevent the build-up of voltages which the conductor from other conductors or may result in undue hazard to con- conducting parts or from ground. nected equipment or to persons. (14) Equipment. A general term which (24) Joint use. The sharing of a com- includes materials, fittings, devices, mon facility, such as a manhole, trench appliances, fixtures, apparatus, and or pole, by two or more different kinds similar items used as part of, or in con- of utilities (e.g., power and tele- nection with, a supply or communica- communications). tions installation. (25) Ladder platform. A device de- (15) Ground (reference). That conduc- signed to facilitate working aloft from tive body, usually earth, to which an an extension ladder. A typical device electric potential is referenced. consists of a platform (approximately ″ × ″ (16) Ground (as a noun). A conductive 9 18 ) hinged to a welded pipe frame. connection, whether intentional or ac- The rear edge of the platform and the cidental, by which an electric circuit bottom cross-member of the frame are or equipment is connected to reference equipped with latches to lock the plat- ground. form to ladder rungs. (17) Ground (as a verb). The con- (26) Ladder seat. A removable seat necting or establishment of a connec- used to facilitate work at an elevated tion, whether by intention or accident, position on rolling ladders in tele- of an electric circuit or equipment to communication centers. reference ground. (27) Manhole. A subsurface enclosure (18) Ground tent. A small tent usually which personnel may enter and which constructed of vinyl coated canvas sup- is used for the purpose of installing, op- ported by a metal or plastic frame. Its erating, and maintaining submersible purpose is to protect employees from equipment and/or cable. inclement weather while working at (28) Manhole platform. A platform buried cable pedestal sites or similar consisting of separate planks which are locations. laid across steel platform supports. The (19) Grounded conductor. A system or ends of the supports are engaged in the circuit conductor which is inten- manhole cable racks. tionally grounded. (29) Microwave transmission. The act (20) Grounded systems. A system of of communicating or signaling uti- conductors in which at least one con- lizing a frequency between 1 GHz ductor or point (usually the middle (gigahertz) and 300 GHz inclusively. 761

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00771 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.268 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

(30) Nominal voltage. The nominal owned or leased by the organization pro- voltage of a system or circuit is the viding telecommunication service, or on the value assigned to a system or circuit of premises owned or leased by others. This def- a given voltage class for the purpose of inition includes switch rooms (whether electromechanical, electronic, or computer convenient designation. The actual controlled), terminal rooms, power rooms, voltage may vary above or below this repeater rooms, transmitter and receiver value. rooms, switchboard operating rooms, cable (31) Pole balcony or seat. A balcony or vaults, and miscellaneous communications seat used as a support for workmen at equipment rooms. Simulation rooms of tele- pole-mounted equipment or terminal communication centers for training or devel- boxes. A typical device consists of a opmental purposes are also included. bolted assembly of steel details and a (38) Telecommunications derricks. Ro- wooden platform. Steel braces run from tating or nonrotating derrick struc- the pole to the underside of the bal- tures permanently mounted on vehicles cony. A guard rail (approximately 30″ for the purpose of lifting, lowering, or high) may be provided. positioning hardware and materials (32) Pole platform. A platform in- used in telecommunications work. tended for use by a workman in splic- (39) Telecommunication line truck. A ing and maintenance operations in an truck used to transport men, tools, and elevated position adjacent to a pole. It material, and to serve as a traveling consists of a platform equipped at one workshop for telecommunication in- end with a hinged chain binder for se- stallation and maintenance work. It is curing the platform to a pole. A brace sometimes equipped with a boom and from the pole to the underside of the auxiliary equipment for setting poles, platform is also provided. digging holes, and elevating material (33) Qualified employee. Any worker or men. who by reason of his training and expe- (40) Telecommunication service. The rience has demonstrated his ability to furnishing of a capability to signal or safely perform his duties. communicate at a distance by means (34) Qualified line-clearance tree trim- such as telephone, telegraph, police mer. A tree worker who through related and firealarm, community antenna tel- training and on-the-job experience is evision, or similar system, using wire, familar with the special techniques and conventional cable, coaxial cable, wave hazards involved in line clearance. guides, microwave transmission, or (35) Qualified line-clearance tree-trim- other similar means. mer trainee. Any worker regularly as- (41) Unvented vault. An enclosed vault signed to a line-clearance tree-trim- in which the only openings are access ming crew and undergoing on-the-job openings. training who, in the course of such (42) Vault. An enclosure above or training, has demonstrated his ability below ground which personnel may to perform his duties safely at his level enter, and which is used for the pur- of training. pose of installing, operating, and/or (36) System operator/owner. The person maintaining equipment and/or cable or organization that operates or con- which need not be of submersible de- trols the electrical conductors in- sign. volved. (43) Vented vault. An enclosure as de- (37) Telecommunications center. An in- scribed in paragraph(s) (42) of this sec- stallation of communication equip- tion, with provision for air changes ment under the exclusive control of an using exhaust flue stack(s) and low organization providing telecommuni- level air intake(s), operating on dif- cations service, that is located out- ferentials of pressure and temperature doors or in a vault, chamber, or a providing for air flow. building space used primarily for such (44) Voltage of an effectively grounded installations. circuit. The voltage between any con- ductor and ground unless otherwise in- NOTE: Telecommunication centers are fa- cilities established, equipped and arranged in dicated. accordance with engineered plans for the (45) Voltage of a circuit not effectively purpose of providing telecommunications grounded. The voltage between any two service. They may be located on premises conductors. If one circuit is directly

762

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00772 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

connected to and supplied from another (1) Fuel and ash handling and proc- circuit of higher voltage (as in the case essing installations, such as coal con- of an autotransformer), both are con- veyors, sidered as of the higher voltage, unless (2) Water and steam installations, the circuit of lower voltage is effec- such as penstocks, pipelines, and tively grounded, in which case its volt- tanks, providing a source of energy for age is not determined by the circuit of electric generators, and higher voltage. Direct connection im- (3) Chlorine and hydrogen systems; plies electric connection as distin- (C) Test sites where electrical testing guished from connection merely involving temporary measurements as- through electromagnetic or electro- sociated with electric power genera- static induction. tion, transmission, and distribution is performed in laboratories, in the field, [40 FR 13441, Mar. 26, 1975, as amended at 43 FR 49751, Oct. 24, 1978; 47 FR 14706, Apr. 6, in substations, and on lines, as opposed 1982; 52 FR 36387, Sept. 28, 1987; 54 FR 24334, to metering, relaying, and routine line June 7, 1989; 61 FR 9242, Mar. 7, 1996; 63 FR work; 33467, June 18, 1998; 67 FR 67965, Nov. 7, 2002; (D) Work on or directly associated 69 FR 31882, June 8, 2004; 70 FR 1141, Jan. 5, with the installations covered in para- 2005] graphs (a)(1)(i)(A) through (a)(1)(i)(C) of this section; and § 1910.269 Electric power generation, (E) Line-clearance tree-trimming op- transmission, and distribution. erations, as follows: NOTE: OSHA is staying the enforcement of (1) Entire § 1910.269 of this part, ex- the following paragraphs of § 1910.269 until cept paragraph (r)(1) of this section, ap- November 1, 1994: (b)(1)(ii), (d) except for plies to line-clearance tree-trimming (d)(2)(i) and (d)(2)(iii), (e)(2), (e)(3), (j)(2)(iii), (l)(6)(iii), (m), (n)(3), (n)(4)(ii), (n)(8), (o) ex- operations performed by qualified em- cept for (o)(2)(i), (r)(1)(vi), (u)(1), (u)(4), (u)(5). ployees (those who are knowledgeable OSHA is also staying the enforcement of in the construction and operation of paragraphs (n)(6) and (n)(7) of § 1910.269 until electric power generation, trans- November 1, 1994, but only insofar as they mission, or distribution equipment in- apply to lines and equipment operated at 600 volved, along with the associated haz- volts or less. Further, OSHA is staying the ards). enforcement of paragraph (v)(11)(xii) of (2) Paragraphs (a)(2), (b), (c), (g), (k), § 1910.269 until Februrary 1, 1996. (p), and (r) of this section apply to line- (a) General—(1) Application. (i) This clearance tree-trimming operations section covers the operation and main- performed by line-clearance tree trim- tenance of electric power generation, mers who are not qualified employees. control, transformation, transmission, (ii) Notwithstanding paragraph and distribution lines and equipment. (a)(1)(i) of this section, § 1910.269 of this These provisions apply to: part does not apply: (A) Power generation, transmission, (A) To construction work, as defined and distribution installations, includ- in § 1910.12 of this part; or ing related equipment for the purpose (B) To electrical installations, elec- of communication or metering, which trical safety-related work practices, or are accessible only to qualified employ- electrical maintenance considerations ees; covered by subpart S of this part.

NOTE: The types of installations covered by NOTE 1: Work practices conforming to this paragraph include the generation, trans- §§ 1910.332 through 1910.335 of this part are mission, and distribution installations of considered as complying with the electrical electric utilities, as well as equivalent in- safety-related work practice requirements of stallations of industrial establishments. this section identified in Table 1 of appendix Supplementary electric generating equip- A–2 to this section, provided the work is ment that is used to supply a workplace for being performed on a generation or distribu- emergency, standby, or similar purposes tion installation meeting §§ 1910.303 through only is covered under subpart S of this part. 1910.308 of this part. This table also identifies (See paragraph (a)(1)(ii)(B) of this section.) provisions in this section that apply to work by qualified persons directly on or associated (B) Other installations at an electric with installations of electric power genera- power generating station, as follows: tion, transmission, and distribution lines or

763

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00773 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

equipment, regardless of compliance with (a)(2)(iii) of this section indicate that §§ 1910.332 through 1910.335 of this part. the employee is not complying with NOTE 2: Work practices performed by quali- the safety-related work practices re- fied persons and conforming to § 1910.269 of this part are considered as complying with quired by this section, or §§ 1910.333(c) and 1910.335 of this part. (B) If new technology, new types of equipment, or changes in procedures (iii) This section applies in addition necessitate the use of safety-related to all other applicable standards con- work practices that are different from tained in this part 1910. Specific ref- those which the employee would nor- erences in this section to other sec- mally use, or tions of part 1910 are provided for em- phasis only. (C) If he or she must employ safety- (2) Training. (i) Employees shall be related work practices that are not trained in and familiar with the safety- normally used during his or her regular related work practices, safety proce- job duties. dures, and other safety requirements in NOTE: OSHA would consider tasks that are this section that pertain to their re- performed less often than once per year to spective job assignments. Employees necessitate retraining before the perform- shall also be trained in and familiar ance of the work practices involved. with any other safety practices, includ- (v) The training required by para- ing applicable emergency procedures graph (a)(2) of this section shall be of (such as pole top and manhole rescue), that are not specifically addressed by the classroom or on-the-job type. this section but that are related to (vi) The training shall establish em- their work and are necessary for their ployee proficiency in the work prac- safety. tices required by this section and shall (ii) Qualified employees shall also be introduce the procedures necessary for trained and competent in: compliance with this section. (A) The skills and techniques nec- (vii) The employer shall certify that essary to distinguish exposed live parts each employee has received the train- from other parts of electric equipment, ing required by paragraph (a)(2) of this (B) The skills and techniques nec- section. This certification shall be essary to determine the nominal volt- made when the employee demonstrates age of exposed live parts, proficiency in the work practices in- (C) The minimum approach distances volved and shall be maintained for the specified in this section corresponding duration of the employee’s employ- to the voltages to which the qualified ment. employee will be exposed, and NOTE: Employment records that indicate (D) The proper use of the special pre- that an employee has received the required cautionary techniques, personal pro- training are an acceptable means of meeting tective equipment, insulating and this requirement. shielding materials, and insulated tools for working on or near exposed ener- (3) Existing conditions. Existing condi- gized parts of electric equipment. tions related to the safety of the work to be performed shall be determined be- NOTE: For the purposes of this section, a fore work on or near electric lines or person must have this training in order to be equipment is started. Such conditions considered a qualified person. include, but are not limited to, the (iii) The employer shall determine, nominal voltages of lines and equip- through regular supervision and ment, the maximum switching tran- through inspections conducted on at sient voltages, the presence of haz- least an annual basis, that each em- ardous induced voltages, the presence ployee is complying with the safety-re- and condition of protective grounds lated work practices required by this and equipment grounding conductors, section. the condition of poles, environmental (iv) An employee shall receive addi- conditions relative to safety, and the tional training (or retraining) under locations of circuits and equipment, in- any of the following conditions: cluding power and communication (A) If the supervision and annual in- lines and fire protective signaling cir- spections required by paragraph cuits.

764

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00774 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

(b) Medical services and first aid. The first job of each day or shift. Addi- employer shall provide medical serv- tional job briefings shall be held if sig- ices and first aid as required in nificant changes, which might affect § 1910.151 of this part. In addition to the the safety of the employees, occur dur- requirements of § 1910.151 of this part, ing the course of the work. the following requirements also apply: (2) Extent of briefing. A brief discus- (1) Cardiopulmonary resuscitation and sion is satisfactory if the work in- first aid training. When employees are volved is routine and if the employee, performing work on or associated with by virtue of training and experience, exposed lines or equipment energized can reasonably be expected to recog- at 50 volts or more, persons trained in nize and avoid the hazards involved in first aid including cardiopulmonary re- the job. A more extensive discussion suscitation (CPR) shall be available as shall be conducted: follows: (i) If the work is complicated or par- (i) For field work involving two or ticularly hazardous, or more employees at a work location, at (ii) If the employee cannot be ex- least two trained persons shall be pected to recognize and avoid the haz- available. However, only one trained ards involved in the job. person need be available if all new em- ployees are trained in first aid, includ- NOTE: The briefing is always required to ing CPR, within 3 months of their hir- touch on all the subjects listed in the intro- ing dates. ductory text to paragraph (c) of this section. (ii) For fixed work locations such as (3) Working alone. An employee work- generating stations, the number of ing alone need not conduct a job brief- trained persons available shall be suffi- ing. However, the employer shall en- cient to ensure that each employee ex- sure that the tasks to be performed are posed to electric shock can be reached planned as if a briefing were required. within 4 minutes by a trained person. (d) Hazardous energy control (lockout/ However, where the existing number of tagout) procedures—(1) Application. The employees is insufficient to meet this provisions of paragraph (d) of this sec- requirement (at a remote substation, tion apply to the use of lockout/tagout for example), all employees at the procedures for the control of energy work location shall be trained. sources in installations for the purpose (2) First aid supplies. First aid sup- of electric power generation, including plies required by § 1910.151(b) of this related equipment for communication part shall be placed in weatherproof or metering. Locking and tagging pro- containers if the supplies could be ex- cedures for the deenergizing of electric posed to the weather. energy sources which are used exclu- (3) First aid kits. Each first aid kit sively for purposes of transmission and shall be maintained, shall be readily distribution are addressed by para- available for use, and shall be in- graph (m) of this section. spected frequently enough to ensure that expended items are replaced but NOTE 1: Installations in electric power gen- at least once per year. eration facilities that are not an integral part of, or inextricably commingled with, (c) Job briefing. The employer shall power generation processes or equipment are ensure that the employee in charge covered under § 1910.147 and subpart S of this conducts a job briefing with the em- part. ployees involved before they start each NOTE 2: Lockout and tagging procedures job. The briefing shall cover at least that comply with paragraphs (c) through (f) the following subjects: hazards associ- of § 1910.147 of this part will also be deemed ated with the job, work procedures in- to comply with paragraph (d) of this section volved, special precautions, energy if the procedures address the hazards covered by paragraph (d) of this section. source controls, and personal protec- tive equipment requirements. (2) General. (i) The employer shall es- (1) Number of briefings. If the work or tablish a program consisting of energy operations to be performed during the control procedures, employee training, work day or shift are repetitive and and periodic inspections to ensure that, similar, at least one job briefing shall before any employee performs any be conducted before the start of the servicing or maintenance on a machine

765

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00775 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

or equipment where the unexpected en- (iii) Procedures shall be developed, ergizing, start up, or release of stored documented, and used for the control energy could occur and cause injury, of potentially hazardous energy cov- the machine or equipment is isolated ered by paragraph (d) of this section. from the energy source and rendered (iv) The procedure shall clearly and inoperative. specifically outline the scope, purpose, (ii) The employer’s energy control responsibility, authorization, rules, program under paragraph (d)(2) of this and techniques to be applied to the section shall meet the following re- control of hazardous energy, and the quirements: measures to enforce compliance includ- (A) If an energy isolating device is ing, but not limited to, the following: not capable of being locked out, the (A) A specific statement of the in- employer’s program shall use a tagout tended use of this procedure; system. (B) Specific procedural steps for (B) If an energy isolating device is shutting down, isolating, blocking and capable of being locked out, the em- securing machines or equipment to ployer’s program shall use lockout, un- control hazardous energy; less the employer can demonstrate (C) Specific procedural steps for the that the use of a tagout system will placement, removal, and transfer of provide full employee protection as fol- lockout devices or tagout devices and lows: the responsibility for them; and (1) When a tagout device is used on (D) Specific requirements for testing an energy isolating device which is ca- a machine or equipment to determine pable of being locked out, the tagout and verify the effectiveness of lockout device shall be attached at the same lo- devices, tagout devices, and other en- cation that the lockout device would ergy control measures. have been attached, and the employer (v) The employer shall conduct a shall demonstrate that the tagout pro- periodic inspection of the energy con- gram will provide a level of safety trol procedure at least annually to en- equivalent to that obtained by the use sure that the procedure and the provi- of a lockout program. sions of paragraph (d) of this section (2) In demonstrating that a level of are being followed. safety is achieved in the tagout pro- (A) The periodic inspection shall be gram equivalent to the level of safety performed by an authorized employee obtained by the use of a lockout pro- who is not using the energy control gram, the employer shall demonstrate procedure being inspected. full compliance with all tagout-related (B) The periodic inspection shall be provisions of this standard together designed to identify and correct any with such additional elements as are deviations or inadequacies. necessary to provide the equivalent (C) If lockout is used for energy con- safety available from the use of a lock- trol, the periodic inspection shall in- out device. Additional means to be con- clude a review, between the inspector sidered as part of the demonstration of and each authorized employee, of that full employee protection shall include employee’s responsibilities under the the implementation of additional safe- energy control procedure being in- ty measures such as the removal of an spected. isolating circuit element, blocking of a (D) Where tagout is used for energy controlling switch, opening of an extra control, the periodic inspection shall disconnecting device, or the removal of include a review, between the inspector a valve handle to reduce the likelihood and each authorized and affected em- of inadvertent energizing. ployee, of that employee’s responsibil- (C) After November 1, 1994, whenever ities under the energy control proce- replacement or major repair, renova- dure being inspected, and the elements tion, or modification of a machine or set forth in paragraph (d)(2)(vii) of this equipment is performed, and whenever section. new machines or equipment are in- (E) The employer shall certify that stalled, energy isolating devices for the inspections required by paragraph such machines or equipment shall be (d)(2)(v) of this section have been ac- designed to accept a lockout device. complished. The certification shall

766

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00776 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

identify the machine or equipment on (D) Tags and their means of attach- which the energy control procedure ment must be made of materials which was being used, the date of the inspec- will withstand the environmental con- tion, the employees included in the in- ditions encountered in the workplace. spection, and the person performing (E) Tags may evoke a false sense of the inspection. security, and their meaning needs to be understood as part of the overall en- NOTE: If normal work schedule and oper- ation records demonstrate adequate inspec- ergy control program. tion activity and contain the required infor- (F) Tags must be securely attached mation, no additional certification is re- to energy isolating devices so that they quired. cannot be inadvertently or acciden- tally detached during use. (vi) The employer shall provide train- (viii) Retraining shall be provided by ing to ensure that the purpose and the employer as follows: function of the energy control program (A) Retraining shall be provided for are understood by employees and that all authorized and affected employees the knowledge and skills required for whenever there is a change in their job the safe application, usage, and re- assignments, a change in machines, moval of energy controls are acquired equipment, or processes that present a by employees. The training shall in- new hazard or whenever there is a clude the following: change in the energy control proce- (A) Each authorized employee shall dures. receive training in the recognition of (B) Retraining shall also be con- applicable hazardous energy sources, ducted whenever a periodic inspection the type and magnitude of energy under paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this section available in the workplace, and in the reveals, or whenever the employer has methods and means necessary for en- reason to believe, that there are devi- ergy isolation and control. ations from or inadequacies in an em- (B) Each affected employee shall be ployee’s knowledge or use of the energy instructed in the purpose and use of control procedures. the energy control procedure. (C) The retraining shall reestablish (C) All other employees whose work employee proficiency and shall intro- operations are or may be in an area duce new or revised control methods where energy control procedures may and procedures, as necessary. be used shall be instructed about the (ix) The employer shall certify that procedures and about the prohibition employee training has been accom- relating to attempts to restart or re- plished and is being kept up to date. energize machines or equipment that The certification shall contain each are locked out or tagged out. employee’s name and dates of training. (vii) When tagout systems are used, (3) Protective materials and hardware. employees shall also be trained in the (i) Locks, tags, chains, wedges, key following limitations of tags: blocks, adapter pins, self-locking fas- (A) Tags are essentially warning de- teners, or other hardware shall be pro- vices affixed to energy isolating de- vided by the employer for isolating, se- vices and do not provide the physical curing, or blocking of machines or restraint on those devices that is pro- equipment from energy sources. vided by a lock. (ii) Lockout devices and tagout de- (B) When a tag is attached to an en- vices shall be singularly identified; ergy isolating means, it is not to be re- shall be the only devices used for con- moved without authorization of the au- trolling energy; may not be used for thorized person responsible for it, and other purposes; and shall meet the fol- it is never to be bypassed, ignored, or lowing requirements: otherwise defeated. (A) Lockout devices and tagout de- (C) Tags must be legible and under- vices shall be capable of withstanding standable by all authorized employees, the environment to which they are ex- affected employees, and all other em- posed for the maximum period of time ployees whose work operations are or that exposure is expected. may be in the area, in order to be effec- (1) Tagout devices shall be con- tive. structed and printed so that exposure

767

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00777 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

to weather conditions or wet and damp NOTE: See also paragraph (d)(7) of this sec- locations will not cause the tag to de- tion, which requires that the second notifica- teriorate or the message on the tag to tion take place before the machine or equip- become illegible. ment is reenergized. (2) Tagout devices shall be so con- (6) Lockout/tagout application. The es- structed as not to deteriorate when tablished procedures for the applica- used in corrosive environments. tion of energy control (the lockout or (B) Lockout devices and tagout de- tagout procedures) shall include the vices shall be standardized within the following elements and actions, and facility in at least one of the following these procedures shall be performed in criteria: color, shape, size. Addition- the following sequence: ally, in the case of tagout devices, (i) Before an authorized or affected print and format shall be standardized. employee turns off a machine or equip- (C) Lockout devices shall be substan- ment, the authorized employee shall tial enough to prevent removal without the use of excessive force or unusual have knowledge of the type and mag- techniques, such as with the use of bolt nitude of the energy, the hazards of the cutters or metal cutting tools. energy to be controlled, and the meth- (D) Tagout devices, including their od or means to control the energy. means of attachment, shall be substan- (ii) The machine or equipment shall tial enough to prevent inadvertent or be turned off or shut down using the accidental removal. Tagout device at- procedures established for the machine tachment means shall be of a non-reus- or equipment. An orderly shutdown able type, attachable by hand, self- shall be used to avoid any additional or locking, and non-releasable with a increased hazards to employees as a re- minimum unlocking strength of no less sult of the equipment stoppage. than 50 pounds and shall have the gen- (iii) All energy isolating devices that eral design and basic characteristics of are needed to control the energy to the being at least equivalent to a one- machine or equipment shall be phys- piece, all-environment-tolerant nylon ically located and operated in such a cable tie. manner as to isolate the machine or (E) Each lockout device or tagout de- equipment from energy sources. vice shall include provisions for the (iv) Lockout or tagout devices shall identification of the employee applying be affixed to each energy isolating de- the device. vice by authorized employees. (F) Tagout devices shall warn against (A) Lockout devices shall be attached hazardous conditions if the machine or equipment is energized and shall in- in a manner that will hold the energy clude a legend such as the following: isolating devices in a ‘‘safe’’ or ‘‘off’’ Do Not Start, Do Not Open, Do Not position. Close, Do Not Energize, Do Not Oper- (B) Tagout devices shall be affixed in ate. such a manner as will clearly indicate that the operation or movement of en- NOTE: For specific provisions covering ac- ergy isolating devices from the ‘‘safe’’ cident prevention tags, see § 1910.145 of this part. or ‘‘off’’ position is prohibited. (1) Where tagout devices are used (4) Energy isolation. Lockout and with energy isolating devices designed tagout device application and removal with the capability of being locked out, may only be performed by the author- the tag attachment shall be fastened at ized employees who are performing the the same point at which the lock would servicing or maintenance. have been attached. (5) Notification. Affected employees shall be notified by the employer or au- (2) Where a tag cannot be affixed di- thorized employee of the application rectly to the energy isolating device, and removal of lockout or tagout de- the tag shall be located as close as vices. Notification shall be given before safely possible to the device, in a posi- the controls are applied and after they tion that will be immediately obvious are removed from the machine or to anyone attempting to operate the equipment. device.

768

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00778 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

(v) Following the application of lock- vided by the removal of the device by out or tagout devices to energy iso- the authorized employee who applied lating devices, all potentially haz- it. The specific procedure shall include ardous stored or residual energy shall at least the following elements: be relieved, disconnected, restrained, (A) Verification by the employer that or otherwise rendered safe. the authorized employee who applied (vi) If there is a possibility of re- the device is not at the facility; accumulation of stored energy to a (B) Making all reasonable efforts to hazardous level, verification of isola- contact the authorized employee to in- tion shall be continued until the serv- form him or her that his or her lockout icing or maintenance is completed or or tagout device has been removed; and until the possibility of such accumula- (C) Ensuring that the authorized em- tion no longer exists. ployee has this knowledge before he or (vii) Before starting work on ma- she resumes work at that facility. chines or equipment that have been (8) Additional requirements. (i) If the locked out or tagged out, the author- lockout or tagout devices must be tem- ized employee shall verify that isola- porarily removed from energy isolating tion and deenergizing of the machine devices and the machine or equipment or equipment have been accomplished. must be energized to test or position If normally energized parts will be ex- the machine, equipment, or component posed to contact by an employee while thereof, the following sequence of ac- the machine or equipment is deener- tions shall be followed: gized, a test shall be performed to en- (A) Clear the machine or equipment sure that these parts are deenergized. of tools and materials in accordance (7) Release from lockout/tagout. Before with paragraph (d)(7)(i) of this section; lockout or tagout devices are removed and energy is restored to the machine (B) Remove employees from the ma- or equipment, procedures shall be fol- chine or equipment area in accordance lowed and actions taken by the author- with paragraphs (d)(7)(ii) and (d)(7)(iii) ized employees to ensure the following: of this section; (i) The work area shall be inspected (C) Remove the lockout or tagout de- to ensure that nonessential items have vices as specified in paragraph (d)(7)(iv) been removed and that machine or of this section; equipment components are operation- (D) Energize and proceed with the ally intact. testing or positioning; and (ii) The work area shall be checked to (E) Deenergize all systems and re- ensure that all employees have been apply energy control measures in ac- safely positioned or removed. cordance with paragraph (d)(6) of this (iii) After lockout or tagout devices section to continue the servicing or have been removed and before a ma- maintenance. chine or equipment is started, affected (ii) When servicing or maintenance is employees shall be notified that the performed by a crew, craft, depart- lockout or tagout devices have been re- ment, or other group, they shall use a moved. procedure which affords the employees (iv) Each lockout or tagout device a level of protection equivalent to that shall be removed from each energy iso- provided by the implementation of a lating device by the authorized em- personal lockout or tagout device. ployee who applied the lockout or Group lockout or tagout devices shall tagout device. However, if that em- be used in accordance with the proce- ployee is not available to remove it, dures required by paragraphs (d)(2)(iii) the device may be removed under the and (d)(2)(iv) of this section including, direction of the employer, provided but not limited to, the following spe- that specific procedures and training cific requirements: for such removal have been developed, (A) Primary responsibility shall be documented, and incorporated into the vested in an authorized employee for a employer’s energy control program. set number of employees working The employer shall demonstrate that under the protection of a group lockout the specific procedure provides a de- or tagout device (such as an operations gree of safety equivalent to that pro- lock);

769

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00779 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

(B) Provision shall be made for the (C) Provisions shall be made to iden- authorized employee to ascertain the tify the authorized employee who is re- exposure status of all individual group sponsible for (that is, being protected members with regard to the lockout or by) the lockout or tagout device, to tagout of the machine or equipment; transfer responsibility for lockout and (C) When more than one crew, craft, tagout devices, and to ensure that an department, or other group is involved, authorized employee requesting re- assignment of overall job-associated moval or transfer of a lockout or lockout or tagout control responsi- tagout device is the one responsible for bility shall be given to an authorized it before the device is removed or employee designated to coordinate af- transferred. fected work forces and ensure con- (e) Enclosed spaces. This paragraph tinuity of protection; and covers enclosed spaces that may be en- tered by employees. It does not apply (D) Each authorized employee shall to vented vaults if a determination is affix a personal lockout or tagout de- made that the ventilation system is op- vice to the group lockout device, group erating to protect employees before lockbox, or comparable mechanism they enter the space. This paragraph when he or she begins work and shall applies to routine entry into enclosed remove those devices when he or she spaces in lieu of the permit-space entry stops working on the machine or equip- requirements contained in paragraphs ment being serviced or maintained. (d) through (k) of § 1910.146 of this part. (iii) Procedures shall be used during If, after the precautions given in para- shift or personnel changes to ensure graphs (e) and (t) of this section are the continuity of lockout or tagout taken, the hazards remaining in the en- protection, including provision for the closed space endanger the life of an en- orderly transfer of lockout or tagout trant or could interfere with escape device protection between off-going from the space, then entry into the en- and on-coming employees, to minimize closed space shall meet the permit- their exposure to hazards from the un- space entry requirements of paragraphs expected energizing or start-up of the (d) through (k) of § 1910.146 of this part. machine or equipment or from the re- lease of stored energy. NOTE: Entries into enclosed spaces con- ducted in accordance with the permit-space (iv) Whenever outside servicing per- entry requirements of paragraphs (d) sonnel are to be engaged in activities through (k) of § 1910.146 of this part are con- covered by paragraph (d) of this sec- sidered as complying with paragraph (e) of tion, the on-site employer and the out- this section. side employer shall inform each other (1) Safe work practices. The employer of their respective lockout or tagout shall ensure the use of safe work prac- procedures, and each employer shall tices for entry into and work in en- ensure that his or her personnel under- closed spaces and for rescue of employ- stand and comply with restrictions and ees from such spaces. prohibitions of the energy control pro- (2) Training. Employees who enter en- cedures being used. closed spaces or who serve as attend- (v) If energy isolating devices are in- ants shall be trained in the hazards of stalled in a central location and are enclosed space entry, in enclosed space under the exclusive control of a system entry procedures, and in enclosed space operator, the following requirements rescue procedures. apply: (3) Rescue equipment. Employers shall (A) The employer shall use a proce- provide equipment to ensure the dure that affords employees a level of prompt and safe rescue of employees protection equivalent to that provided from the enclosed space. by the implementation of a personal (4) Evaluation of potential hazards. Be- lockout or tagout device. fore any entrance cover to an enclosed (B) The system operator shall place space is removed, the employer shall and remove lockout and tagout devices determine whether it is safe to do so by in place of the authorized employee checking for the presence of any at- under paragraphs (d)(4), (d)(6)(iv), and mospheric pressure or temperature dif- (d)(7)(iv) of this section. ferences and by evaluating whether

770

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00780 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

there might be a hazardous atmosphere tested for oxygen deficiency with a di- in the space. Any conditions making it rect-reading meter or similar instru- unsafe to remove the cover shall be ment, capable of collection and imme- eliminated before the cover is removed. diate analysis of data samples without the need for off-site evaluation. If con- NOTE: The evaluation called for in this paragraph may take the form of a check of tinuous forced air ventilation is pro- the conditions expected to be in the enclosed vided, testing is not required provided space. For example, the cover could be that the procedures used ensure that checked to see if it is hot and, if it is fas- employees are not exposed to the haz- tened in place, could be loosened gradually ards posed by oxygen deficiency. to release any residual pressure. A deter- (10) Testing for flammable gases and va- mination must also be made of whether con- pors. Before an employee enters an en- ditions at the site could cause a hazardous closed space, the internal atmosphere atmosphere, such as an oxygen deficient or shall be tested for flammable gases and flammable atmosphere, to develop within the space. vapors with a direct-reading meter or similar instrument capable of collec- (5) Removal of covers. When covers are tion and immediate analysis of data removed from enclosed spaces, the samples without the need for off-site opening shall be promptly guarded by a evaluation. This test shall be per- railing, temporary cover, or other bar- formed after the oxygen testing and rier intended to prevent an accidental ventilation required by paragraph (e)(9) fall through the opening and to protect of this section demonstrate that there employees working in the space from is sufficient oxygen to ensure the accu- objects entering the space. racy of the test for flammability. (6) Hazardous atmosphere. Employees (11) Ventilation and monitoring. If may not enter any enclosed space while flammable gases or vapors are detected it contains a hazardous atmosphere, or if an oxygen deficiency is found, unless the entry conforms to the ge- forced air ventilation shall be used to neric permit-required confined spaces maintain oxygen at a safe level and to standard in § 1910.146 of this part. prevent a hazardous concentration of flammable gases and vapors from accu- NOTE: The term ‘‘entry’’ is defined in § 1910.146(b) of this part. mulating. A continuous monitoring program to ensure that no increase in (7) Attendants. While work is being flammable gas or vapor concentration performed in the enclosed space, a per- occurs may be followed in lieu of ven- son with first aid training meeting tilation, if flammable gases or vapors paragraph (b) of this section shall be are detected at safe levels. immediately available outside the en- closed space to render emergency as- NOTE: See the definition of hazardous at- mosphere for guidance in determining sistance if there is reason to believe whether or not a given concentration of a that a hazard may exist in the space or substance is considered to be hazardous. if a hazard exists because of traffic pat- terns in the area of the opening used (12) Specific ventilation requirements. If for entry. That person is not precluded continuous forced air ventilation is from performing other duties outside used, it shall begin before entry is the enclosed space if these duties do made and shall be maintained long not distract the attendant from moni- enough to ensure that a safe atmos- toring employees within the space. phere exists before employees are al- lowed to enter the work area. The NOTE: See paragraph (t)(3) of this section forced air ventilation shall be so di- for additional requirements on attendants rected as to ventilate the immediate for work in manholes. area where employees are present with- (8) Calibration of test instruments. Test in the enclosed space and shall con- instruments used to monitor tinue until all employees leave the en- atmospheres in enclosed spaces shall be closed space. kept in calibration, with a minimum (13) Air supply. The air supply for the accuracy of ±10 percent. continuous forced air ventilation shall (9) Testing for oxygen deficiency. Be- be from a clean source and may not in- fore an employee enters an enclosed crease the hazards in the enclosed space, the internal atmosphere shall be space.

771

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00781 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

(14) Open flames. If open flames are generation, transmission, and distribution used in enclosed spaces, a test for flam- lines and equipment. It does not apply to mable gases and vapors shall be made portions of buildings, such as loading docks, to electric equipment, such as transformers immediately before the open flame de- and capacitors, nor to aerial lifts. Require- vice is used and at least once per hour ments for fall protection associated with while the device is used in the space. walking and working surfaces are contained Testing shall be conducted more fre- in subpart D of this part; requirements for quently if conditions present in the en- fall protection associated with aerial lifts closed space indicate that once per are contained in § 1910.67 of this part. hour is insufficient to detect hazardous NOTE 2: Employees undergoing training are accumulations of flammable gases or not considered ‘‘qualified employees’’ for the purposes of this provision. Unqualified em- vapors. ployees (including trainees) are required to NOTE: See the definition of hazardous at- use fall protection any time they are more mosphere for guidance in determining than 4 feet (1.2 m) above the ground. whether or not a given concentration of a (vi) The following requirements substance is considered to be hazardous. apply to personal fall arrest systems: (f) Excavations. Excavation oper- (A) When stopping or arresting a fall, ations shall comply with subpart P of personal fall arrest systems shall limit part 1926 of this chapter. the maximum arresting force on an (g) Personal protective equipment—(1) employee to 900 pounds (4 kN) if used General. Personal protective equipment with a body belt. shall meet the requirements of subpart (B) When stopping or arresting a fall, I of this part. personal fall arrest systems shall limit (2) Fall protection. (i) Personal fall ar- the maximum arresting force on an rest equipment shall meet the require- employee to 1800 pounds (8 kN) if used ments of subpart M of part 1926 of this with a body harness. chapter. (C) Personal fall arrest systems shall (ii) Body belts and safety straps for be rigged such that an employee can work positioning shall meet the re- neither free fall more than 6 feet (1.8 quirements of § 1926.959 of this chapter. m) nor contact any lower level. (iii) Body belts, safety straps, lan- (vii) If vertical lifelines or droplines yards, lifelines, and body harnesses are used, not more than one employee shall be inspected before use each day may be attached to any one lifeline. to determine that the equipment is in (viii) Snaphooks may not be con- nected to loops made in webbing-type safe working condition. Defective lanyards. equipment may not be used. (ix) Snaphooks may not be connected (iv) Lifelines shall be protected to each other. against being cut or abraded. (h) Ladders, platforms, step bolts, and (v) Fall arrest equipment, work posi- manhole steps—(1) General. Require- tioning equipment, or travel restrict- ments for ladders contained in subpart ing equipment shall be used by employ- D of this part apply, except as specifi- ees working at elevated locations more cally noted in paragraph (h)(2) of this than 4 feet (1.2 m) above the ground on section. poles, towers, or similar structures if (2) Special ladders and platforms. Port- other fall protection has not been pro- able ladders and platforms used on vided. Fall protection equipment is not structures or conductors in conjunc- required to be used by a qualified em- tion with overhead line work need not ployee climbing or changing location meet paragraphs (d)(2)(i) and (d)(2)(iii) on poles, towers, or similar structures, of § 1910.25 of this part or paragraph unless conditions, such as, but not lim- (c)(3)(iii) of § 1910.26 of this part. How- ited to, ice, high winds, the design of ever, these ladders and platforms shall the structure (for example, no provi- meet the following requirements: sion for holding on with hands), or the (i) Ladders and platforms shall be se- presence of contaminants on the struc- cured to prevent their becoming acci- ture, could cause the employee to lose dentally dislodged. his or her grip or footing. (ii) Ladders and platforms may not NOTE 1: This paragraph applies to struc- be loaded in excess of the working tures that support overhead electric power loads for which they are designed.

772

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00782 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

(iii) Ladders and platforms may be nected equipment through receptacles used only in applications for which mounted on the generator or the vehi- they were designed. cle. (iv) In the configurations in which (ii) The non-current-carrying metal they are used, ladders and platforms parts of equipment and the equipment shall be capable of supporting without grounding conductor terminals of the failure at least 2.5 times the maximum receptacles shall be bonded to the gen- intended load. erator frame. (3) Conductive ladders. Portable metal (iii) In the case of vehicle-mounted ladders and other portable conductive generators, the frame of the generator ladders may not be used near exposed shall be bonded to the vehicle frame. energized lines or equipment. However, (iv) Any neutral conductor shall be in specialized high-voltage work, con- bonded to the generator frame. ductive ladders shall be used where the (4) Hydraulic and pneumatic tools. (i) employer can demonstrate that non- Safe operating pressures for hydraulic conductive ladders would present a and pneumatic tools, hoses, valves, greater hazard than conductive lad- pipes, filters, and fittings may not be ders. exceeded. (i) Hand and portable power tools—(1) General. Paragraph (i)(2) of this section NOTE: If any hazardous defects are present, no operating pressure would be safe, and the applies to electric equipment con- hydraulic or pneumatic equipment involved nected by cord and plug. Paragraph may not be used. In the absence of defects, (i)(3) of this section applies to portable the maximum rated operating pressure is the and vehicle-mounted generators used maximum safe pressure. to supply cord-and plug-connected (ii) A hydraulic or pneumatic tool equipment. Paragraph (i)(4) of this sec- used where it may contact exposed live tion applies to hydraulic and pneu- parts shall be designed and maintained matic tools. for such use. (2) Cord- and plug-connected equip- (iii) The hydraulic system supplying ment. (i) Cord-and plug-connected a hydraulic tool used where it may equipment supplied by premises wiring contact exposed live parts shall provide is covered by subpart S of this part. protection against loss of insulating (ii) Any cord- and plug-connected value for the voltage involved due to equipment supplied by other than the formation of a partial vacuum in premises wiring shall comply with one the hydraulic line. of the following in lieu of § 1910.243(a)(5) of this part: NOTE: Hydraulic lines without check (A) It shall be equipped with a cord valves having a separation of more than 35 containing an equipment grounding feet (10.7 m) between the oil reservoir and conductor connected to the tool frame the upper end of the hydraulic system pro- mote the formation of a partial vacuum. and to a means for grounding the other end (however, this option may not be (iv) A pneumatic tool used on ener- used where the introduction of the gized electric lines or equipment or ground into the work environment in- used where it may contact exposed live creases the hazard to an employee); or parts shall provide protection against (B) It shall be of the double-insulated the accumulation of moisture in the type conforming to subpart S of this air supply. part; or (v) Pressure shall be released before (C) It shall be connected to the power connections are broken, unless quick supply through an isolating trans- acting, self-closing connectors are former with an ungrounded secondary. used. Hoses may not be kinked. (3) Portable and vehicle-mounted gen- (vi) Employees may not use any part erators. Portable and vehicle-mounted of their bodies to locate or attempt to generators used to supply cord- and stop a hydraulic leak. plug-connected equipment shall meet (j) Live-line tools—(1) Design of tools. the following requirements: Live-line tool rods, tubes, and poles (i) The generator may only supply shall be designed and constructed to equipment located on the generator or withstand the following minimum the vehicle and cord- and plug-con- tests:

773

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00783 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

(i) 100,000 volts per foot (3281 volts per along its entire working length and, if centimeter) of length for 5 minutes if the tool is made of fiberglass-rein- the tool is made of fiberglass-rein- forced plastic, its integrity under wet forced plastic (FRP), or conditions. (ii) 75,000 volts per foot (2461 volts per (E) The voltage applied during the centimeter) of length for 3 minutes if tests shall be as follows: the tool is made of wood, or (1) 75,000 volts per foot (2461 volts per (iii) Other tests that the employer centimeter) of length for 1 minute if can demonstrate are equivalent. the tool is made of fiberglass, or NOTE: Live-line tools using rod and tube (2) 50,000 volts per foot (1640 volts per that meet ASTM F711–89, Standard Speci- centimeter) of length for 1 minute if fication for Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic the tool is made of wood, or (FRP) Rod and Tube Used in Live-Line (3) Other tests that the employer can Tools, conform to paragraph (j)(1)(i) of this section. demonstrate are equivalent. (2) Condition of tools. (i) Each live-line NOTE: Guidelines for the examination, tool shall be wiped clean and visually cleaning, repairing, and in-service testing of live-line tools are contained in the Institute inspected for defects before use each of Electrical and Electronics Engineers day. Guide for In-Service Maintenance and Elec- (ii) If any defect or contamination trical Testing of Live-Line Tools, IEEE Std. that could adversely affect the insu- 978–1984. lating qualities or mechanical integ- rity of the live-line tool is present after (k) Materials handling and storage—(1) wiping, the tool shall be removed from General. Material handling and storage service and examined and tested ac- shall conform to the requirements of cording to paragraph (j)(2)(iii) of this subpart N of this part. section before being returned to serv- (2) Materials storage near energized ice. lines or equipment. (i) In areas not re- (iii) Live-line tools used for primary stricted to qualified persons only, ma- employee protection shall be removed terials or equipment may not be stored from service every 2 years and when- closer to energized lines or exposed en- ever required under paragraph (j)(2)(ii) ergized parts of equipment than the of this section for examination, clean- following distances plus an amount ing, repair, and testing as follows: providing for the maximum sag and (A) Each tool shall be thoroughly ex- side swing of all conductors and pro- amined for defects. viding for the height and movement of (B) If a defect or contamination that material handling equipment: could adversely affect the insulating (A) For lines and equipment ener- qualities or mechanical integrity of gized at 50 kV or less, the distance is 10 the live-line tool is found, the tool feet (305 cm). shall be repaired and refinished or shall (B) For lines and equipment ener- be permanently removed from service. gized at more than 50 kV, the distance If no such defect or contamination is is 10 feet (305 cm) plus 4 inches (10 cm) found, the tool shall be cleaned and for every 10 kV over 50 kV. waxed. (ii) In areas restricted to qualified (C) The tool shall be tested in accord- employees, material may not be stored ance with paragraphs (j)(2)(iii)(D) and within the working space about ener- (j)(2)(iii)(E) of this section under the gized lines or equipment. following conditions: (1) After the tool has been repaired or NOTE: Requirements for the size of the working space are contained in paragraphs refinished; and (u)(1) and (v)(3) of this section. (2) After the examination if repair or refinishing is not performed, unless the (l) Working on or near exposed ener- tool is made of FRP rod or foam-filled gized parts. This paragraph applies to FRP tube and the employer can dem- work on exposed live parts, or near onstrate that the tool has no defects enough to them, to expose the em- that could cause it to fail in use. ployee to any hazard they present. (D) The test method used shall be de- (1) General. Only qualified employees signed to verify the tool’s integrity may work on or with exposed energized

774

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00784 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

lines or parts of equipment. Only quali- insulating gloves and sleeves worn in fied employees may work in areas con- accordance with paragraph (l)(3) of this taining unguarded, uninsulated ener- section are considered insulation of the gized lines or parts of equipment oper- employee only with regard to the ener- ating at 50 volts or more. Electric lines gized part upon which work is being and equipment shall be considered and performed), or treated as energized unless the provi- (ii) The energized part is insulated sions of paragraph (d) or paragraph (m) from the employee and from any other of this section have been followed. conductive object at a different poten- (i) Except as provided in paragraph tial, or (l)(1)(ii) of this section, at least two (iii) The employee is insulated from employees shall be present while the any other exposed conductive object, as following types of work are being per- during live-line bare-hand work. formed: (A) Installation, removal, or repair of NOTE: Paragraphs (u)(5)(i) and (v)(5)(i) of lines that are energized at more than this section contain requirements for the 600 volts, guarding and isolation of live parts. Parts of (B) Installation, removal, or repair of electric circuits that meet these two provi- deenergized lines if an employee is ex- sions are not considered as ‘‘exposed’’ unless a guard is removed or an employee enters posed to contact with other parts ener- the space intended to provide isolation from gized at more than 600 volts, the live parts. (C) Installation, removal, or repair of equipment, such as transformers, ca- (3) Type of insulation. If the employee pacitors, and regulators, if an em- is to be insulated from energized parts ployee is exposed to contact with parts by the use of insulating gloves (under energized at more than 600 volts, paragraph (l)(2)(i) of this section), insu- (D) Work involving the use of me- lating sleeves shall also be used. How- chanical equipment, other than insu- ever, insulating sleeves need not be lated aerial lifts, near parts energized used under the following conditions: at more than 600 volts, and (i) If exposed energized parts on (E) Other work that exposes an em- which work is not being performed are ployee to electrical hazards greater insulated from the employee and than or equal to those posed by oper- (ii) If such insulation is placed from a ations that are specifically listed in position not exposing the employee’s paragraphs (l)(1)(i)(A) through upper arm to contact with other ener- (l)(1)(i)(D) of this section. gized parts. (ii) Paragraph (l)(1)(i) of this section (4) Working position. The employer does not apply to the following oper- shall ensure that each employee, to the ations: extent that other safety-related condi- (A) Routine switching of circuits, if tions at the worksite permit, works in the employer can demonstrate that a position from which a slip or shock conditions at the site allow this work will not bring the employee’s body into to be performed safely, contact with exposed, uninsulated (B) Work performed with live-line parts energized at a potential different tools if the employee is positioned so from the employee. that he or she is neither within reach of nor otherwise exposed to contact (5) Making connections. The employer with energized parts, and shall ensure that connections are made (C) Emergency repairs to the extent as follows: necessary to safeguard the general pub- (i) In connecting deenergized equip- lic. ment or lines to an energized circuit by (2) Minimum approach distances. The means of a conducting wire or device, employer shall ensure that no em- an employee shall first attach the wire ployee approaches or takes any conduc- to the deenergized part; tive object closer to exposed energized (ii) When disconnecting equipment or parts than set forth in Table R–6 lines from an energized circuit by through Table R–10, unless: means of a conducting wire or device, (i) The employee is insulated from an employee shall remove the source the energized part (insulating gloves or end first; and

775

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00785 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

(iii) When lines or equipment are for the voltage, and is clear of the ex- connected to or disconnected from en- haust path of the fuse barrel. ergized circuits, loose conductors shall (8) Covered (noninsulated) conductors. be kept away from exposed energized The requirements of this section which parts. pertain to the hazards of exposed live (6) Apparel. (i) When work is per- parts also apply when work is per- formed within reaching distance of ex- formed in the proximity of covered posed energized parts of equipment, the (noninsulated) wires. employer shall ensure that each em- (9) Noncurrent-carrying metal parts. ployee removes or renders nonconduc- Noncurrent-carrying metal parts of tive all exposed conductive articles, equipment or devices, such as trans- such as key or watch chains, rings, or former cases and circuit breaker wrist watches or bands, unless such ar- housings, shall be treated as energized ticles do not increase the hazards asso- at the highest voltage to which they ciated with contact with the energized are exposed, unless the employer in- parts. spects the installation and determines (ii) The employer shall train each that these parts are grounded before employee who is exposed to the hazards work is performed. of flames or electric arcs in the hazards (10) Opening circuits under load. De- involved. vices used to open circuits under load (iii) The employer shall ensure that conditions shall be designed to inter- each employee who is exposed to the rupt the current involved. hazards of flames or electric arcs does not wear clothing that, when exposed TABLE R–6—AC LIVE-LINE WORK MINIMUM to flames or electric arcs, could in- APPROACH DISTANCE crease the extent of injury that would be sustained by the employee. Distance

NOTE: Clothing made from the following Phase to Phase to Nominal voltage in kilovolts ground expo- phase expo- types of fabrics, either alone or in blends, is phase to phase sure sure prohibited by this paragraph, unless the em- ployer can demonstrate that the fabric has (ft-in) (m) (ft-in) (m) been treated to withstand the conditions 4 4 4 4 that may be encountered or that the cloth- 0.05 to 1.0 ...... ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ing is worn in such a manner as to eliminate 1.1 to 15.0 ...... 2–1 0.64 2–2 0.66 15.1 to 36.0 ...... 2–4 0.72 2–7 0.77 the hazard involved: acetate, nylon, poly- 36.1 to 46.0 ...... 2–7 0.77 2–10 0.85 ester, rayon. 46.1 to 72.5 ...... 3–0 0.90 3–6 1.05 (7) Fuse handling. When fuses must be 72.6 to 121 ...... 3–2 0.95 4–3 1.29 138 to 145 ...... 3–7 1.09 4–11 1.50 installed or removed with one or both 161 to 169 ...... 4–0 1.22 5–8 1.71 terminals energized at more than 300 230 to 242 ...... 5–3 1.59 7–6 2.27 volts or with exposed parts energized 345 to 362 ...... 8–6 2.59 12–6 3.80 at more than 50 volts, the employer 500 to 550 ...... 11–3 3.42 18–1 5.50 shall ensure that tools or gloves rated 765 to 800 ...... 14–11 4.53 26–0 7.91 for the voltage are used. When expul- NOTE 1: These distances take into consideration the highest switching surge an employee will be exposed to on any sys- sion-type fuses are installed with one tem with air as the insulating medium and the maximum or both terminals energized at more voltages shown. NOTE 2: The clear live-line tool distance shall equal or ex- than 300 volts, the employer shall en- ceed the values for the indicated voltage ranges. sure that each employee wears eye pro- NOTE 3: See appendix B to this section for information on how the minimum approach distances listed in the tables were tection meeting the requirements of derived. subpart I of this part, uses a tool rated 4 Avoid contact.

TABLE R–7—AC LIVE-LINE WORK MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCE WITH OVERVOLTAGE FACTOR PHASE-TO-GROUND EXPOSURE

Maximum an- Distance in feet-inches ticipated per- unit transient Maximum phase-to-phase voltage in kilovolts overvoltage 121 145 169 242 362 552 800

1.5 ...... 6–0 9–8 1.6 ...... 6–6 10–8 1.7 ...... 7–0 11–8 1.8 ...... 7–7 12–8

776

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00786 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

TABLE R–7—AC LIVE-LINE WORK MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCE WITH OVERVOLTAGE FACTOR PHASE-TO-GROUND EXPOSURE—Continued

Maximum an- Distance in feet-inches ticipated per- unit transient Maximum phase-to-phase voltage in kilovolts overvoltage 121 145 169 242 362 552 800

1.9 ...... 8–1 13–9 2.0 2–5 2–9 3–0 3–10 5–3 8–9 14–11 2.1 2–6 2–10 3–2 4–0 5–5 9–4 ...... 2.2 2–7 2–11 3–3 4–1 5–9 9–11 ...... 2.3 2–8 3–0 3–4 4–3 6–1 10–6 ...... 2.4 2–9 3–1 3–5 4–5 6–4 11–3 ...... 2.5 2–9 3–2 3–6 4–6 6–8 ...... 2.6 2–10 3–3 3–8 4–8 7–1 ...... 2.7 2–11 3–4 3–9 4–10 7–5 ...... 2.8 3–0 3–5 3–10 4–11 7–9 ...... 2.9 3–1 3–6 3–11 5–1 8–2 ...... 3.0 3–2 3–7 4–0 5–3 8–6 ......

NOTE 1: The distance specified in this table may be applied only where the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage has been determined by engineering analysis and has been supplied by the employer. Table R–6 applies otherwise. NOTE 2: The distances specified in this table are the air, bare-hand, and live-line tool distances. NOTE 3: See appendix B to this section for information on how the minimum approach distances listed in the tables were de- rived and on how to calculate revised minimum approach distances based on the control of transient overvoltages.

TABLE R–8—AC LIVE-LINE WORK MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCE WITH OVERVOLTAGE FACTOR PHASE-TO-PHASE EXPOSURE

Maximum an- Distance in feet-inches ticipated per- unit transient Maximum phase-to-phase voltage in kilovolts overvoltage 121 145 169 242 362 552 800

1.5 ...... 7–4 12–1 1.6 ...... 8–9 14–6 1.7 ...... 10–2 17–2 1.8 ...... 11–7 19–11 1.9 ...... 13–2 22–11 2.0 3–7 4–1 4–8 6–1 8–7 14–10 26–0 2.1 3–7 4–2 4–9 6–3 8–10 15–7 ...... 2.2 3–8 4–3 4–10 6–4 9–2 16–4 ...... 2.3 3–9 4–4 4–11 6–6 9–6 17–2 ...... 2.4 3–10 4–5 5–0 6–7 9–11 18–1 ...... 2.5 3–11 4–6 5–2 6-9 10–4 ...... 2.6 4–0 4–7 5–3 6–11 10–9 ...... 2.7 4–1 4–8 5–4 7–0 11–2 ...... 2.8 4–1 4–9 5–5 7–2 11–7 ...... 2.9 4–2 4–10 5–6 7–4 12–1 ...... 3.0 4–3 4–11 5–8 7–6 12–6 ......

NOTE 1: The distance specified in this table may be applied only where the maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage has been determined by engineering analysis and has been supplied by the employer. Table R–6 applies otherwise. NOTE 2: The distances specified in this table are the air, bare-hand, and live-line tool distances. NOTE 3: See appendix B to this section for information on how the minimum approach distances listed in the tables were de- rived and on how to calculate revised minimum approach distances based on the control of transient overvoltages.

TABLE R–9—DC LIVE-LINE WORK MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCE WITH OVERVOLTAGE FACTOR

Distance in feet-inches Maximum anticipated per-unit transient over- voltage Maximum line-to-ground voltage in kilovolts 250 400 500 600 750

1.5 or lower ...... 3–8 5–3 6–9 8–7 11–10 1.6 ...... 3–10 5–7 7–4 9–5 13–1 1.7 ...... 4–1 6–0 7–11 10–3 14–4 1.8 ...... 4–3 6–5 8–7 11–2 15–9

NOTE 1: The distances specified in this table may be applied only where the maximum anticipated per-unit transient over- voltage has been determined by engineering analysis and has been supplied by the employer. However, if the transient over- voltage factor is not known, a factor of 1.8 shall be assumed. NOTE 2: The distances specified in this table are the air, bare-hand, and live-line tool distances.

777

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00787 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

TABLE R–10—ALTITUDE CORRECTION FACTOR (m)(3)(xii) of this section do not apply. Additionally, tags required by the re- Altitude Correction factor maining provisions of paragraph (m)(3) ft m of this section need not be used. 3000 900 1.00 (iv) Any disconnecting means that 4000 1200 1.02 are accessible to persons outside the 5000 1500 1.05 employer’s control (for example, the 6000 1800 1.08 7000 2100 1.11 general public) shall be rendered inop- 8000 2400 1.14 erable while they are open for the pur- 9000 2700 1.17 pose of protecting employees. 10000 3000 1.20 12000 3600 1.25 (3) Deenergizing lines and equipment. 14000 4200 1.30 (i) A designated employee shall make a 16000 4800 1.35 request of the system operator to have 18000 5400 1.39 20000 6000 1.44 the particular section of line or equip- ment deenergized. The designated em- NOTE: If the work is performed at elevations greater than 3000 ft (900 m) above mean sea level, the minimum ap- ployee becomes the employee in charge proach distance shall be determined by multiplying the dis- (as this term is used in paragraph tances in Table R–6 through Table R–9 by the correction fac- tor corresponding to the altitude at which work is performed. (m)(3) of this section) and is respon- sible for the clearance. (m) Deenergizing lines and equipment (ii) All switches, disconnectors, for employee protection—(1) Application. jumpers, taps, and other means Paragraph (m) of this section applies to through which known sources of elec- the deenergizing of transmission and tric energy may be supplied to the par- distribution lines and equipment for ticular lines and equipment to be deen- the purpose of protecting employees. ergized shall be opened. Such means Control of hazardous energy sources shall be rendered inoperable, unless its used in the generation of electric en- design does not so permit, and tagged ergy is covered in paragraph (d) of this to indicate that employees are at work. section. Conductors and parts of elec- tric equipment that have been deener- (iii) Automatically and remotely gized under procedures other than controlled switches that could cause those required by paragraph (d) or (m) the opened disconnecting means to of this section, as applicable, shall be close shall also be tagged at the point treated as energized. of control. The automatic or remote (2) General. (i) If a system operator is control feature shall be rendered inop- in charge of the lines or equipment and erable, unless its design does not so their means of disconnection, all of the permit. requirements of paragraph (m)(3) of (iv) Tags shall prohibit operation of this section shall be observed, in the the disconnecting means and shall indi- order given. cate that employees are at work. (ii) If no system operator is in charge (v) After the applicable requirements of the lines or equipment and their in paragraphs (m)(3)(i) through means of disconnection, one employee (m)(3)(iv) of this section have been fol- in the crew shall be designated as being lowed and the employee in charge of in charge of the clearance. All of the the work has been given a clearance by requirements of paragraph (m)(3) of the system operator, the lines and this section apply, in the order given, equipment to be worked shall be tested except as provided in paragraph to ensure that they are deenergized. (m)(2)(iii) of this section. The employee (vi) Protective grounds shall be in- in charge of the clearance shall take stalled as required by paragraph (n) of the place of the system operator, as this section. necessary. (vii) After the applicable require- (iii) If only one crew will be working ments of paragraphs (m)(3)(i) through on the lines or equipment and if the (m)(3)(vi) of this section have been fol- means of disconnection is accessible lowed, the lines and equipment in- and visible to and under the sole con- volved may be worked as deenergized. trol of the employee in charge of the (viii) If two or more independent clearance, paragraphs (m)(3)(i), crews will be working on the same (m)(3)(iii), (m)(3)(iv), (m)(3)(viii), and lines or equipment, each crew shall

778

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00788 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

independently comply with the require- of this section and shall be grounded as ments in paragraph (m)(3) of this sec- specified in paragraphs (n)(3) through tion. (n)(9) of this section. However, if the (ix) To transfer the clearance, the employer can demonstrate that instal- employee in charge (or, if the employee lation of a ground is impracticable or in charge is forced to leave the work- that the conditions resulting from the site due to illness or other emergency, installation of a ground would present the employee’s supervisor) shall inform greater hazards than working without the system operator; employees in the grounds, the lines and equipment may crew shall be informed of the transfer; be treated as deenergized provided all and the new employee in charge shall of the following conditions are met: be responsible for the clearance. (i) The lines and equipment have (x) To release a clearance, the em- been deenergized under the provisions ployee in charge shall: of paragraph (m) of this section. (A) Notify employees under his or her (ii) There is no possibility of contact direction that the clearance is to be re- with another energized source. leased; (iii) The hazard of induced voltage is (B) Determine that all employees in not present. the crew are clear of the lines and (3) Equipotential zone. Temporary pro- equipment; tective grounds shall be placed at such (C) Determine that all protective locations and arranged in such a man- grounds installed by the crew have ner as to prevent each employee from been removed; and being exposed to hazardous differences (D) Report this information to the in electrical potential. system operator and release the clear- (4) Protective grounding equipment. (i) ance. Protective grounding equipment shall (xi) The person releasing a clearance be capable of conducting the maximum shall be the same person that requested fault current that could flow at the the clearance, unless responsibility has point of grounding for the time nec- been transferred under paragraph essary to clear the fault. This equip- (m)(3)(ix) of this section. ment shall have an ampacity greater (xii) Tags may not be removed unless than or equal to that of No. 2 AWG cop- the associated clearance has been re- per. leased under paragraph (m)(3)(x) of this section. NOTE: Guidelines for protective grounding (xiii) Only after all protective equipment are contained in American Soci- grounds have been removed, after all ety for Testing and Materials Standard Spec- ifications for Temporary Grounding Systems crews working on the lines or equip- to be Used on De-Energized Electric Power ment have released their clearances, Lines and Equipment, ASTM F855–1990. after all employees are clear of the lines and equipment, and after all pro- (ii) Protective grounds shall have an tective tags have been removed from a impedance low enough to cause imme- given point of disconnection, may ac- diate operation of protective devices in tion be initiated to reenergize the lines case of accidental energizing of the or equipment at that point of dis- lines or equipment. connection. (5) Testing. Before any ground is in- (n) Grounding for the protection of em- stalled, lines and equipment shall be ployees—(1) Application. Paragraph (n) tested and found absent of nominal of this section applies to the grounding voltage, unless a previously installed of transmission and distribution lines ground is present. and equipment for the purpose of pro- (6) Order of connection. When a ground tecting employees. Paragraph (n)(4) of is to be attached to a line or to equip- this section also applies to the protec- ment, the ground-end connection shall tive grounding of other equipment as be attached first, and then the other required elsewhere in this section. end shall be attached by means of a (2) General. For the employee to work live-line tool. lines or equipment as deenergized, the (7) Order of removal. When a ground is lines or equipment shall be deenergized to be removed, the grounding device under the provisions of paragraph (m) shall be removed from the line or

779

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00789 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

equipment using a live-line tool before areas shall also be included. (See para- the ground-end connection is removed. graph (o)(6) of this section.) (8) Additional precautions. When work (ii) Employees shall be trained in is performed on a cable at a location safe work practices upon their initial remote from the cable terminal, the assignment to the test area, with peri- cable may not be grounded at the cable odic reviews and updates provided as terminal if there is a possibility of haz- required by paragraph (a)(2) of this sec- ardous transfer of potential should a tion. fault occur. (3) Guarding of test areas. (i) Perma- (9) Removal of grounds for test. nent test areas shall be guarded by Grounds may be removed temporarily walls, fences, or barriers designed to during tests. During the test proce- keep employees out of the test areas. dure, the employer shall ensure that (ii) In field testing, or at a temporary each employee uses insulating equip- test site where permanent fences and ment and is isolated from any hazards gates are not provided, one of the fol- involved, and the employer shall insti- lowing means shall be used to prevent tute any additional measures as may unauthorized employees from entering: be necessary to protect each exposed (A) The test area shall be guarded by employee in case the previously the use of distinctively colored safety grounded lines and equipment become tape that is supported approximately energized. waist high and to which safety signs (o) Testing and test facilities—(1) Appli- are attached, cation. Paragraph (o) of this section (B) The test area shall be guarded by provides for safe work practices for a barrier or barricade that limits ac- high-voltage and high-power testing cess to the test area to a degree equiva- performed in laboratories, shops, and lent, physically and visually, to the substations, and in the field and on barricade specified in paragraph electric transmission and distribution (o)(3)(ii)(A) of this section, or lines and equipment. It applies only to (C) The test area shall be guarded by testing involving interim measure- one or more test observers stationed so ments utilizing high voltage, high that the entire area can be monitored. power, or combinations of both, and (iii) The barriers required by para- not to testing involving continuous graph (o)(3)(ii) of this section shall be measurements as in routine metering, removed when the protection they pro- relaying, and normal line work. vide is no longer needed. (iv) Guarding shall be provided with- NOTE: Routine inspection and maintenance in test areas to control access to test measurements made by qualified employees equipment or to apparatus under test are considered to be routine line work and that may become energized as part of are not included in the scope of paragraph (o) of this section, as long as the hazards related the testing by either direct or induc- to the use of intrinsic high-voltage or high- tive coupling, in order to prevent acci- power sources require only the normal pre- dental employee contact with ener- cautions associated with routine operation gized parts. and maintenance work required in the other (4) Grounding practices. (i) The em- paragraphs of this section. Two typical ex- ployer shall establish and implement amples of such excluded test work proce- safe grounding practices for the test fa- dures are ‘‘phasing-out’’ testing and testing cility. for a ‘‘no-voltage’’ condition. (A) All conductive parts accessible to (2) General requirements. (i) The em- the test operator during the time the ployer shall establish and enforce work equipment is operating at high voltage practices for the protection of each shall be maintained at ground poten- worker from the hazards of high-volt- tial except for portions of the equip- age or high-power testing at all test ment that are isolated from the test areas, temporary and permanent. Such operator by guarding. work practices shall include, as a min- (B) Wherever ungrounded terminals imum, test area guarding, grounding, of test equipment or apparatus under and the safe use of measuring and con- test may be present, they shall be trol circuits. A means providing for treated as energized until determined periodic safety checks of field test by tests to be deenergized.

780

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00790 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

(ii) Visible grounds shall be applied, other conductive parts accessible to either automatically or manually with employees shall be provided by bond- properly insulated tools, to the high- ing, insulation, or isolation. voltage circuits after they are deener- (5) Control and measuring circuits. (i) gized and before work is performed on Control wiring, meter connections, test the circuit or item or apparatus under leads and cables may not be run from a test. Common ground connections shall test area unless they are contained in a be solidly connected to the test equip- grounded metallic sheath and termi- ment and the apparatus under test. nated in a grounded metallic enclosure (iii) In high-power testing, an iso- or unless other precautions are taken lated ground-return conductor system that the employer can demonstrate as shall be provided so that no intentional ensuring equivalent safety. passage of current, with its attendant (ii) Meters and other instruments voltage rise, can occur in the ground with accessible terminals or parts shall grid or in the earth. However, an iso- be isolated from test personnel to pro- lated ground-return conductor need not tect against hazards arising from such be provided if the employer can dem- terminals and parts becoming ener- onstrate that both the following condi- gized during testing. If this isolation is tions are met: provided by locating test equipment in (A) An isolated ground-return con- metal compartments with viewing win- ductor cannot be provided due to the dows, interlocks shall be provided to distance of the test site from the elec- interrupt the power supply if the com- tric energy source, and partment cover is opened. (B) Employees are protected from any hazardous step and touch poten- (iii) The routing and connections of tials that may develop during the test. temporary wiring shall be made secure against damage, accidental interrup- NOTE: See appendix C to this section for in- tions and other hazards. To the max- formation on measures that can be taken to imum extent possible, signal, control, protect employees from hazardous step and ground, and power cables shall be kept touch potentials. separate. (iv) In tests in which grounding of (iv) If employees will be present in test equipment by means of the equip- the test area during testing, a test ob- ment grounding conductor located in server shall be present. The test ob- the equipment power cord cannot be server shall be capable of imple- used due to increased hazards to test menting the immediate deenergizing of personnel or the prevention of satisfac- test circuits for safety purposes. tory measurements, a ground that the (6) Safety check. (i) Safety practices employer can demonstrate affords governing employee work at temporary equivalent safety shall be provided, and or field test areas shall provide for a the safety ground shall be clearly indi- routine check of such test areas for cated in the test set-up. safety at the beginning of each series (v) When the test area is entered of tests. after equipment is deenergized, a (ii) The test operator in charge shall ground shall be placed on the high- conduct these routine safety checks be- voltage terminal and any other exposed fore each series of tests and shall verify terminals. at least the following conditions: (A) High capacitance equipment or apparatus shall be discharged through (A) That barriers and guards are in a resistor rated for the available en- workable condition and are properly ergy. placed to isolate hazardous areas; (B) A direct ground shall be applied (B) That system test status signals, to the exposed terminals when the if used, are in operable condition; stored energy drops to a level at which (C) That test power disconnects are it is safe to do so. clearly marked and readily available in (vi) If a test trailer or test vehicle is an emergency; used in field testing, its chassis shall (D) That ground connections are be grounded. Protection against haz- clearly identifiable; ardous touch potentials with respect to (E) That personal protective equip- the vehicle, instrument panels, and ment is provided and used as required

781

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00791 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

by subpart I of this part and by this material shall be used within its max- section; and imum load rating and other design lim- (F) That signal, ground, and power itations for the conditions under which cables are properly separated. the work is being performed. (p) Mechanical equipment—(1) General (4) Operations near energized lines or requirements. (i) The critical safety equipment. (i) Mechanical equipment components of mechanical elevating shall be operated so that the minimum and rotating equipment shall receive a approach distances of Table R–6 thorough visual inspection before use through Table R–10 are maintained on each shift. from exposed energized lines and equip- NOTE: Critical safety components of me- ment. However, the insulated portion chanical elevating and rotating equipment of an aerial lift operated by a qualified are components whose failure would result in employee in the lift is exempt from a free fall or free rotation of the boom. this requirement. (ii) No vehicular equipment having (ii) A designated employee other than an obstructed view to the rear may be the equipment operator shall observe operated on off-highway jobsites where the approach distance to exposed lines any employee is exposed to the hazards and equipment and give timely warn- created by the moving vehicle, unless: ings before the minimum approach dis- (A) The vehicle has a reverse signal tance required by paragraph (p)(4)(i) is alarm audible above the surrounding reached, unless the employer can dem- noise level, or onstrate that the operator can accu- (B) The vehicle is backed up only rately determine that the minimum when a designated employee signals approach distance is being maintained. that it is safe to do so. (iii) If, during operation of the me- (iii) The operator of an electric line chanical equipment, the equipment truck may not leave his or her position could become energized, the operation at the controls while a load is sus- shall also comply with at least one of pended, unless the employer can dem- paragraphs (p)(4)(iii)(A) through onstrate that no employee (including (p)(4)(iii)(C) of this section. the operator) might be endangered. (A) The energized lines exposed to (iv) Rubber-tired, self-propelled contact shall be covered with insu- scrapers, rubber-tired front-end load- lating protective material that will ers, rubber-tired dozers, wheel-type ag- withstand the type of contact that ricultural and industrial tractors, might be made during the operation. crawler-type tractors, crawler-type (B) The equipment shall be insulated loaders, and motor graders, with or for the voltage involved. The equip- without attachments, shall have roll- ment shall be positioned so that its over protective structures that meet uninsulated portions cannot approach the requirements of subpart W of part the lines or equipment any closer than 1926 of this chapter. the minimum approach distances speci- (2) Outriggers. (i) Vehicular equip- fied in Table R–6 through Table R–10. ment, if provided with outriggers, shall (C) Each employee shall be protected be operated with the outriggers ex- from hazards that might arise from tended and firmly set as necessary for equipment contact with the energized the stability of the specific configura- lines. The measures used shall ensure tion of the equipment. Outriggers may that employees will not be exposed to not be extended or retracted outside of hazardous differences in potential. Un- clear view of the operator unless all less the employer can demonstrate employees are outside the range of pos- that the methods in use protect each sible equipment motion. employee from the hazards that might (ii) If the work area or the terrain arise if the equipment contacts the en- precludes the use of outriggers, the ergized line, the measures used shall equipment may be operated only with- include all of the following techniques: in its maximum load ratings for the (1) Using the best available ground to particular configuration of the equip- minimize the time the lines remain en- ment without outriggers. ergized, (3) Applied loads. Mechanical equip- (2) Bonding equipment together to ment used to lift or move lines or other minimize potential differences,

782

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00792 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

(3) Providing ground mats to extend (i) The employer shall use the ten- areas of equipotential, and sion stringing method, barriers, or (4) Employing insulating protective other equivalent measures to minimize equipment or barricades to guard the possibility that conductors and ca- against any remaining hazardous po- bles being installed or removed will tential differences. contact energized power lines or equip- ment. NOTE: Appendix C to this section contains information on hazardous step and touch po- (ii) The protective measures required tentials and on methods of protecting em- by paragraph (p)(4)(iii) of this section ployees from hazards resulting from such po- for mechanical equipment shall also be tentials. provided for conductors, cables, and pulling and tensioning equipment when (q) Overhead lines. This paragraph provides additional requirements for the conductor or cable is being in- work performed on or near overhead stalled or removed close enough to en- lines and equipment. ergized conductors that any of the fol- lowing failures could energize the pull- (1) General. (i) Before elevated struc- ing or tensioning equipment or the tures, such as poles or towers, are sub- jected to such stresses as climbing or wire or cable being installed or re- the installation or removal of equip- moved: ment may impose, the employer shall (A) Failure of the pulling or ten- ascertain that the structures are capa- sioning equipment, ble of sustaining the additional or un- (B) Failure of the wire or cable being balanced stresses. If the pole or other pulled, or structure cannot withstand the loads (C) Failure of the previously in- which will be imposed, it shall be stalled lines or equipment. braced or otherwise supported so as to (iii) If the conductors being installed prevent failure. or removed cross over energized con- ductors in excess of 600 volts and if the NOTE: Appendix D to this section contains design of the circuit-interrupting de- test methods that can be used in ascertaining whether a wood pole is capable vices protecting the lines so permits, of sustaining the forces that would be im- the automatic-reclosing feature of posed by an employee climbing the pole. these devices shall be made inoper- This paragraph also requires the employer to ative. ascertain that the pole can sustain all other (iv) Before lines are installed parallel forces that will be imposed by the work to be to existing energized lines, the em- performed. ployer shall make a determination of (ii) When poles are set, moved, or re- the approximate voltage to be induced moved near exposed energized overhead in the new lines, or work shall proceed conductors, the pole may not contact on the assumption that the induced the conductors. voltage is hazardous. Unless the em- (iii) When a pole is set, moved, or re- ployer can demonstrate that the lines moved near an exposed energized over- being installed are not subject to the head conductor, the employer shall en- induction of a hazardous voltage or un- sure that each employee wears elec- less the lines are treated as energized, trical protective equipment or uses in- the following requirements also apply: sulated devices when handling the pole (A) Each bare conductor shall be and that no employee contacts the pole grounded in increments so that no with uninsulated parts of his or her point along the conductor is more than body. 2 miles (3.22 km) from a ground. (iv) To protect employees from fall- (B) The grounds required in para- ing into holes into which poles are to graph (q)(2)(iv)(A) of this section shall be placed, the holes shall be attended be left in place until the conductor in- by employees or physically guarded stallation is completed between dead whenever anyone is working nearby. ends. (2) Installing and removing overhead (C) The grounds required in para- lines. The following provisions apply to graph (q)(2)(iv)(A) of this section shall the installation and removal of over- be removed as the last phase of aerial head conductors or cable. cleanup.

783

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00793 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

(D) If employees are working on bare (ii) Before any employee uses the conductors, grounds shall also be in- live-line bare-hand technique on ener- stalled at each location where these gized high-voltage conductors or parts, employees are working, and grounds the following information shall be shall be installed at all open dead-end ascertained: or catch-off points or the next adjacent (A) The nominal voltage rating of the structure. circuit on which the work is to be per- (E) If two bare conductors are to be formed, spliced, the conductors shall be bonded (B) The minimum approach distances and grounded before being spliced. to ground of lines and other energized (v) Reel handling equipment, includ- parts on which work is to be per- ing pulling and tensioning devices, formed, and shall be in safe operating condition and (C) The voltage limitations of equip- shall be leveled and aligned. ment to be used. (vi) Load ratings of stringing lines, (iii) The insulated equipment, insu- pulling lines, conductor grips, load- lated tools, and aerial devices and plat- bearing hardware and accessories, rig- forms used shall be designed, tested, ging, and hoists may not be exceeded. and intended for live-line bare-hand (vii) Pulling lines and accessories work. Tools and equipment shall be shall be repaired or replaced when de- kept clean and dry while they are in fective. use. (iv) The automatic-reclosing feature (viii) Conductor grips may not be of circuit-interrupting devices pro- used on wire rope, unless the grip is tecting the lines shall be made inoper- specifically designed for this applica- ative, if the design of the devices per- tion. mits. (ix) Reliable communications, (v) Work may not be performed when through two-way radios or other equiv- adverse weather conditions would alent means, shall be maintained be- make the work hazardous even after tween the reel tender and the pulling the work practices required by this sec- rig operator. tion are employed. Additionally, work (x) The pulling rig may only be oper- may not be performed when winds re- ated when it is safe to do so. duce the phase-to-phase or phase-to- NOTE: Examples of unsafe conditions in- ground minimum approach distances at clude employees in locations prohibited by the work location below that specified paragraph (q)(2)(xi) of this section, con- in paragraph (q)(3)(xiii) of this section, ductor and pulling line hang-ups, and slip- unless the grounded objects and other ping of the conductor grip. lines and equipment are covered by in- (xi) While the conductor or pulling sulating guards. line is being pulled (in motion) with a NOTE: Thunderstorms in the immediate vi- power-driven device, employees are not cinity, high winds, snow storms, and ice permitted directly under overhead op- storms are examples of adverse weather con- erations or on the cross arm, except as ditions that are presumed to make live-line necessary to guide the stringing sock bare-hand work too hazardous to perform or board over or through the stringing safely. sheave. (vi) A conductive bucket liner or (3) Live-line bare-hand work. In addi- other conductive device shall be pro- tion to other applicable provisions con- vided for bonding the insulated aerial tained in this section, the following re- device to the energized line or equip- quirements apply to live-line bare-hand ment. work: (A) The employee shall be connected (i) Before using or supervising the to the bucket liner or other conductive use of the live-line bare-hand technique device by the use of conductive shoes, on energized circuits, employees shall leg clips, or other means. be trained in the technique and in the (B) Where differences in potentials at safety requirements of paragraph (q)(3) the worksite pose a hazard to employ- of this section. Employees shall receive ees, electrostatic shielding designed for refresher training as required by para- the voltage being worked shall be pro- graph (a)(2) of this section. vided.

784

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00794 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

(vii) Before the employee contacts equipment are covered by insulating the energized part, the conductive guards. bucket liner or other conductive device (xiv) While an employee is approach- shall be bonded to the energized con- ing, leaving, or bonding to an energized ductor by means of a positive connec- circuit, the minimum approach dis- tion. This connection shall remain at- tances in Table R–6 through Table R–10 tached to the energized conductor until shall be maintained between the em- the work on the energized circuit is ployee and any grounded parts, includ- completed. ing the lower boom and portions of the (viii) Aerial lifts to be used for live- truck. line bare-hand work shall have dual (xv) While the bucket is positioned controls (lower and upper) as follows: alongside an energized bushing or insu- (A) The upper controls shall be with- lator string, the phase-to-ground min- in easy reach of the employee in the imum approach distances of Table R–6 bucket. On a two-bucket-type lift, ac- through Table R–10 shall be maintained cess to the controls shall be within between all parts of the bucket and the easy reach from either bucket. grounded end of the bushing or insu- (B) The lower set of controls shall be lator string or any other grounded sur- located near the base of the boom, and face. they shall be so designed that they can (xvi) Hand lines may not be used be- tween the bucket and the boom or be- override operation of the equipment at tween the bucket and the ground. How- any time. ever, non-conductive-type hand lines (ix) Lower (ground-level) lift controls may be used from conductor to ground may not be operated with an employee if not supported from the bucket. in the lift, except in case of emergency. Ropes used for live-line bare-hand work (x) Before employees are elevated may not be used for other purposes. into the work position, all controls (xvii) Uninsulated equipment or ma- (ground level and bucket) shall be terial may not be passed between a checked to determine that they are in pole or structure and an aerial lift proper working condition. while an employee working from the (xi) Before the boom of an aerial lift bucket is bonded to an energized part. is elevated, the body of the truck shall (xviii) A minimum approach distance be grounded, or the body of the truck table reflecting the minimum approach shall be barricaded and treated as ener- distances listed in Table R–6 through gized. Table R–10 shall be printed on a plate (xii) A boom-current test shall be of durable non-conductive material. made before work is started each day, This table shall be mounted so as to be each time during the day when higher visible to the operator of the boom. voltage is encountered, and when (xix) A non-conductive measuring de- changed conditions indicate a need for vice shall be readily accessible to as- an additional test. This test shall con- sist employees in maintaining the re- sist of placing the bucket in contact quired minimum approach distance. with an energized source equal to the (4) Towers and structures. The fol- voltage to be encountered for a min- lowing requirements apply to work per- imum of 3 minutes. The leakage cur- formed on towers or other structures rent may not exceed 1 microampere per which support overhead lines. kilovolt of nominal phase-to-ground (i) The employer shall ensure that no voltage. Work from the aerial lift shall employee is under a tower or structure be immediately suspended upon indica- while work is in progress, except where tion of a malfunction in the equipment. the employer can demonstrate that (xiii) The minimum approach dis- such a working position is necessary to tances specified in Table R–6 through assist employees working above. Table R–10 shall be maintained from all (ii) Tag lines or other similar devices grounded objects and from lines and shall be used to maintain control of equipment at a potential different from tower sections being raised or posi- that to which the live-line bare-hand tioned, unless the employer can dem- equipment is bonded, unless such onstrate that the use of such devices grounded objects and other lines and would create a greater hazard.

785

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00795 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

(iii) The loadline may not be de- through the use of insulating equip- tached from a member or section until ment. the load is safely secured. NOTE: A tool constructed of a material (iv) Except during emergency res- that the employer can demonstrate has insu- toration procedures, work shall be dis- lating qualities meeting paragraph (j)(1) of continued when adverse weather condi- this section is considered as insulated under tions would make the work hazardous this paragraph if the tool is clean and dry. in spite of the work practices required by this section. (v) Ladders, platforms, and aerial de- vices may not be brought closer to an NOTE: Thunderstorms in the immediate vi- energized part than the distances listed cinity, high winds, snow storms, and ice in Table R–6, Table R–9, and Table R– storms are examples of adverse weather con- 10. ditions that are presumed to make this work too hazardous to perform, except under (vi) Line-clearance tree-trimming emergency conditions. work may not be performed when ad- verse weather conditions make the (r) Line-clearance tree trimming oper- work hazardous in spite of the work ations. This paragraph provides addi- practices required by this section. Each tional requirements for line-clearance employee performing line-clearance tree-trimming operations and for tree trimming work in the aftermath equipment used in these operations. of a storm or under similar emergency (1) Electrical hazards. This paragraph conditions shall be trained in the spe- does not apply to qualified employees. cial hazards related to this type of (i) Before an employee climbs, enters, work. or works around any tree, a determina- tion shall be made of the nominal volt- NOTE: Thunderstorms in the immediate vi- age of electric power lines posing a haz- cinity, high winds, snow storms, and ice ard to employees. However, a deter- storms are examples of adverse weather con- ditions that are presumed to make line- mination of the maximum nominal clearance tree trimming work too hazardous voltage to which an employee will be to perform safely. exposed may be made instead, if all lines are considered as energized at (2) Brush chippers. (i) Brush chippers this maximum voltage. shall be equipped with a locking device (ii) There shall be a second line-clear- in the ignition system. ance tree trimmer within normal (that (ii) Access panels for maintenance is, unassisted) voice communication and adjustment of the chipper blades under any of the following conditions: and associated drive train shall be in (A) If a line-clearance tree trimmer place and secure during operation of is to approach more closely than 10 feet the equipment. (305 cm) any conductor or electric ap- (iii) Brush chippers not equipped with paratus energized at more than 750 a mechanical infeed system shall be volts or equipped with an infeed hopper of (B) If branches or limbs being re- length sufficient to prevent employees moved are closer to lines energized at from contacting the blades or knives of more than 750 volts than the distances the machine during operation. listed in Table R–6, Table R–9, and (iv) Trailer chippers detached from Table R–10 or trucks shall be chocked or otherwise (C) If roping is necessary to remove secured. branches or limbs from such conduc- (v) Each employee in the immediate tors or apparatus. area of an operating chipper feed table (iii) Line-clearance tree trimmers shall wear personal protective equip- shall maintain the minimum approach ment as required by subpart I of this distances from energized conductors part. given in Table R–6, Table R–9, and (3) Sprayers and related equipment. (i) Table R–10. Walking and working surfaces of spray- (iv) Branches that are contacting ex- ers and related equipment shall be cov- posed energized conductors or equip- ered with slip-resistant material. If ment or that are within the distances slipping hazards cannot be eliminated, specified in Table R–6, Table R–9, and slip-resistant footwear or handrails and Table R–10 may be removed only stair rails meeting the requirements of

786

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00796 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

subpart D may be used instead of slip- 10 feet (305 cm) of the cutting head of a resistant material. brush saw. (ii) Equipment on which employees (ii) A backpack power unit shall be stand to spray while the vehicle is in equipped with a quick shutoff switch motion shall be equipped with guard- readily accessible to the operator. rails around the working area. The (iii) Backpack power unit engines guardrail shall be constructed in ac- shall be stopped for all cleaning, refuel- cordance with subpart D of this part. ing, adjustments, and repairs to the (4) Stump cutters. (i) Stump cutters saw or motor, except as the manufac- shall be equipped with enclosures or turer’s servicing procedures require guards to protect employees. otherwise. (ii) Each employee in the immediate (7) Rope. (i) Climbing ropes shall be area of stump grinding operations (in- used by employees working aloft in cluding the stump cutter operator) trees. These ropes shall have a min- shall wear personal protective equip- imum diameter of 0.5 inch (1.2 cm) with ment as required by subpart I of this a minimum breaking strength of 2300 part. pounds (10.2 kN). Synthetic rope shall (5) Gasoline-engine power saws. Gaso- have elasticity of not more than 7 per- line-engine power saw operations shall cent. meet the requirements of § 1910.266(e) (ii) Rope shall be inspected before and the following: each use and, if unsafe (for example, (i) Each power saw weighing more because of damage or defect), may not than 15 pounds (6.8 kilograms, service be used. weight) that is used in trees shall be (iii) Rope shall be stored away from supported by a separate line, except cutting edges and sharp tools. Rope when work is performed from an aerial contact with corrosive chemicals, gas, lift and except during topping or re- and oil shall be avoided. moving operations where no supporting (iv) When stored, rope shall be coiled limb will be available. and piled, or shall be suspended, so (ii) Each power saw shall be equipped that air can circulate through the with a control that will return the saw coils. to idling speed when released. (v) Rope ends shall be secured to pre- (iii) Each power saw shall be vent their unraveling. equipped with a clutch and shall be so (vi) Climbing rope may not be spliced adjusted that the clutch will not en- to effect repair. gage the chain drive at idling speed. (vii) A rope that is wet, that is con- (iv) A power saw shall be started on taminated to the extent that its insu- the ground or where it is otherwise lating capacity is impaired, or that is firmly supported. Drop starting of saws otherwise not considered to be insu- over 15 pounds (6.8 kg) is permitted lated for the voltage involved may not outside of the bucket of an aerial lift be used near exposed energized lines. only if the area below the lift is clear (8) Fall protection. Each employee of personnel. shall be tied in with a climbing rope (v) A power saw engine may be start- and safety saddle when the employee is ed and operated only when all employ- working above the ground in a tree, un- ees other than the operator are clear of less he or she is ascending into the the saw. tree. (vi) A power saw may not be running (s) Communication facilities—(1) Micro- when the saw is being carried up into a wave transmission. (i) The employer tree by an employee. shall ensure that no employee looks (vii) Power saw engines shall be into an open waveguide or antenna stopped for all cleaning, refueling, ad- that is connected to an energized justments, and repairs to the saw or microwave source. motor, except as the manufacturer’s (ii) If the electromagnetic radiation servicing procedures require otherwise. level within an accessible area associ- (6) Backpack power units for use in ated with microwave communications pruning and clearing. (i) While a back- systems exceeds the radiation protec- pack power unit is running, no one tion guide given in § 1910.97(a)(2) of this other than the operator may be within part, the area shall be posted with the

787

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00797 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

warning symbol described in hole to provide assistance, other than § 1910.97(a)(3) of this part. The lower emergency. half of the warning symbol shall in- NOTE 1: An attendant may also be required clude the following statements or ones under paragraph (e)(7) of this section. One that the employer can demonstrate are person may serve to fulfill both require- equivalent: ments. However, attendants required under paragraph (e)(7) of this section are not per- Radiation in this area may exceed hazard mitted to enter the manhole. limitations and special precautions are re- NOTE 2: Employees entering manholes con- quired. Obtain specific instruction before en- taining unguarded, uninsulated energized tering. lines or parts of electric equipment oper- (iii) When an employee works in an ating at 50 volts or more are required to be qualified under paragraph (l)(1) of this sec- area where the electromagnetic radi- tion. ation could exceed the radiation pro- tection guide, the employer shall insti- (iii) For the purpose of inspection, tute measures that ensure that the em- housekeeping, taking readings, or simi- ployee’s exposure is not greater than lar work, an employee working alone that permitted by that guide. Such may enter, for brief periods of time, a measures may include administrative manhole where energized cables or and engineering controls and personal equipment are in service, if the em- protective equipment. ployer can demonstrate that the em- (2) Power line carrier. Power line car- ployee will be protected from all elec- rier work, including work on equip- trical hazards. ment used for coupling carrier current (iv) Reliable communications, to power line conductors, shall be per- through two-way radios or other equiv- formed in accordance with the require- alent means, shall be maintained ments of this section pertaining to among all employees involved in the work on energized lines. job. (4) Duct rods. If duct rods are used, (t) Underground electrical installations. they shall be installed in the direction This paragraph provides additional re- presenting the least hazard to employ- quirements for work on underground ees. An employee shall be stationed at electrical installations. the far end of the duct line being (1) Access. A ladder or other climbing rodded to ensure that the required min- device shall be used to enter and exit a imum approach distances are main- manhole or subsurface vault exceeding tained. 4 feet (122 cm) in depth. No employee (5) Multiple cables. When multiple ca- may climb into or out of a manhole or bles are present in a work area, the vault by stepping on cables or hangers. cable to be worked shall be identified (2) Lowering equipment into manholes. by electrical means, unless its identity Equipment used to lower materials and is obvious by reason of distinctive ap- tools into manholes or vaults shall be pearance or location or by other read- capable of supporting the weight to be ily apparent means of identification. lowered and shall be checked for de- Cables other than the one being worked fects before use. Before tools or mate- shall be protected from damage. rial are lowered into the opening for a (6) Moving cables. Energized cables manhole or vault, each employee work- that are to be moved shall be inspected ing in the manhole or vault shall be for defects. clear of the area directly under the (7) Defective cables. Where a cable in a opening. manhole has one or more abnormalities (3) Attendants for manholes. (i) While that could lead to or be an indication work is being performed in a manhole of an impending fault, the defective containing energized electric equip- cable shall be deenergized before any ment, an employee with first aid and employee may work in the manhole, CPR training meeting paragraph (b)(1) except when service load conditions of this section shall be available on the and a lack of feasible alternatives re- surface in the immediate vicinity to quire that the cable remain energized. render emergency assistance. In that case, employees may enter the (ii) Occasionally, the employee on manhole provided they are protected the surface may briefly enter a man- from the possible effects of a failure by

788

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00798 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

shields or other devices that are capa- grounded. When a substation fence is ble of containing the adverse effects of expanded or a section is removed, fence a fault in the joint. grounding continuity shall be main- tained, and bonding shall be used to NOTE: Abnormalities such as oil or com- pound leaking from cable or joints, broken prevent electrical discontinuity. cable sheaths or joint sleeves, hot localized (4) Guarding of rooms containing elec- surface temperatures of cables or joints, or tric supply equipment. (i) Rooms and joints that are swollen beyond normal toler- spaces in which electric supply lines or ance are presumed to lead to or be an indica- equipment are installed shall meet the tion of an impending fault. requirements of paragraphs (u)(4)(ii) (8) Sheath continuity. When work is through (u)(4)(v) of this section under performed on buried cable or on cable the following conditions: in manholes, metallic sheath con- (A) If exposed live parts operating at tinuity shall be maintained or the 50 to 150 volts to ground are located cable sheath shall be treated as ener- within 8 feet of the ground or other gized. working surface inside the room or (u) Substations. This paragraph pro- space, vides additional requirements for sub- (B) If live parts operating at 151 to stations and for work performed in 600 volts and located within 8 feet of them. the ground or other working surface in- (1) Access and working space. Suffi- side the room or space are guarded cient access and working space shall be only by location, as permitted under provided and maintained about electric paragraph (u)(5)(i) of this section, or equipment to permit ready and safe op- (C) If live parts operating at more eration and maintenance of such equip- than 600 volts are located within the ment. room or space, unless: (1) The live parts are enclosed within NOTE: Guidelines for the dimensions of ac- cess and working space about electric equip- grounded, metal-enclosed equipment ment in substations are contained in Amer- whose only openings are designed so ican National Standard—National Electrical that foreign objects inserted in these Safety Code, ANSI C2–1987. Installations openings will be deflected from ener- meeting the ANSI provisions comply with gized parts, or paragraph (u)(1) of this section. An installa- (2) The live parts are installed at a tion that does not conform to this ANSI height above ground and any other standard will, nonetheless, be considered as working surface that provides protec- complying with paragraph (u)(1) of this sec- tion if the employer can demonstrate that tion at the voltage to which they are the installation provides ready and safe ac- energized corresponding to the protec- cess based on the following evidence: tion provided by an 8-foot height at 50 (1) That the installation conforms to the volts. edition of ANSI C2 that was in effect at the (ii) The rooms and spaces shall be so time the installation was made, enclosed within fences, screens, parti- (2) That the configuration of the installa- tions, or walls as to minimize the pos- tion enables employees to maintain the min- imum approach distances required by para- sibility that unqualified persons will graph (l)(2) of this section while they are enter. working on exposed, energized parts, and (iii) Signs warning unqualified per- (3) That the precautions taken when work sons to keep out shall be displayed at is performed on the installation provide pro- entrances to the rooms and spaces. tection equivalent to the protection that (iv) Entrances to rooms and spaces would be provided by access and working that are not under the observation of space meeting ANSI C2–1987. an attendant shall be kept locked. (2) Draw-out-type circuit breakers. (v) Unqualified persons may not When draw-out-type circuit breakers enter the rooms or spaces while the are removed or inserted, the breaker electric supply lines or equipment are shall be in the open position. The con- energized. trol circuit shall also be rendered inop- (5) Guarding of energized parts. (i) erative, if the design of the equipment Guards shall be provided around all permits. live parts operating at more than 150 (3) Substation fences. Conductive volts to ground without an insulating fences around substations shall be covering, unless the location of the live

789

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00799 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

parts gives sufficient horizontal or related work practices for power gener- vertical or a combination of these ating plants. clearances to minimize the possibility (1) Interlocks and other safety devices. of accidental employee contact. (i) Interlocks and other safety devices shall be maintained in a safe, operable NOTE: Guidelines for the dimensions of clearance distances about electric equipment condition. in substations are contained in American (ii) No interlock or other safety de- National Standard—National Electrical vice may be modified to defeat its func- Safety Code, ANSI C2–1987. Installations tion, except for test, repair, or adjust- meeting the ANSI provisions comply with ment of the device. paragraph (u)(5)(i) of this section. An instal- (2) Changing brushes. Before exciter lation that does not conform to this ANSI standard will, nonetheless, be considered as or generator brushes are changed while complying with paragraph (u)(5)(i) of this the generator is in service, the exciter section if the employer can demonstrate that or generator field shall be checked to the installation provides sufficient clearance determine whether a ground condition based on the following evidence: exists. The brushes may not be changed (1) That the installation conforms to the while the generator is energized if a edition of ANSI C2 that was in effect at the ground condition exists. time the installation was made, (3) Access and working space. Suffi- (2) That each employee is isolated from en- cient access and working space shall be ergized parts at the point of closest ap- proach, and provided and maintained about electric (3) That the precautions taken when work equipment to permit ready and safe op- is performed on the installation provide pro- eration and maintenance of such equip- tection equivalent to the protection that ment. would be provided by horizontal and vertical clearances meeting ANSI C2–1987. NOTE: Guidelines for the dimensions of ac- cess and working space about electric equip- (ii) Except for fuse replacement and ment in generating stations are contained in other necessary access by qualified per- American National Standard—National Elec- sons, the guarding of energized parts trical Safety Code, ANSI C2–1987. Installa- within a compartment shall be main- tions meeting the ANSI provisions comply with paragraph (v)(3) of this section. An in- tained during operation and mainte- stallation that does not conform to this nance functions to prevent accidental ANSI standard will, nonetheless, be consid- contact with energized parts and to ered as complying with paragraph (v)(3) of prevent tools or other equipment from this section if the employer can demonstrate being dropped on energized parts. that the installation provides ready and safe (iii) When guards are removed from access based on the following evidence: energized equipment, barriers shall be (1) That the installation conforms to the installed around the work area to pre- edition of ANSI C2 that was in effect at the time the installation was made, vent employees who are not working (2) That the configuration of the installa- on the equipment, but who are in the tion enables employees to maintain the min- area, from contacting the exposed live imum approach distances required by para- parts. graph (l)(2) of this section while they are (6) Substation entry. (i) Upon entering working on exposed, energized parts, and an attended substation, each employee (3) That the precautions taken when are other than those regularly working in working is performed on the installation pro- the station shall report his or her pres- vide protection equivalent to the protection ence to the employee in charge in order that would be provided by access and work- ing space meeting ANSI C2–1987. to receive information on special sys- tem conditions affecting employee (4) Guarding of rooms containing elec- safety. tric supply equipment. (i) Rooms and (ii) The job briefing required by para- spaces in which electric supply lines or graph (c) of this section shall cover equipment are installed shall meet the such additional subjects as the location requirements of paragraphs (v)(4)(ii) of energized equipment in or adjacent through (v)(4)(v) of this section under to the work area and the limits of any the following conditions: deenergized work area. (A) If exposed live parts operating at (v) Power generation. This paragraph 50 to 150 volts to ground are located provides additional requirements and within 8 feet of the ground or other

790

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00800 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

working surface inside the room or that the installation provides sufficient space, clearance based on the following evidence: (B) If live parts operating at 151 to (1) That the installation conforms to the 600 volts and located within 8 feet of edition of ANSI C2 that was in effect at the time the installation was made, the ground or other working surface in- (2) That each employee is isolated from en- side the room or space are guarded ergized parts at the point of closest ap- only by location, as permitted under proach, and paragraph (v)(5)(i) of this section, or (3) That the precautions taken when work (C) If live parts operating at more is performed on the installation provide pro- than 600 volts are located within the tection equivalent to the protection that room or space, unless: would be provided by horizontal and vertical (1) The live parts are enclosed within clearances meeting ANSI C2–1987. grounded, metal-enclosed equipment (ii) Except for fuse replacement or whose only openings are designed so other necessary access by qualified per- that foreign objects inserted in these sons, the guarding of energized parts openings will be deflected from ener- within a compartment shall be main- gized parts, or tained during operation and mainte- (2) The live parts are installed at a nance functions to prevent accidental height above ground and any other contact with energized parts and to working surface that provides protec- prevent tools or other equipment from tion at the voltage to which they are being dropped on energized parts. energized corresponding to the protec- (iii) When guards are removed from tion provided by an 8-foot height at 50 energized equipment, barriers shall be volts. installed around the work area to pre- (ii) The rooms and spaces shall be so vent employees who are not working enclosed within fences, screens, parti- on the equipment, but who are in the tions, or walls as to minimize the pos- area, from contacting the exposed live sibility that unqualified persons will parts. enter. (6) Water or steam spaces. The fol- (iii) Signs warning unqualified per- lowing requirements apply to work in sons to keep out shall be displayed at water and steam spaces associated with entrances to the rooms and spaces. boilers: (iv) Entrances to rooms and spaces (i) A designated employee shall in- that are not under the observation of spect conditions before work is per- an attendant shall be kept locked. mitted and after its completion. Eye (v) Unqualified persons may not protection, or full face protection if enter the rooms or spaces while the necessary, shall be worn at all times electric supply lines or equipment are when condenser, heater, or boiler tubes energized. are being cleaned. (5) Guarding of energized parts. (i) (ii) Where it is necessary for employ- Guards shall be provided around all ees to work near tube ends during live parts operating at more than 150 cleaning, shielding shall be installed at volts to ground without an insulating the tube ends. covering, unless the location of the live (7) Chemical cleaning of boilers and parts gives sufficient horizontal or pressure vessels. The following require- vertical or a combination of these ments apply to chemical cleaning of clearances to minimize the possibility boilers and pressure vessels: of accidental employee contact. (i) Areas where chemical cleaning is NOTE: Guidelines for the dimensions of in progress shall be cordoned off to re- clearance distances about electric equipment strict access during cleaning. If flam- in generating stations are contained in mable liquids, gases, or vapors or com- American National Standard—National Elec- bustible materials will be used or trical Safety Code, ANSI C2–1987. Installa- might be produced during the cleaning tions meeting the ANSI provisions comply process, the following requirements with paragraph (v)(5)(i) of this section. An also apply: installation that does not conform to this ANSI standard will, nonetheless, be consid- (A) The area shall be posted with ered as complying with paragraph (v)(5)(i) of signs restricting entry and warning of this section if the employer can demonstrate the hazards of fire and explosion; and

791

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00801 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

(B) Smoking, welding, and other pos- (10) Turbine generators. (i) Smoking sible ignition sources are prohibited in and other ignition sources are prohib- these restricted areas. ited near hydrogen or hydrogen sealing (ii) The number of personnel in the systems, and signs warning of the dan- restricted area shall be limited to ger of explosion and fire shall be post- those necessary to accomplish the task ed. safely. (ii) Excessive hydrogen makeup or (iii) There shall be ready access to abnormal loss of pressure shall be con- water or showers for emergency use. sidered as an emergency and shall be NOTE: See § 1910.141 of this part for require- corrected immediately. ments that apply to the water supply and to (iii) A sufficient quantity of inert gas washing facilities. shall be available to purge the hydro- gen from the largest generator. (iv) Employees in restricted areas (11) Coal and ash handling. (i) Only shall wear protective equipment meet- designated persons may operate rail- ing the requirements of subpart I of road equipment. this part and including, but not limited (ii) Before a locomotive or loco- to, protective clothing, boots, goggles, motive crane is moved, a warning shall and gloves. be given to employees in the area. (8) Chlorine systems. (i) Chlorine sys- (iii) Employees engaged in switching tem enclosures shall be posted with or dumping cars may not use their feet signs restricting entry and warning of to line up drawheads. the hazard to health and the hazards of (iv) Drawheads and knuckles may not fire and explosion. be shifted while locomotives or cars NOTE: See subpart Z of this part for re- are in motion. quirements necessary to protect the health (v) When a railroad car is stopped for of employees from the effects of chlorine. unloading, the car shall be secured (ii) Only designated employees may from displacement that could endanger enter the restricted area. Additionally, employees. the number of personnel shall be lim- (vi) An emergency means of stopping ited to those necessary to accomplish dump operations shall be provided at the task safely. railcar dumps. (iii) Emergency repair kits shall be (vii) The employer shall ensure that available near the shelter or enclosure employees who work in coal- or ash- to allow for the prompt repair of leaks handling conveyor areas are trained in chlorine lines, equipment, or con- and knowledgeable in conveyor oper- tainers. ation and in the requirements of para- (iv) Before repair procedures are graphs (v)(11)(viii) through (v)(11)(xii) started, chlorine tanks, pipes, and of this section. equipment shall be purged with dry air (viii) Employees may not ride a coal- and isolated from other sources of chlo- or ash-handling conveyor belt at any rine. time. Employees may not cross over (v) The employer shall ensure that the conveyor belt, except at walkways, chlorine is not mixed with materials unless the conveyor’s energy source that would react with the chlorine in a has been deenergized and has been dangerously exothermic or other haz- locked out or tagged in accordance ardous manner. with paragraph (d) of this section. (9) Boilers. (i) Before internal furnace (ix) What could cause injury when or ash hopper repair work is started, started may not be started until per- overhead areas shall be inspected for sonnel in the area are alerted by a sig- possible falling objects. If the hazard of nal or by a designated person that the falling objects exists, overhead protec- conveyor is about to start. tion such as planking or nets shall be (x) If a conveyor that could cause in- provided. jury when started is automatically (ii) When opening an operating boiler controlled or is controlled from a re- door, employees shall stand clear of the mote location, an audible device shall opening of the door to avoid the heat be provided that sounds an alarm that blast and gases which may escape from will be recognized by each employee as the boiler. a warning that the conveyor will start

792

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00802 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

and that can be clearly heard at all (C) Emergency stop devices shall be points along the conveyor where per- installed so that they cannot be over- sonnel may be present. The warning de- ridden from other locations. vice shall be actuated by the device (xii) Where coal-handling operations starting the conveyor and shall con- may produce a combustible atmosphere tinue for a period of time before the from fuel sources or from flammable conveyor starts that is long enough to gases or dust, sources of ignition shall allow employees to move clear of the be eliminated or safely controlled to conveyor system. A visual warning prevent ignition of the combustible at- may be used in place of the audible de- mosphere.

vice if the employer can demonstrate NOTE: Locations that are hazardous be- that it will provide an equally effective cause of the presence of combustible dust are warning in the particular cir- classified as Class II hazardous locations. cumstances involved. See § 1910.307 of this part. Exception: If the employer can dem- (xiii) An employee may not work on onstrate that the system’s function or beneath overhanging coal in coal would be seriously hindered by the re- bunkers, coal silos, or coal storage quired time delay, warning signs may areas, unless the employee is protected be provided in place of the audible from all hazards posed by shifting coal. warning device. If the system was in- (xiv) An employee entering a bunker stalled before January 31, 1995, warning or silo to dislodge the contents shall signs may be provided in place of the wear a body harness with lifeline at- audible warning device until such time tached. The lifeline shall be secured to as the conveyor or its control system is a fixed support outside the bunker and rebuilt or rewired. These warning signs shall be attended at all times by an shall be clear, concise, and legible and employee located outside the bunker or shall indicate that conveyors and allied facility. equipment may be started at any time, (12) Hydroplants and equipment. Em- that danger exists, and that personnel ployees working on or close to water must keep clear. These warning signs gates, valves, intakes, forebays, flumes, or other locations where in- shall be provided along the conveyor at creased or decreased water flow or lev- areas not guarded by position or loca- els may pose a significant hazard shall tion. be warned and shall vacate such dan- (xi) Remotely and automatically con- gerous areas before water flow changes trolled conveyors, and conveyors that are made. have operating stations which are not (w) Special conditions—(1) Capacitors. manned or which are beyond voice and The following additional requirements visual contact from drive areas, load- apply to work on capacitors and on ing areas, transfer points, and other lo- lines connected to capacitors. cations on the conveyor path not NOTE: See paragraphs (m) and (n) of this guarded by location, position, or section for requirements pertaining to the guards shall be furnished with emer- deenergizing and grounding of capacitor in- gency stop buttons, pull cords, limit stallations. switches, or similar emergency stop de- (i) Before employees work on capaci- vices. However, if the employer can tors, the capacitors shall be discon- demonstrate that the design, function, nected from energized sources and, and operation of the conveyor do not after a wait of at least 5 minutes from expose an employee to hazards, an the time of disconnection, short- emergency stop device is not required. circuited. (A) Emergency stop devices shall be (ii) Before the units are handled, each easily identifiable in the immediate vi- unit in series-parallel capacitor banks cinity of such locations. shall be short-circuited between all (B) An emergency stop device shall terminals and the capacitor case or its act directly on the control of the con- rack. If the cases of capacitors are on veyor involved and may not depend on ungrounded substation racks, the racks the stopping of any other equipment. shall be bonded to ground.

793

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00803 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

(iii) Any line to which capacitors are (iii) Where additional employee pro- connected shall be short-circuited be- tection is necessary, barricades shall fore it is considered deenergized. be used. (2) Current transformer secondaries. (iv) Excavated areas shall be pro- The secondary of a current transformer tected with barricades. may not be opened while the trans- (v) At night, warning lights shall be former is energized. If the primary of prominently displayed. the current transformer cannot be de- (7) Backfeed. If there is a possibility energized before work is performed on of voltage backfeed from sources of co- an instrument, a relay, or other sec- generation or from the secondary sys- tion of a current transformer sec- tem (for example, backfeed from more ondary circuit, the circuit shall be than one energized phase feeding a bridged so that the current trans- common load), the requirements of former secondary will not be opened. paragraph (l) of this section apply if (3) Series streetlighting. (i) If the open- the lines or equipment are to be circuit voltage exceeds 600 volts, the worked as energized, and the require- series streetlighting circuit shall be ments of paragraphs (m) and (n) of this worked in accordance with paragraph section apply if the lines or equipment (q) or (t) of this section, as appropriate. are to be worked as deenergized. (ii) A series loop may only be opened (8) Lasers. Laser equipment shall be after the streetlighting transformer installed, adjusted, and operated in ac- has been deenergized and isolated from cordance with § 1926.54 of this chapter. the source of supply or after the loop is (9) Hydraulic fluids. Hydraulic fluids bridged to avoid an open-circuit condi- used for the insulated sections of tion. equipment shall provide insulation for (4) Illumination. Sufficient illumina- the voltage involved. tion shall be provided to enable the em- ployee to perform the work safely. (x) Definitions. (5) Protection against drowning. (i) Affected employee. An employee whose Whenever an employee may be pulled job requires him or her to operate or or pushed or may fall into water where use a machine or equipment on which the danger of drowning exists, the em- servicing or maintenance is being per- ployee shall be provided with and shall formed under lockout or tagout, or use U.S. Coast Guard approved per- whose job requires him or her to work sonal flotation devices. in an area in which such servicing or (ii) Each personal flotation device maintenance is being performed. shall be maintained in safe condition Attendant. An employee assigned to and shall be inspected frequently remain immediately outside the en- enough to ensure that it does not have trance to an enclosed or other space to rot, mildew, water saturation, or any render assistance as needed to employ- other condition that could render the ees inside the space. device unsuitable for use. Authorized employee. An employee (iii) An employee may cross streams who locks out or tags out machines or or other bodies of water only if a safe equipment in order to perform serv- means of passage, such as a bridge, is icing or maintenance on that machine provided. or equipment. An affected employee be- (6) Employee protection in public work comes an authorized employee when areas. (i) Traffic control signs and traf- that employee’s duties include per- fic control devices used for the protec- forming servicing or maintenance cov- tion of employees shall meet the re- ered under this section. quirements of § 1926.200(g)(2) of this Automatic circuit recloser. A self-con- chapter. trolled device for interrupting and re- (ii) Before work is begun in the vicin- closing an alternating current circuit ity of vehicular or pedestrian traffic with a predetermined sequence of open- that may endanger employees, warning ing and reclosing followed by resetting, signs or flags and other traffic control hold-closed, or lockout operation. devices shall be placed in conspicuous Barricade. A physical obstruction locations to alert and channel ap- such as tapes, cones, or A-frame type proaching traffic. wood or metal structures intended to

794

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00804 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

provide a warning about and to limit Deenergized. Free from any electrical access to a hazardous area. connection to a source of potential dif- Barrier. A physical obstruction which ference and from electric charge; not is intended to prevent contact with en- having a potential different from that ergized lines or equipment or to pre- of the earth.

vent unauthorized access to a work NOTE: The term is used only with reference area. to current-carrying parts, which are some- Bond. The electrical interconnection times energized (alive). of conductive parts designed to main- Designated employee (designated per- tain a common electrical potential. son). An employee (or person) who is Bus. A conductor or a group of con- designated by the employer to perform ductors that serve as a common con- specific duties under the terms of this nection for two or more circuits. section and who is knowledgeable in Bushing. An insulating structure, in- the construction and operation of the cluding a through conductor or pro- equipment and the hazards involved. viding a passageway for such a con- Electric line truck. A truck used to ductor, with provision for mounting on transport personnel, tools, and mate- a barrier, conducting or otherwise, for rial for electric supply line work. the purposes of insulating the con- Electric supply equipment. Equipment ductor from the barrier and conducting that produces, modifies, regulates, con- current from one side of the barrier to trols, or safeguards a supply of electric the other. energy. Cable. A conductor with insulation, Electric supply lines. (See Lines, elec- or a stranded conductor with or with- tric supply.) out insulation and other coverings (sin- Electric utility. An organization re- gle-conductor cable), or a combination sponsible for the installation, oper- of conductors insulated from one an- ation, or maintenance of an electric other (multiple-conductor cable). supply system. Cable sheath. A conductive protective Enclosed space. A working space, such covering applied to cables. as a manhole, vault, tunnel, or shaft, NOTE: A cable sheath may consist of mul- that has a limited means of egress or tiple layers of which one or more is conduc- entry, that is designed for periodic em- tive. ployee entry under normal operating conditions, and that under normal con- Circuit. A conductor or system of con- ditions does not contain a hazardous ductors through which an electric cur- atmosphere, but that may contain a rent is intended to flow. hazardous atmosphere under abnormal Clearance (between objects). The clear conditions. distance between two objects measured surface to surface. NOTE: Spaces that are enclosed but not de- Clearance (for work). Authorization to signed for employee entry under normal op- perform specified work or permission erating conditions are not considered to be to enter a restricted area. enclosed spaces for the purposes of this sec- tion. Similarly, spaces that are enclosed and Communication lines. (See Lines, com- that are expected to contain a hazardous at- munication.) mosphere are not considered to be enclosed Conductor. A material, usually in the spaces for the purposes of this section. Such form of a wire, cable, or bus bar, used spaces meet the definition of permit spaces for carrying an electric current. in § 1910.146 of this part, and entry into them Covered conductor. A conductor cov- must be performed in accordance with that ered with a dielectric having no rated standard. insulating strength or having a rated Energized (alive, live). Electrically insulating strength less than the volt- connected to a source of potential dif- age of the circuit in which the con- ference, or electrically charged so as to ductor is used. have a potential significantly different Current-carrying part. A conducting from that of earth in the vicinity. part intended to be connected in an Energy isolating device. A physical de- electric circuit to a source of voltage. vice that prevents the transmission or Non-current-carrying parts are those release of energy, including, but not not intended to be so connected. limited to, the following: a manually

795

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00805 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

operated electric circuit breaker, a dis- (3) Atmospheric oxygen concentra- connect switch, a manually operated tion below 19.5 percent or above 23.5 switch, a slide gate, a slip blind, a line percent; valve, blocks, and any similar device (4) Atmospheric concentration of any with a visible indication of the position substance for which a dose or a permis- of the device. (Push buttons, selector sible exposure limit is published in switches, and other control-circuit- Subpart G, Occupational Health and En- type devices are not energy isolating vironmental Control, or in Subpart Z, devices.) Toxic and Hazardous Substances, of this Energy source. Any electrical, me- part and which could result in em- chanical, hydraulic, pneumatic, chem- ployee exposure in excess of its dose or ical, nuclear, thermal, or other energy permissible exposure limit; source that could cause injury to per- NOTE: An atmospheric concentration of sonnel. any substance that is not capable of causing Equipment (electric). A general term death, incapacitation, impairment of ability including material, fittings, devices, to self-rescue, injury, or acute illness due to appliances, fixtures, apparatus, and the its health effects is not covered by this pro- like used as part of or in connection vision. with an electrical installation. (5) Any other atmospheric condition Exposed. Not isolated or guarded. that is immediately dangerous to life Ground. A conducting connection, or health. whether intentional or accidental, be- NOTE: For air contaminants for which tween an electric circuit or equipment OSHA has not determined a dose or permis- and the earth, or to some conducting sible exposure limit, other sources of infor- body that serves in place of the earth. mation, such as Material Safety Data Sheets Grounded. Connected to earth or to that comply with the Hazard Communica- tion Standard, § 1910.1200 of this part, pub- some conducting body that serves in lished information, and internal documents place of the earth. can provide guidance in establishing accept- Guarded. Covered, fenced, enclosed, able atmospheric conditions. or otherwise protected, by means of High-power tests. Tests in which fault suitable covers or casings, barrier rails currents, load currents, magnetizing or screens, mats, or platforms, de- currents, and line-dropping currents signed to minimize the possibility, are used to test equipment, either at under normal conditions, of dangerous the equipment’s rated voltage or at approach or accidental contact by per- lower voltages. sons or objects. High-voltage tests. Tests in which NOTE: Wires which are insulated, but not voltages of approximately 1000 volts otherwise protected, are not considered as are used as a practical minimum and in guarded. which the voltage source has sufficient Hazardous atmosphere means an at- energy to cause injury. mosphere that may expose employees High wind. A wind of such velocity to the risk of death, incapacitation, that the following hazards would be impairment of ability to self-rescue present: (that is, escape unaided from an en- (1) An employee would be exposed to closed space), injury, or acute illness being blown from elevated locations, or from one or more of the following (2) An employee or material handling causes: equipment could lose control of mate- rial being handled, or (1) Flammable gas, vapor, or mist in (3) An employee would be exposed to excess of 10 percent of its lower flam- other hazards not controlled by the mable limit (LFL); standard involved. (2) Airborne combustible dust at a concentration that meets or exceeds its NOTE: Winds exceeding 40 miles per hour LFL; (64.4 kilometers per hour), or 30 miles per hour (48.3 kilometers per hour) if material NOTE: This concentration may be approxi- handling is involved, are normally consid- mated as a condition in which the dust ob- ered as meeting this criteria unless pre- scures vision at a distance of 5 feet (1.52 m) cautions are taken to protect employees or less. from the hazardous effects of the wind.

796

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00806 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

Immediately dangerous to life or health § 1910.332(b)(3) of this part for information re- (IDLH) means any condition that poses garding the training an employee must have an immediate or delayed threat to life to be considered a qualified employee under or that would cause irreversible ad- §§ 1910.331 through 1910.335 of this part.) verse health effects or that would Line-clearance tree trimming. The interfere with an individual’s ability to pruning, trimming, repairing, main- escape unaided from a permit space. taining, removing, or clearing of trees or the cutting of brush that is within 10 NOTE: Some materials—hydrogen fluoride gas and cadmium vapor, for example—may feet (305 cm) of electric supply lines produce immediate transient effects that, and equipment. even if severe, may pass without medical at- Lines—(1) Communication lines. The tention, but are followed by sudden, possibly conductors and their supporting or fatal collapse 12–72 hours after exposure. The containing structures which are used victim ‘‘feels normal’’ from recovery from for public or private signal or commu- transient effects until collapse. Such mate- nication service, and which operate at rials in hazardous quantities are considered potentials not exceeding 400 volts to to be ‘‘immediately’’ dangerous to life or health. ground or 750 volts between any two points of the circuit, and the trans- Insulated. Separated from other con- mitted power of which does not exceed ducting surfaces by a dielectric (in- 150 watts. If the lines are operating at cluding air space) offering a high re- less than 150 volts, no limit is placed sistance to the passage of current. on the transmitted power of the sys- NOTE: When any object is said to be insu- tem. Under certain conditions, commu- lated, it is understood to be insulated for the nication cables may include commu- conditions to which it is normally subjected. nication circuits exceeding these limi- Otherwise, it is, within the purpose of this tations where such circuits are also section, uninsulated. used to supply power solely to commu- Insulation (cable). That which is re- nication equipment. lied upon to insulate the conductor NOTE: Telephone, telegraph, railroad sig- from other conductors or conducting nal, data, clock, fire, police alarm, cable tel- parts or from ground. evision, and other systems conforming to Line-clearance tree trimmer. An em- this definition are included. Lines used for ployee who, through related training or signaling purposes, but not included under on-the-job experience or both, is famil- this definition, are considered as electric iar with the special techniques and supply lines of the same voltage. hazards involved in line-clearance tree (2) Electric supply lines. Conductors trimming. used to transmit electric energy and their necessary supporting or con- NOTE 1: An employee who is regularly as- signed to a line-clearance tree-trimming taining structures. Signal lines of more crew and who is undergoing on-the-job train- than 400 volts are always supply lines ing and who, in the course of such training, within this section, and those of less has demonstrated an ability to perform du- than 400 volts are considered as supply ties safely at his or her level of training and lines, if so run and operated through- who is under the direct supervision of a line- out. clearance tree trimmer is considered to be a Manhole. A subsurface enclosure line-clearance tree trimmer for the perform- which personnel may enter and which ance of those duties. is used for the purpose of installing, op- NOTE 2: A line-clearance tree trimmer is not considered to be a ‘‘qualified employee’’ erating, and maintaining submersible under this section unless he or she has the equipment or cable. training required for a qualified employee Manhole steps. A series of steps indi- under paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this section. vidually attached to or set into the However, under the electrical safety-related walls of a manhole structure. work practices standard in subpart S of this Minimum approach distance. The clos- part, a line-clearance tree trimmer is consid- est distance an employee is permitted ered to be a ‘‘qualified employee’’. Tree trim- to approach an energized or a grounded ming performed by such ‘‘qualified employ- ees’’ is not subject to the electrical safety- object. related work practice requirements con- Qualified employee (qualified person). tained in §§ 1910.331 through 1910.335 of this One knowledgeable in the construction part. (See also the note following and operation of the electric power

797

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00807 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

generation, transmission, and distribu- Vented vault. A vault that has provi- tion equipment involved, along with sion for air changes using exhaust flue the associated hazards. stacks and low level air intakes oper- ating on differentials of pressure and NOTE 1: An employee must have the train- ing required by paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this temperature providing for airflow section in order to be considered a qualified which precludes a hazardous atmos- employee. phere from developing. NOTE 2: Except under paragraph (g)(2)(v) of Voltage. The effective (rms) potential this section, an employee who is undergoing difference between any two conductors on-the-job training and who, in the course of or between a conductor and ground. such training, has demonstrated an ability Voltages are expressed in nominal val- to perform duties safely at his or her level of ues unless otherwise indicated. The training and who is under the direct super- vision of a qualified person is considered to nominal voltage of a system or circuit be a qualified person for the performance of is the value assigned to a system or those duties. circuit of a given voltage class for the purpose of convenient designation. The Step bolt. A bolt or rung attached at operating voltage of the system may intervals along a structural member vary above or below this value. and used for foot placement during climbing or standing. APPENDIX A TO § 1910.269—FLOW CHARTS Switch. A device for opening and clos- This appendix presents information, in the ing or for changing the connection of a form of flow charts, that illustrates the circuit. In this section, a switch is un- scope and application of § 1910.269. This ap- derstood to be manually operable, un- pendix addresses the interface between less otherwise stated. § 1910.269 and subpart S of this part System operator. A qualified person (Electrical), between § 1910.269 and § 1910.146 of designated to operate the system or its this part (Permit-required confined spaces), parts. and between § 1910.269 and § 1910.147 of this Vault. An enclosure, above or below part (The control of hazardous energy (lockout/ tagout)). These flow charts provide guidance ground, which personnel may enter and for employers trying to implement the re- which is used for the purpose of install- quirements of § 1910.269 in combination with ing, operating, or maintaining equip- other General Industry Standards contained ment or cable. in part 1910.

798

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00808 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

APPENDIX A–1 TO § 1910.269—APPLICATION OF § 1910.269 AND SUBPART S OF THIS PART TO ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

Is this an electric power generation, transmission, or distribution installation?1

YES NO

Is it a generation §§1910.302 installation? through 1910.308 YES NO

§1910.269(v)2 §1910.269(u)2

1 Electrical installation design requirements only. See Appendix 1B for electrical safety-related work practices. Supplementary electric generating equipment that is used to supply a workplace for emergency, standby, or similar purposes only is not considered to be an electric power generation installation.

2 See Table 1 of Appendix A-2 for requirements that can be met through compliance with Subpart S.

799

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00809 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR ER31JA94.002 § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

APPENDIX A–2 TO § 1910.269—APPLICATION OF § 1910.269 AND SUBPART S OF THIS PART TO ELECTRICAL SAFETY-RELATED WORK PRACTICES

NO Are the employees §§1910.332 "qualified" as defined through in §1910.269(x)? 1910.335

YES

NO Is this an electric Is it a commingled1 power generation, installation? transmission, or distribution YES NO installation? §§1910.332 through YES 1910.335

Does the installation conform to §§1910.302 through 1910.308? OR

NO YES §1910.269 §1910.269 plus §1910.332, §1910.269 §1910.333(a) & (b), and OR §1910.334

§§1910.332 through 1910.335 plus the supplementary requirements of §1910.269 identified in Appendix A-2, Table 1

1 Commingled to the extent that the electric power generation, transmission, or distribution installation poses the greater hazard.

TABLE 1—ELECTRICAL SAFETY-RELATED WORK PRACTICES IN § 1910.269

Compliance with subpart S is considered as compliance with Paragraphs that apply regardless of compliance with subpart § 1910.269 1 S

(d), electric shock hazards only ...... (a)(2) 2 and (a)(3) 2.

800

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00810 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR ER31JA94.003 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

TABLE 1—ELECTRICAL SAFETY-RELATED WORK PRACTICES IN § 1910.269—Continued

Compliance with subpart S is considered as compliance with Paragraphs that apply regardless of compliance with subpart § 1910.269 1 S

(h)(3) ...... (b) 2. (i)(2) ...... (c) 2. (k) ...... (d), other than electric shock hazards. (l)(1) through (l)(4), (l)(6)(i), and (l)(8) through (l)(10) ...... (e). (m) ...... (f). (p)(4) ...... (g). (s)(2) ...... (h)(1) and (h)(2). (u)(1) and (u)(3) through (u)(5) ...... (i)(3) 2 and (i)(4) 2. (v)(3) through (v)(5) ...... (j) 2. (w)(1) and (w)(7) ...... (l)(5) 2, (l)(6)(ii) 2, (l)(6)(iii) 2, and (l)(7) 2. (n) 2. (o) 2. (p)(1) through (p)(3). (q) 2. (r) 2. (s)(1). (t) 2. (u)(2) 2 and (u)(6) 2. (v)(1), (v)(2) 2, and (v)(6) through (v)(12). (w)(2) through (w)(6) 2, (w)(8), and (w)(9) 2. 1 If the electrical installation meets the requirements of §§ 1910.303 through 1910.308 of this part, then the electrical installa- tion and any associated electrical safety-related work practices conforming to §§ 1910.332 through 1910.335 of this part are con- sidered to comply with these provisions of § 1910.269 of this part. 2 These provisions include electrical safety requirements that must be met regardless of compliance with subpart S of this part.

801

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00811 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

APPENDIX A–3 TO § 1910.269—APPLICATION OF § 1910.269 AND SUBPART S OF THIS PART TO TREE-TRIMMING OPERATIONS

NO Neither Isthetreewithin10feet1 §1910.269 nor of an overhead line? Subpart S applies.

YES

Subpart S applies. NO (Employee Istheemployeealine- may not trim clearance tree trimmer? branch within 10 feet1 of YES line.)

§1910.269 applies. (Clearances are specified in §1910.269(r)(1)(iii).)

1 10 feet plus 4 inches for every 10 kilovolts over 50 kilovolts.

802

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00812 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR ER31JA94.004 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

APPENDIX A–4 TO § 1910.269—APPLICATION OF §§ 1910.147, 1910.269 AND 1910.333 TO HAZARDOUS ENERGY CONTROL PROCEDURES (LOCKOUT/TAGOUT)

Is this an electric power generation, transmission, or distribution installation?1

YES NO

YES Is it a generation Is it a commingled2 installation? installation?

YES NO NO

§1910.269(d) Is there a hazard or §1910.269(m) of electric shock? §1910.147

YES NO

§1910.333(b) or §1910.147 §1910.1473

1 If the installation conforms to §§1910.303 through 1910.308, the lockout and tagging procedures of 1910.333(b) may be followed for electric shock hazards.

2 Commingled to the extent that the electric power generation, transmission, or distribution installation poses the greater hazard.

3 §1910.333(b)(2)(iii)(D) and (b)(2)(iv)(B) still apply.

803

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00813 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR ER31JA94.005 § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

APPENDIX A–5 TO § 1910.269—APPLICATION OF §§ 1910.146 AND 1910.269 TO PERMIT-REQUIRED CONFINED SPACES

NO Is this a confined space as defined in §1910.146(b)?1 Neither §1910.146 nor §1910.269(e) YES apply to entry. Is it a permit space as defined in §1910.146(b)? NO YES

NO Does the work performed fall within the scope of §1910.269?

YES

NO Is this space an §1910.146 enclosed space as defined in §1910.269(x)?

YES

NO Are hazards controlled YES §1910.269(e) through measures or required by §1910.269? §1910.146

1 See §1910.146(c) for general non-entry requirements that apply to all confined spaces.

804

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00814 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR ER31JA94.006 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

APPENDIX B TO § 1910.269—WORKING ON NOTE: Wires which are insulated, but not EXPOSED ENERGIZED PARTS otherwise protected, are not considered as guarded. I. Introduction Insulated. Separated from other conducting Electric transmission and distribution line surfaces by a dielectric (including air space) installations have been designed to meet Na- offering a high resistance to the passage of tional Electrical Safety Code (NESC), ANSI current. C2, requirements and to provide the level of NOTE: When any object is said to be insu- line outage performance required by system lated, it is understood to be insulated for the reliability criteria. Transmission and dis- conditions to which it is normally subjected. tribution lines are also designed to with- Otherwise, it is, within the purpose of this stand the maximum overvoltages expected section, uninsulated. to be impressed on the system. Such overvoltages can be caused by such condi- B. Installations Energized at 50 to 300 Volts tions as switching surges, faults, or light- The hazards posed by installations ener- ning. Insulator design and lengths and the gized at 50 to 300 volts are the same as those clearances to structural parts (which, for low found in many other workplaces. That is not voltage through extra-high voltage, or EHV, to say that there is no hazard, but the com- facilities, are generally based on the per- plexity of electrical protection required does formance of the line as a result of contami- not compare to that required for high volt- nation of the insulation or during storms) age systems. The employee must avoid con- have, over the years, come closer to the min- tact with the exposed parts, and the protec- imum approach distances used by workers tive equipment used (such as rubber insu- (which are generally based on non-storm lating gloves) must provide insulation for conditions). Thus, as minimum approach the voltages involved. (working) distances and structural distances (clearances) converge, it is increasingly im- C. Exposed Energized Parts Over 300 Volts portant that basic considerations for estab- AC lishing safe approach distances for per- forming work be understood by the designers Table R–6, Table R–7, and Table R–8 of and the operating and maintenance per- § 1910.269 provide safe approach and working sonnel involved. distances in the vicinity of energized electric The information in this appendix will as- apparatus so that work can be done safely sist employers in complying with the min- without risk of electrical flashover. imum approach distance requirements con- The working distances must withstand the tained in paragraphs (l)(2) and (q)(3) of this maximum transient overvoltage that can section. The technical criteria and method- reach the work site under the working condi- ology presented herein is mandatory for em- tions and practices in use. Normal system ployers using reduced minimum approach design may provide or include a means to distances as permitted in Table R–7 and control transient overvoltages, or temporary Table R–8. This appendix is intended to pro- devices may be employed to achieve the vide essential background information and same result. The use of technically correct technical criteria for the development or practices or procedures to control modification, if possible, of the safe min- overvoltages (for example, portable gaps or imum approach distances for electric trans- preventing the automatic control from initi- mission and distribution live-line work. The ating breaker reclosing) enables line design development of these safe distances must be and operation to be based on reduced tran- undertaken by persons knowledgeable in the sient overvoltage values. Technical informa- techniques discussed in this appendix and tion for U.S. electrical systems indicates competent in the field of electric trans- that current design provides for the fol- mission and distribution system design. lowing maximum transient overvoltage val- ues (usually produced by switching surges): II. General 362 kV and less—3.0 per unit; 552 kV—2.4 per unit; 800 kV—2.0 per unit. A. Definitions Additional discussion of maximum tran- The following definitions from § 1910.269(x) sient overvoltages can be found in paragraph relate to work on or near transmission and IV.A.2, later in this appendix. distribution lines and equipment and the electrical hazards they present. III. Determination of the Electrical Component Exposed. Not isolated or guarded. of Minimum Approach Distances Guarded. Covered, fenced, enclosed, or oth- A. Voltages of 1.1 kV to 72.5 kV erwise protected, by means of suitable covers or casings, barrier rails or screens, mats, or For voltages of 1.1 kV to 72.5 kV, the elec- platforms, designed to minimize the possi- trical component of minimum approach dis- bility, under normal conditions, of dangerous tances is based on American National Stand- approach or accidental contact by persons or ards Institute (ANSI)/American Institute of objects. Electrical Engineers (AIEE) Standard No.4,

805

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00815 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

March 1943, Tables III and IV. (AIEE is the Where: predecessor technical society to the Insti- D = Electrical component of the minimum tute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers approach distance in air in feet (IEEE).) These distances are calculated by V = Maximum rated line-to-ground rms the following formula: max voltage in kV Equation (1)—For voltages of 1.1 kV to 72.5 pu = Maximum transient overvoltage factor kV in per unit SOURCE: AIEE Standard No. 4, 1943. ⎛ Vpu× ⎞ 163. D = ⎜ max ⎟ This formula has been used to generate ⎝ 124 ⎠ Table 1.

TABLE 1—AC ENERGIZED LINE-WORK PHASE-TO-GROUND ELECTRICAL COMPONENT OF THE MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCE—1.1 TO 72.5 KV

Phase to phase voltage Maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage 15,000 36,000 46,000 72,500

3.0 ...... 0.08 0.33 0.49 1.03

NOTE: The distances given (in feet) are for air as the insulating medium and provide no additional clearance for inadvertent movement.

B. Voltages of 72.6 kV to 800 kV D=Electrical component of the minimum ap- proach distance in air in feet For voltages of 72.6 kV to 800 kV, the elec- C=0.01 to take care of correction factors as- trical component of minimum approach dis- sociated with the variation of gap tances is based on ANSI/IEEE Standard 516– sparkover with voltage 1987, ‘‘IEEE Guide for Maintenance Methods a=A factor relating to the saturation of air on Energized Power Lines.’’ This standard at voltages of 345 kV or higher gives the electrical component of the min- pu=Maximum anticipated transient over- imum approach distance based on power fre- voltage, in per unit (p.u.) quency rod-gap data, supplemented with Vmax=Maximum rms system line-to-ground transient overvoltage information and a voltage in kilovolts—it should be the ‘‘ac- saturation factor for high voltages. The dis- tual’’ maximum, or the normal highest tances listed in ANSI/IEEE Standard 516 voltage for the range (for example, 10 per- have been calculated according to the fol- cent above the nominal voltage) lowing formula: SOURCE: Formula developed from ANSI/IEEE Equation (2)—For voltages of 72.6 kV to 800 Standard No. 516, 1987. kV This formula is used to calculate the elec- trical component of the minimum approach D=(C+a)puV max distances in air and is used in the develop- Where: ment of Table 2 and Table 3.

TABLE 2—AC ENERGIZED LINE-WORK PHASE-TO-GROUND ELECTRICAL COMPONENT OF THE MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCE—121 TO 242 KV

Phase to phase voltage Maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage 121,000 145,000 169,000 242,000

2.0 ...... 1.40 1.70 2.00 2.80 2.1 ...... 1.47 1.79 2.10 2.94 2.2 ...... 1.54 1.87 2.20 3.08 2.3 ...... 1.61 1.96 2.30 3.22 2.4 ...... 1.68 2.04 2.40 3.35 2.5 ...... 1.75 2.13 2.50 3.50 2.6 ...... 1.82 2.21 2.60 3.64 2.7 ...... 1.89 2.30 2.70 3.76 2.8 ...... 1.96 2.38 2.80 3.92 2.9 ...... 2.03 2.47 2.90 4.05 3.0 ...... 2.10 2.55 3.00 4.29

NOTE: The distances given (in feet) are for air as the insulating medium and provide no additional clearance for inadvertent movement.

806

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00816 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR ER31JA94.010 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

TABLE 3—AC ENERGIZED LINE-WORK PHASE-TO-GROUND ELECTRICAL COMPONENT OF THE MINIMUM APPROACH DISTANCE—362 TO 800 KV

Phase to phase voltage Maximum anticipated per-unit transient overvoltage 362,000 552,000 800,000

1.5 ...... 4.97 8.66 1.6 ...... 5.46 9.60 1.7 ...... 5.98 10.60 1.8 ...... 6.51 11.64 1.9 ...... 7.08 12.73 2.0 ...... 4.20 7.68 13.86 2.1 ...... 4.41 8.27 ...... 2.2 ...... 4.70 8.87 ...... 2.3 ...... 5.01 9.49 ...... 2.4 ...... 5.34 10.21 ...... 2.5 ...... 5.67 ...... 2.6 ...... 6.01 ...... 2.7 ...... 6.36 ...... 2.8 ...... 6.73 ...... 2.9 ...... 7.10 ...... 3.0 ...... 7.48 ......

NOTE: The distances given (in feet) are for air as the insulating medium and provide no additional clearance for inadvertent movement.

C. Provisions for Inadvertent Movement At voltages below 72.5 kV, the electrical component of the minimum approach dis- The minimum approach distances (working tance is smaller than the ergonomic compo- distances) must include an ‘‘adder’’ to com- nent. At 72.5 kV the electrical component is pensate for the inadvertent movement of the only a little more than 1 foot. An ergonomic worker relative to an energized part or the component of the minimum approach dis- movement of the part relative to the worker. tance is needed that will provide for all the A certain allowance must be made to ac- worker’s unexpected movements. The usual count for this possible inadvertent move- live-line work method for these voltages is ment and to provide the worker with a com- the use of rubber insulating equipment, fre- fortable and safe zone in which to work. A quently rubber gloves. The energized object distance for inadvertent movement (called needs to be far enough away to provide the the ‘‘ergonomic component of the minimum worker’s face with a safe approach distance, approach distance’’) must be added to the as his or her hands and arms are insulated. electrical component to determine the total In this case, 2 feet has been accepted as a safe minimum approach distances used in sufficient and practical value. live-line work. For voltages between 72.6 and 800 kV, there One approach that can be used to estimate is a change in the work practices employed the ergonomic component of the minimum during energized line work. Generally, live- approach distance is response time-distance line tools (hot sticks) are employed to per- analysis. When this technique is used, the form work while equipment is energized. total response time to a hazardous incident These tools, by design, keep the energized is estimated and converted to distance trav- part at a constant distance from the em- elled. For example, the driver of a car takes ployee and thus maintain the appropriate a given amount of time to respond to a minimum approach distance automatically. ‘‘stimulus’’ and stop the vehicle. The elapsed The length of the ergonomic component of time involved results in a distance being the minimum approach distance is also in- travelled before the car comes to a complete fluenced by the location of the worker and stop. This distance is dependent on the speed by the nature of the work. In these higher of the car at the time the stimulus appears. voltage ranges, the employees use work In the case of live-line work, the employee methods that more tightly control their must first perceive that he or she is ap- movements than when the workers perform proaching the danger zone. Then, the worker rubber glove work. The worker is farther responds to the danger and must decelerate from energized line or equipment and needs and stop all motion toward the energized to be more precise in his or her movements part. During the time it takes to stop, a dis- just to perform the work. tance will have been traversed. It is this dis- For these reasons, a smaller ergonomic tance that must be added to the electrical component of the minimum approach dis- component of the minimum approach dis- tance is needed, and a distance of 1 foot has tance to obtain the total safe minimum ap- been selected for voltages between 72.6 and proach distance. 800 kV.

807

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00817 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

Table 4 summarizes the ergonomic compo- shape, dimensions, and separation of the nent of the minimum approach distance for electrodes, and by the characteristics of the the two voltage ranges. applied voltage (wave shape). 2. Atmospheric effect. Flashover for a given TABLE 4—ERGONOMIC COMPONENT OF MINIMUM air gap is inhibited by an increase in the den- APPROACH DISTANCE sity (humidity) of the air. The empirically determined electrical strength of a given gap Voltage range (kV) Distance is normally applicable at standard atmos- (feet) pheric conditions (20 °C, 101.3 kPa, 11 g/cm3 1.1 to 72.5 ...... 2.0 humidity). 72.6 to 800 ...... 1.0 The combination of temperature and air pressure that gives the lowest gap flashover NOTE: This distance must be added to the electrical compo- nent of the minimum approach distance to obtain the full min- voltage is high temperature and low pres- imum approach distance. sure. These are conditions not likely to occur simultaneously. Low air pressure is D. Bare-Hand Live-Line Minimum Approach generally associated with high humidity, and Distances this causes increased electrical strength. An Calculating the strength of phase-to-phase average air pressure is more likely to be as- transient overvoltages is complicated by the sociated with low humidity. Hot and dry varying time displacement between working conditions are thus normally associ- overvoltages on parallel conductors (elec- ated with reduced electrical strength. trodes) and by the varying ratio between the The electrical component of the minimum positive and negative voltages on the two approach distances in Table 1, Table 2, and electrodes. The time displacement causes the Table 3 has been calculated using the max- maximum voltage between phases to be less imum transient overvoltages to determine than the sum of the phase-to-ground withstand voltages at standard atmospheric voltages. The International Electrotechnical conditions. Commission (IEC) Technical Committee 28, 3. Altitude. The electrical strength of an air Working Group 2, has developed the fol- gap is reduced at high altitude, due prin- lowing formula for determining the phase-to- cipally to the reduced air pressure. An in- phase maximum transient overvoltage, based crease of about 3 percent per 300 meters in on the per unit (p.u.) of the system nominal the minimum approach distance for alti- voltage phase-to-ground crest: tudes above 900 meters is required. Table R– pup=pug+1.6. 10 of § 1910.269 presents this information in Where: tabular form. Summary. After taking all these correction pug=p.u. phase-to-ground maximum tran- sient overvoltage factors into account and after considering their interrelationships relative to the air pup=p.u. phase-to-phase maximum transient overvoltage gap insulation strength and the conditions under which live work is performed, one This value of maximum anticipated tran- finds that only a correction for altitude need sient overvoltage must be used in Equation be made. An elevation of 900 meters is estab- (2) to calculate the phase-to-phase minimum lished as the base elevation, and the values approach distances for live-line bare-hand of the electrical component of the minimum work. approach distances has been derived with this correction factor in mind. Thus, the val- E. Compiling the Minimum Approach ues used for elevations below 900 meters are Distance Tables conservative without any change; correc- For each voltage involved, the distance in tions have to be made only above this base Table 4 in this appendix has been added to elevation. the distance in Table 1, Table 2 or Table 3 in this appendix to determine the resulting IV. Determination of Reduced Minimum minimum approach distances in Table R–6, Approach Distances Table R–7, and Table R–8 in § 1910.269. A. Factors Affecting Voltage Stress at the F. Miscellaneous Correction Factors Work Site The strength of an air gap is influenced by 1. System voltage (nominal). The nominal the changes in the air medium that forms system voltage range sets the absolute lower the insulation. A brief discussion of each fac- limit for the minimum approach distance. tor follows, with a summary at the end. The highest value within the range, as given 1. Dielectric strength of air. The dielectric in the relevant table, is selected and used as strength of air in a uniform electric field at a reference for per unit calculations. standard atmospheric conditions is approxi- 2. Transient overvoltages. Transient mately 31 kV (crest) per cm at 60 Hz. The dis- overvoltages may be generated on an elec- ruptive gradient is affected by the air pres- trical system by the operation of switches or sure, temperature, and humidity, by the breakers, by the occurrence of a fault on the

808

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00818 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

line or circuit being worked or on an adja- with broken skirts is reduced. Broken units cent circuit, and by similar activities. Most may have lost up to 70% of their withstand of the overvoltages are caused by switching, capacity. Because the insulating capability and the term ‘‘switching surge’’ is often used of a broken unit cannot be determined with- to refer generically to all types of out testing it, damaged units in an insulator overvoltages. However, each overvoltage has are usually considered to have no insulating an associated transient voltage wave shape. value. Additionally, the overall insulating The wave shape arriving at the site and its strength of a string with broken units may magnitude vary considerably. be further reduced in the presence of a live- The information used in the development of the minimum approach distances takes line tool alongside it. The number of good into consideration the most common wave units that must be present in a string is shapes; thus, the required minimum ap- based on the maximum overvoltage possible proach distances are appropriate for any at the worksite. transient overvoltage level usually found on electric power generation, transmission, and B. Minimum Approach Distances Based on distribution systems. The values of the per Known Maximum Anticipated Per-Unit unit (p.u.) voltage relative to the nominal Transient Overvoltages maximum voltage are used in the calcula- 1. Reduction of the minimum approach dis- tion of these distances. tance for AC systems. When the transient 3. Typical magnitude of overvoltages. The overvoltage values are known and supplied magnitude of typical transient overvoltages is given in Table 5. by the employer, Table R–7 and Table R–8 of 4. Standard deviation—air-gap withstand. § 1910.269 allow the minimum approach dis- For each air gap length, and under the same tances from energized parts to be reduced. In atmospheric conditions, there is a statistical order to determine what this maximum over- variation in the breakdown voltage. The voltage is, the employer must undertake an probability of the breakdown voltage is as- engineering analysis of the system. As a re- sumed to have a normal (Gaussian) distribu- sult of this engineering study, the employer tion. The standard deviation of this distribu- must provide new live work procedures, re- tion varies with the wave shape, gap geom- flecting the new minimum approach dis- etry, and atmospheric conditions. The with- tances, the conditions and limitations of ap- stand voltage of the air gap used in calcu- plication of the new minimum approach dis- lating the electrical component of the min- tances, and the specific practices to be used imum approach distance has been set at when these procedures are implemented. three standard deviations (3 1) below the s 2. Calculation of reduced approach distance critical flashover voltage. (The critical values. The following method of calculating flashover voltage is the crest value of the impulse wave that, under specified condi- reduced minimum approach distances is tions, causes flashover on 50 percent of the based on ANSI/IEEE Standard 516: applications. An impulse wave of three Step 1. Determine the maximum voltage standard deviations below this value, that is, (with respect to a given nominal voltage the withstand voltage, has a probability of range) for the energized part. flashover of approximately 1 in 1000.) Step 2. Determine the maximum transient overvoltage (normally a switching surge) TABLE 5—MAGNITUDE OF TYPICAL TRANSIENT that can be present at the work site during OVERVOLTAGES work operation. Step 3. Determine the technique to be used Mag- nitude to control the maximum transient over- Cause (per voltage. (See paragraphs IV.C and IV.D of unit) this appendix.) Determine the maximum Energized 200 mile line without closing resistors ... 3.5 voltage that can exist at the work site with Energized 200 mile line with one step closing re- that form of control in place and with a con- sistor ...... 2.1 fidence level of 3s. This voltage is considered Energized 200 mile line with multi-step resistor ..... 2.5 to be the withstand voltage for the purpose Reclosed with trapped charge one step resistor .... 2.2 of calculating the appropriate minimum ap- Opening surge with single restrike ...... 3.0 Fault initiation unfaulted phase ...... 2.1 proach distance. Fault initiation adjacent circuit ...... 2.5 Step 4. Specify in detail the control tech- Fault clearing ...... 1.7–1.9 nique to be used, and direct its implementa- Source: ANSI/IEEE Standard No. 516, 1987. tion during the course of the work. Step 5. Using the new value of transient 5. Broken Insulators. Tests have shown that the insulation strength of an insulator string overvoltage in per unit (p.u.), determine the required phase-to-ground minimum approach distance from Table R–7 or Table R–8 of 1 Sigma, s, is the symbol for standard devi- § 1910.269. ation.

809

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00819 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

C. Methods of Controlling Possible Transient resters has not been used to reduce the Overvoltage Stress Found on a System length of the insulator string, it may be used to reduce the minimum approach distance 1. Introduction. There are several means of instead. 3 controlling overvoltages that occur on trans- mission systems. First, the operation of cir- 4. Switching Restrictions. Another form of cuit breakers or other switching devices may overvoltage control is the establishment of be modified to reduce switching transient switching restrictions, under which breakers overvoltages. Second, the overvoltage itself are not permitted to be operated until cer- may be forcibly held to an acceptable level tain system conditions are satisfied. Restric- by means of installation of surge arresters at tion of switching is achieved by the use of a the specific location to be protected. Third, tagging system, similar to that used for a the transmission system may be changed to ‘‘permit’’, except that the common term minimize the effect of switching operations. used for this activity is a ‘‘hold-off’’ or ‘‘re- 2. Operation of circuit breakers.2 The max- striction’’. These terms are used to indicate imum transient overvoltage that can reach that operation is not prevented, but only the work site is often due to switching on modified during the live-work activity. the line on which work is being performed. If the automatic-reclosing is removed during D. Minimum Approach Distance Based on energized line work so that the line will not Control of Voltage Stress (Overvoltages) at be re-energized after being opened for any the Work Site. reason, the maximum switching surge over- Reduced minimum approach distances can voltage is then limited to the larger of the be calculated as follows: opening surge or the greatest possible fault- 1. First Method—Determining the reduced generated surge, provided that the devices minimum approach distance from a given with- (for example, insertion resistors) are oper- stand voltage.4 able and will function to limit the transient Step 1. Select the appropriate withstand overvoltage. It is essential that the oper- voltage for the protective gap based on sys- ating ability of such devices be assured when tem requirements and an acceptable prob- they are employed to limit the overvoltage ability of actual gap flashover. level. If it is prudent not to remove the re- Step 2. Determine a gap distance that pro- closing feature (because of system operating vides a withstand voltage 5 greater than or conditions), other methods of controlling the equal to the one selected in the first step. 6 switching surge level may be necessary. Transient surges on an adjacent line, par- Step 3. Using 110 percent of the gap’s crit- ticularly for double circuit construction, ical flashover voltage, determine the elec- may cause a significant overvoltage on the trical component of the minimum approach line on which work is being performed. The distance from Equation (2) or Table 6, which coupling to adjacent lines must be accounted is a tabulation of distance vs. withstand for when minimum approach distances are voltage based on Equation (2). calculated based on the maximum transient Step 4. Add the 1-foot ergonomic compo- overvoltage. nent to obtain the total minimum approach 3. Surge arresters. The use of modern surge distance to be maintained by the employee. arresters has permitted a reduction in the 2. Second Method—Determining the necessary basic impulse-insulation levels of much protective gap length from a desired (reduced) transmission system equipment. The pri- minimum approach distance. mary function of early arresters was to pro- tect the system insulation from the effects 3 Surge arrestor application is beyond the of lightning. Modern arresters not only dis- scope of this appendix. However, if the ar- sipate lightning-caused transients, but may rester is installed near the work site, the ap- also control many other system transients plication would be similar to protective gaps that may be caused by switching or faults. as discussed in paragraph IV.D. of this ap- It is possible to use properly designed ar- pendix. resters to control transient overvoltages 4 Since a given rod gap of a given configu- along a transmission line and thereby reduce ration corresponds to a certain withstand the requisite length of the insulator string. voltage, this method can also be used to de- On the other hand, if the installation of ar- termine the minimum approach distance for a known gap. 2 The detailed design of a circuit inter- 5 The withstand voltage for the gap is equal rupter, such as the design of the contacts, of to 85 percent of its critical flashover voltage. resistor insertion, and of breaker timing con- 6 Switch steps 1 and 2 if the length of the trol, are beyond the scope of this appendix. protective gap is known. The withstand volt- These features are routinely provided as part age must then be checked to ensure that it of the design for the system. Only features provides an acceptable probability of gap that can limit the maximum switching tran- flashover. In general, it should be at least sient overvoltage on a system are discussed 1.25 times the maximum crest operating in this appendix. voltage.

810

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00820 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

Step 1. Determine the desired minimum ap- 3. Sample protective gap calculations. proach distance for the employee. Subtract Problem 1: Work is to be performed on a 500- the 1-foot ergonomic component of the min- kV transmission line that is subject to tran- imum approach distance. sient overvoltages of 2.4 p.u. The maximum Step 2. Using this distance, calculate the operating voltage of the line is 552 kV. De- air gap withstand voltage from Equation (2). termine the length of the protective gap that Alternatively, find the voltage cor- will provide the minimum practical safe ap- 7 responding to the distance in Table 6. proach distance. Also, determine what that Step 3. Select a protective gap distance cor- minimum approach distance is. responding to a critical flashover voltage that, when multiplied by 110 percent, is less Step 1. Calculate the smallest practical than or equal to the withstand voltage from maximum transient overvoltage (1.25 times 8 Step 2. the crest line-to-ground voltage): Step 4. Calculate the withstand voltage of 2 the protective gap (85 percent of the critical 552 kV ××1.25 = 563 kV. flashover voltage) to ensure that it provides 3 an acceptable risk of flashover during the This will be the withstand voltage of the pro- time the gap is installed. tective gap. Step 2. Using test data for a particular pro- TABLE 6—WITHSTAND DISTANCES FOR tective gap, select a gap that has a critical TRANSIENT OVERVOLTAGES flashover voltage greater than or equal to: Withstand 563 kV ÷ 0.85 = 662 kV. distance Crest voltage (kV) (in feet) air For example, if a protective gap with a 4.0- gap foot spacing tested to a critical flashover voltage of 665 kV, crest, select this gap spac- 100 ...... 0.71 150 ...... 1.06 ing. 200 ...... 1.41 Step 3. This protective gap corresponds to a 250 ...... 1.77 110 percent of critical flashover voltage 300 ...... 2.12 value of: 350 ...... 2.47 400 ...... 2.83 450 ...... 3.18 665 kV× 1.10 = 732 kV. 500 ...... 3.54 This corresponds to the withstand voltage 550 ...... 3.89 of the electrical component of the minimum 600 ...... 4.24 650 ...... 4.60 approach distance. 700 ...... 5.17 Step 4. Using this voltage in Equation (2) 750 ...... 5.73 results in an electrical component of the 800 ...... 6.31 minimum approach distance of: 850 ...... 6.91 900 ...... 7.57 950 ...... 8.23 552 kV 1000 ...... 8.94 D =+(0.. 01 0 0006) ×=55 . ft. 1050 ...... 9.65 3 1100 ...... 10.42 1150 ...... 11.18 Step 5. Add 1 foot to the distance cal- 1200 ...... 12.05 culated in step 4, resulting in a total min- 1250 ...... 12.90 imum approach distance of 6.5 feet. 1300 ...... 13.79 1350 ...... 14.70 Problem 2: For a line operating at a max- 1400 ...... 15.64 imum voltage of 552 kV subject to a max- 1450 ...... 16.61 imum transient overvoltage of 2.4 p.u., find a 1500 ...... 17.61 protective gap distance that will permit the 1550 ...... 18.63 use of a 9.0-foot minimum approach distance. Source: Calculations are based on Equation (2). (A minimum approach distance of 11 feet, 3 Note: The air gap is based on the 60-Hz rod-gap withstand inches is normally required.) distance. Step 1. The electrical component of the minimum approach distance is 8.0 feet (9.0– 7 Since the value of the saturation factor, 1.0). a, in Equation (2) is dependent on the max- Step 2. From Table 6, select the withstand imum voltage, several iterative computa- voltage corresponding to a distance of 8.0 tions may be necessary to determine the cor- feet. By interpolation: rect withstand voltage using the equation. A graph of withstand voltage vs. distance is given in ANSI/IEEE Std. 516, 1987. This graph 8 To eliminate unwanted flashovers due to could also be used to determine the appro- minor system disturbances, it is desirable to priate withstand voltage for the minimum have the crest withstand voltage no lower approach distance involved. than 1.25 p.u.

811

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00821 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR ER31JA94.012 ER31JA94.014 ER31JA94.015 § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

the arithmetic sum of the two surges. A gap ⎡ ⎤ (8.00 − 757. ) that is installed within 0.5 mile of the work 900 kV +⎢ 50 × ⎥ = 933 kV. site will protect against such intersecting ⎢ ⎥ (823..− 757) waves. Engineering studies of a particular ⎣ ⎦ line or system may indicate that adequate Step 3. The voltage calculated in Step 2 protection can be provided by even more dis- corresponds to 110 percent of the critical tant gaps. flashover voltage of the gap that should be 3. If protective gaps are used at the work employed. Using test data for a particular site, the work site impulse insulation protective gap, select a gap that has a crit- strength is established by the gap setting. ical flashover voltage less than or equal to: Lightning strikes as much as 6 miles away D = (0.01+0.0006)×732kV÷√2 from the worksite may cause a voltage surge greater than the insulation withstand volt- For example, if a protective gap with a 5.8- foot spacing tested to a critical flashover age, and a gap flashover may occur. The voltage of 820 kV, crest, select this gap spac- flashover will not occur between the em- ing. ployee and the line, but across the protective Step 4. The withstand voltage of this pro- gap instead. tective gap would be: 4. There are two reasons to disable the automatic-reclosing feature of circuit-inter- 820 kV× 0.85 = 697 kV. rupting devices while employees are per- The maximum operating crest voltage would forming live-line maintenance: be: • To prevent the reenergizing of a circuit faulted by actions of a worker, which could 2 possibly create a hazard or compound inju- 552 kV ×=449 kV, ries or damage produced by the original 3 fault; • To prevent any transient overvoltage The crest withstand voltage of the protective gap in per unit is thus: caused by the switching surge that would occur if the circuit were reenergized. 697 kV + 449 kV = 1.55 p.u. However, due to system stability consider- ations, it may not always be feasible to dis- If this is acceptable, the protective gap able the automatic-reclosing feature. could be installed with a 5.8-foot spacing, and the minimum approach distance could APPENDIX C TO § 1910.269—PROTECTION FROM then be reduced to 9.0 feet. STEP AND TOUCH POTENTIALS 4. Comments and variations. The 1-foot ergo- nomic component of the minimum approach I. Introduction distance must be added to the electrical component of the minimum approach dis- When a ground fault occurs on a power tance calculated under paragraph IV.D of line, voltage is impressed on the ‘‘grounded’’ this appendix. The calculations may be var- object faulting the line. The voltage to ied by starting with the protective gap dis- which this object rises depends largely on tance or by starting with the minimum ap- the voltage on the line, on the impedance of proach distance. the faulted conductor, and on the impedance to ‘‘true,’’ or ‘‘absolute,’’ ground represented E. Location of Protective Gaps by the object. If the object causing the fault 1. Installation of the protective gap on a represents a relatively large impedance, the structure adjacent to the work site is an ac- voltage impressed on it is essentially the ceptable practice, as this does not signifi- phase-to-ground system voltage. However, cantly reduce the protection afforded by the even faults to well grounded transmission gap. towers or substation structures can result in 2. Gaps installed at terminal stations of hazardous voltages. 1 The degree of the haz- lines or circuits provide a given level of pro- ard depends upon the magnitude of the fault tection. The level may not, however, extend current and the time of exposure. throughout the length of the line to the worksite. The use of gaps at terminal sta- tions must be studied in depth. The use of 1 This appendix provides information pri- substation terminal gaps raises the possi- marily with respect to employee protection bility that separate surges could enter the from contact between equipment being used line at opposite ends, each with low enough and an energized power line. The information magnitude to pass the terminal gaps without presented is also relevant to ground faults to flashover. When voltage surges are initiated transmission towers and substation struc- simultaneously at each end of a line and tures; however, grounding systems for these travel toward each other, the total voltage structures should be designed to minimize on the line at the point where they meet is the step and touch potentials involved.

812

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00822 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR ER31JA94.016 ER31JA94.018 ER31JA94.019 ER31JA94.020 Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

II. Voltage-Gradient Distribution ferent distances from the ‘‘electrode’’. A per- son could be at risk of injury during a fault A. Voltage-Gradient Distribution Curve simply by standing near the grounding point. The dissipation of voltage from a ground- ‘‘Touch potential’’ is the voltage between ing electrode (or from the grounded end of an the energized object and the feet of a person energized grounded object) is called the in contact with the object. It is equal to the ground potential gradient. Voltage drops as- difference in voltage between the object sociated with this dissipation of voltage are (which is at a distance of 0 feet) and a point called ground potentials. Figure 1 is a typ- some distance away. It should be noted that ical voltage-gradient distribution curve (as- the touch potential could be nearly the full suming a uniform soil texture). This graph voltage across the grounded object if that shows that voltage decreases rapidly with in- object is grounded at a point remote from creasing distance from the grounding elec- the place where the person is in contact with trode. it. For example, a crane that was grounded to the system neutral and that contacted an B. Step and Touch Potentials energized line would expose any person in ‘‘Step potential’’ is the voltage between contact with the crane or its uninsulated the feet of a person standing near an ener- load line to a touch potential nearly equal to gized grounded object. It is equal to the dif- the full fault voltage. ference in voltage, given by the voltage dis- Step and touch potentials are illustrated tribution curve, between two points at dif- in Figure 2.

813

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00823 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

Voltage remote from30 electrode

20

10

0

0246810121416 Distance from rod (ft)

FIGURE 1—TYPICAL VOLTAGE-GRADIENT DISTRIBUTION CURVE

814

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00824 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR ER31JA94.007Figure 1—Typical Voltage-Gradient Distribution Curve Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

C. Protection From the Hazards of Ground- tective measures and can guide the selection Potential Gradients. of appropriate precautions. Several methods may be used to protect An engineering analysis of the power sys- employees from hazardous ground-potential tem under fault conditions can be used to de- gradients, including equipotential zones, in- termine whether or not hazardous step and sulating equipment, and restricted work touch voltages will develop. The result of areas. this analysis can ascertain the need for pro-

815

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00825 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR ER31JA94.008 § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

1. The creation of an equipotential zone dling grounded equipment and conductors will protect a worker standing within it from from hazardous touch potentials. The insu- hazardous step and touch potentials. (See lating equipment must be rated for the high- Figure 3.) Such a zone can be produced est voltage that can be impressed on the through the use of a metal mat connected to grounded objects under fault conditions the grounded object. In some cases, a (rather than for the full system voltage). grounding grid can be used to equalize the 3. Restricting employees from areas where voltage within the grid. Equipotential zones hazardous step or touch potentials could will not, however, protect employees who are arise can protect employees not directly in- either wholly or partially outside the pro- volved in the operation being performed. tected area. Bonding conductive objects in Employees on the ground in the vicinity of the immediate work area can also be used to transmission structures should be kept at a minimize the potential between the objects distance where step voltages would be insuf- and between each object and ground. (Bond- ficient to cause injury. Employees should ing an object outside the work area can in- not handle grounded conductors or equip- crease the touch potential to that object in ment likely to become energized to haz- some cases, however.) ardous voltages unless the employees are 2. The use of insulating equipment, such as within an equipotential zone or are protected rubber gloves, can protect employees han- by insulating equipment.

816

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00826 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.269

817

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00827 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR ER31ja94.009 § 1910.269 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

APPENDIX D TO § 1910.269—METHODS OF E. Knots INSPECTING AND TESTING WOOD POLES One large knot or several smaller ones at I. Introduction the same height on the pole may be evidence of a weak point on the pole. When work is to be performed on a wood pole, it is important to determine the condi- F. Depth of Setting tion of the pole before it is climbed. The Evidence of the existence of a former weight of the employee, the weight of equip- ground line substantially above the existing ment being installed, and other working ground level may be an indication that the stresses (such as the removal or retensioning pole is no longer buried to a sufficient ex- of conductors) can lead to the failure of a de- tent. fective pole or one that is not designed to handle the additional stresses. 1 For these G. Soil Conditions reasons, it is essential that an inspection Soft, wet, or loose soil may not support and test of the condition of a wood pole be any changes of stress on the pole. performed before it is climbed. If the pole is found to be unsafe to climb or H. Burn Marks to work from, it must be secured so that it does not fail while an employee is on it. The Burning from transformer failures or con- pole can be secured by a line truck boom, by ductor faults could damage the pole so that ropes or guys, or by lashing a new pole it cannot withstand mechanical stress alongside it. If a new one is lashed alongside changes. the defective pole, work should be performed III. Testing of Wood Poles from the new one. The following tests, which have been taken II. Inspection of Wood Poles from § 1910.268(n)(3), are recognized as accept- able methods of testing wood poles: Wood poles should be inspected by a quali- fied employee for the following conditions: 2 A. Hammer Test A. General Condition Rap the pole sharply with a hammer weighing about 3 pounds, starting near the The pole should be inspected for buckling ground line and continuing upwards circum- at the ground line and for an unusual angle ferentially around the pole to a height of ap- with respect to the ground. Buckling and odd proximately 6 feet. The hammer will produce angles may indicate that the pole has rotted a clear sound and rebound sharply when or is broken. striking sound wood. Decay pockets will be indicated by a dull sound or a less pro- B. Cracks nounced hammer rebound. Also, prod the The pole should be inspected for cracks. pole as near the ground line as possible using Horizontal cracks perpendicular to the grain a pole prod or a screwdriver with a blade at of the wood may weaken the pole. Vertical least 5 inches long. If substantial decay is ones, although not considered to be a sign of encountered, the pole is considered unsafe. a defective pole, can pose a hazard to the climber, and the employee should keep his or B. Rocking Test her gaffs away from them while climbing. Apply a horizontal force to the pole and at- tempt to rock it back and forth in a direc- C. Holes tion perpendicular to the line. Caution must Hollow spots and woodpecker holes can re- be exercised to avoid causing power lines to duce the strength of a wood pole. swing together. The force may be applied ei- ther by pushing with a pike pole or pulling D. Shell Rot and Decay with a rope. If the pole cracks during the test, it shall be considered unsafe. Rotting and decay are cutout hazards and are possible indications of the age and inter- APPENDIX E TO § 1910.269—REFERENCE nal condition of the pole. DOCUMENTS The references contained in this appendix 1 A properly guyed pole in good condition provide information that can be helpful in should, at a minimum, be able to handle the understanding and complying with the re- weight of an employee climbing it. quirements contained in § 1910.269. The na- 2 The presence of any of these conditions is tional consensus standards referenced in this an indication that the pole may not be safe appendix contain detailed specifications that to climb or to work from. The employee per- employers may follow in complying with the forming the inspection must be qualified to more performance-oriented requirements of make a determination as to whether or not OSHA’s final rule. Except as specifically it is safe to perform the work without taking noted in § 1910.269, however, compliance with additional precautions. the national consensus standards is not a

818

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00828 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.272

substitute for compliance with the provi- ASTM F 914–91, Test Method for Acoustic sions of the OSHA standard. Emission for Insulated Aerial Personnel De- ANSI/SIA A92.2–1990, American National vices. Standard for Vehicle-Mounted Elevating and ASTM F 968–93, Specification for Elec- Rotating Aerial Devices. trically Insulating Plastic Guard Equipment ANSI C2–1993, National Electrical Safety for Protection of Workers. Code. ASTM F 1116–88, Test Method for Deter- ANSI Z133.1–1988, American National mining Dielectric Strength of Overshoe Standard Safety Requirements for Pruning, Footwear. Trimming, Repairing, Maintaining, and Re- ASTM F 1117–87, Specification for Dielec- moving Trees, and for Cutting Brush. tric Overshoe Footwear. ANSI/ASME B20.1–1990, Safety Standard ASTM F 1236–89, Guide for Visual Inspec- for Conveyors and Related Equipment. tion of Electrical Protective Rubber Prod- ANSI/IEEE Std. 4–1978 (Fifth Printing), ucts. IEEE Standard Techniques for High-Voltage ASTM F 1505–94, Standard Specification for Testing. Insulated and Insulating Hand Tools. ANSI/IEEE Std. 100–1988, IEEE Standard ASTM F 1506–94, Standard Performance Dictionary of Electrical and Electronic Specification for Textile Materials for Wear- Terms. ing Apparel for Use by Electrical Workers ANSI/IEEE Std. 516–1987, IEEE Guide for Exposed to Momentary Electric Arc and Re- Maintenance Methods on Energized Power- lated Thermal Hazards. Lines. IEEE Std. 62–1978, IEEE Guide for Field ANSI/IEEE Std. 935–1989, IEEE Guide on Testing Power Apparatus Insulation. Terminology for Tools and Equipment To Be IEEE Std. 524–1992, IEEE Guide to the In- Used in Live Line Working. stallation of Overhead Transmission Line ANSI/IEEE Std. 957–1987, IEEE Guide for Conductors. Cleaning Insulators. IEEE Std. 1048–1990, IEEE Guide for Pro- ANSI/IEEE Std. 978–1984 (R1991), IEEE tective Grounding of Power Lines. Guide for In-Service Maintenance and Elec- trical Testing of Live-Line Tools. IEEE Std. 1067–1990, IEEE Guide for the In- ASTM D 120–87, Specification for Rubber Service Use, Care, Maintenance, and Testing Insulating Gloves. of Conductive Clothing for Use on Voltages ASTM D 149–92, Test Method for Dielectric up to 765 kV AC. Breakdown Voltage and Dielectric Strength [59 FR 4437, Jan. 31, 1994; 59 FR 33658, June 30, of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials at 1994, as amended at 59 FR 4458, Jan. 31, 1994; Commercial Power Frequencies. 59 FR 40729, Aug. 9, 1994; 59 FR 51748, Oct. 12, ASTM D 178–93, Specification for Rubber 1994] Insulating Matting. ASTM D 1048–93, Specification for Rubber § 1910.272 Grain handling facilities. Insulating Blankets. ASTM D 1049–93, Specification for Rubber (a) Scope. This section contains re- Insulating Covers. quirements for the control of grain ASTM D 1050–90, Specification for Rubber dust fires and explosions, and certain Insulating Line Hose. other safety hazards associated with ASTM D 1051–87, Specification for Rubber grain handling facilities. It applies in Insulating Sleeves. addition to all other relevant provi- ASTM F 478–92, Specification for In-Serv- ice Care of Insulating Line Hose and Covers. sions of part 1910 (or part 1917 at ma- ASTM F 479–93, Specification for In-Serv- rine terminals). ice Care of Insulating Blankets. (b) Application. (1) Paragraphs (a) ASTM F 496–93b, Specification for In-Serv- through (n) of this section apply to ice Care of Insulating Gloves and Sleeves. grain elevators, feed mills, flour mills, ASTM F 711–89, Specification for Fiber- rice mills, dust pelletizing plants, dry glass-Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Rod and Tube corn mills, soybean flaking operations, Used in Live Line Tools. ASTM F 712–88, Test Methods for Elec- and the dry grinding operations of trically Insulating Plastic Guard Equipment soycake. for Protection of Workers. (2) Paragraphs (o), (p), and (q) of this ASTM F 819–83a (1988), Definitions of section apply only to grain elevators. Terms Relating to Electrical Protective (c) Definitions. Equipment for Workers. Choked leg means a condition of ma- ASTM F 855–90, Specifications for Tem- terial buildup in the bucket elevator porary Grounding Systems To Be Used on De-Energized Electric Power Lines and that results in the stoppage of material Equipment. flow and bucket movement. A bucket ASTM F 887–91a, Specifications for Per- elevator is not considered choked that sonal Climbing Equipment. has the up-leg partially or fully loaded

819

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00829 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.272 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

and has the boot and discharge cleared the hazards related to dust accumula- allowing bucket movement. tions and common ignition sources Flat storage structure means a grain such as smoking; and, storage building or structure that will (ii) Specific procedures and safety not empty completely by gravity, has practices applicable to their job tasks an unrestricted ground level opening including but not limited to, cleaning for entry, and must be entered to re- procedures for grinding equipment, claim the residual grain using powered clearing procedures for choked legs, equipment or manual means. housekeeping procedures, hot work Fugitive grain dust means combustible procedures, preventive maintenance dust particles, emitted from the stock procedures and lock-out/tag-out proce- handling system, of such size as will dures. pass through a U.S. Standard 40 mesh (2) Employees assigned special tasks, sieve (425 microns or less). such as bin entry and handling of flam- Grain elevator means a facility en- mable or toxic substances, shall be pro- gaged in the receipt, handling, storage, vided training to perform these tasks and shipment of bulk raw agricultural safely. commodities such as corn, wheat, oats, barley, sunflower seeds, and soybeans. NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (e)(2): Training for an employee who enters grain storage struc- Hot work means work involving elec- tures includes training about engulfment tric or gas welding, cutting, brazing, or and mechanical hazards and how to avoid similar flame producing operations. them. Inside bucket elevator means a bucket elevator that has the boot and more (f) Hot work permit. (1) The employer than 20 percent of the total leg height shall issue a permit for all hot work, (above grade or ground level) inside the with the following exceptions: grain elevator structure. Bucket ele- (i) Where the employer or the em- vators with leg casings that are inside ployer’s representative (who would oth- (and pass through the roofs) of rail or erwise authorize the permit) is present truck dump sheds with the remainder while the hot work is being performed; of the leg outside of the grain elevator (ii) In welding shops authorized by structure, are not considered inside the employer; bucket elevators. (iii) In hot work areas authorized by Jogging means repeated starting and the employer which are located outside stopping of drive motors in an attempt of the grain handling structure. to clear choked legs. (2) The permit shall certify that the Lagging means a covering on drive requirements contained in § 1910.252(a) pulleys used to increase the coefficient have been implemented prior to begin- of friction between the pulley and the ning the hot work operations. The per- belt. mit shall be kept on file until comple- Permit means the written certifi- tion of the hot work operations. cation by the employer authorizing (g) Entry into grain storage structures. employees to perform identified work This paragraph applies to employee operations subject to specified pre- entry into bins, silos , tanks, and other cautions. grain storage structures. Exception: (d) Emergency action plan. The em- Entry through unrestricted ground ployer shall develop and implement an level openings into flat storage struc- emergency action plan meeting the re- tures in which there are no toxicity, quirements contained in 29 CFR 1910.38. flammability, oxygen-deficiency, or (e)Training. (1) The employer shall other atmospheric hazards is covered provide training to employees at least by paragraph (h) of this section. For annually and when changes in job as- the purposes of this paragraph (g), the signment will expose them to new haz- term ‘‘grain’’ includes raw and proc- ards. Current employees, and new em- essed grain and grain products in facili- ployees prior to starting work, shall be ties within the scope of paragraph trained in at least the following: (b)(1) of this section. (i) General safety precautions associ- (1) The following actions shall be ated with the facility, including rec- taken before employees enter bins, ognition and preventive measures for silos, or tanks:

820

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00830 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.272

(i) The employer shall issue a permit (iv) ‘‘Walking down grain’’ and simi- for entering bins, silos, or tanks unless lar practices where an employee walks the employer or the employer’s rep- on grain to make it flow within or out resentative (who would otherwise au- from a grain storage structure, or thorize the permit) is present during where an employee is on moving grain, the entire operation. The permit shall are prohibited. certify that the precautions contained (2) Whenever an employee enters a in this paragraph (§ 1910.272(g)) have grain storage structure from a level at been implemented prior to employees or above the level of the stored grain or entering bins, silos or tanks. The per- grain products, or whenever an em- mit shall be kept on file until comple- ployee walks or stands on or in stored tion of the entry operations. grain of a depth which poses an engulf- (ii) All mechanical, electrical, hy- ment hazard, the employer shall equip draulic, and pneumatic equipment the employee with a body harness with which presents a danger to employees lifeline, or a boatswain’s chair that inside grain storage structures shall be meets the requirements of subpart D of deenergized and shall be disconnected, this part. The lifeline shall be so posi- locked-out and tagged, blocked-off, or tioned, and of sufficient length, to pre- otherwise prevented from operating by vent the employee from sinking further other equally effective means or meth- than waist-deep in the grain. Exception: ods. Where the employer can demonstrate (iii) The atmosphere within a bin, that the protection required by this silo, or tank shall be tested for the presence of combustible gases, vapors, paragraph is not feasible or creates a and toxic agents when the employer greater hazard, the employer shall pro- has reason to believe they may be vide an alternative means of protection present. Additionally, the atmosphere which is demonstrated to prevent the within a bin, silo, or tank shall be test- employee from sinking further than ed for oxygen content unless there is waist-deep in the grain. continuous natural air movement or NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (g)(2): When the em- continuous forced-air ventilation be- ployee is standing or walking on a surface fore and during the period employees which the employer demonstrates is free are inside. If the oxygen level is less from engulfment hazards, the lifeline or al- than 19.5%, or if combustible gas or ternative means may be disconnected or re- vapor is detected in excess of 10% of moved. the lower flammable limit, or if toxic (3) An observer, equipped to provide agents are present in excess of the ceil- assistance, shall be stationed outside ing values listed in subpart Z of 29 CFR the bin, silo, or tank being entered by part 1910, or if toxic agents are present an employee. Communications (visual, in concentrations that will cause voice, or signal line) shall be main- health effects which prevent employees tained between the observer and em- from effecting self-rescue or commu- nication to obtain assistance, the fol- ployee entering the bin, silo, or tank. lowing provisions apply. (4) The employer shall provide equip- (A) Ventilation shall be provided ment for rescue operations which is until the unsafe condition or condi- specifically suited for the bin, silo, or tions are eliminated, and the ventila- tank being entered. tion shall be continued as long as there (5) The employee acting as observer is a possibility of recurrence of the un- shall be trained in rescue procedures, safe condition while the bin, silo, or including notification methods for ob- tank is occupied by employees. taining additional assistance. (B) If toxicity or oxygen deficiency (6) Employees shall not enter bins, cannot be eliminated by ventilation, silos, or tanks underneath a bridging employees entering the bin, silo, or condition, or where a buildup of grain tank shall wear an appropriate res- products on the sides could fall and pirator. Respirator use shall be in ac- bury them. cordance with the requirements of (h) Entry into flat storage structures. § 1910.134. For the purposes of this paragraph (h),

821

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00831 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.272 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

the term ‘‘grain’’ means raw and proc- (2) In addition, the housekeeping pro- essed grain and grain products in facili- gram for grain elevators shall address ties within the scope of paragraph fugitive grain dust accumulations at (b)(1) of this section. priority housekeeping areas. (1) Each employee who walks or (i) Priority housekeeping areas shall stands on or in stored grain, where the include at least the following: depth of the grain poses an engulfment (A) Floor areas within 35 feet (10.7 m) hazard, shall be equipped with a life- of inside bucket elevators; line or alternative means which the (B) Floors of enclosed areas con- employer demonstrates will prevent taining grinding equipment; the employee from sinking further (C) Floors of enclosed areas con- than waist-deep into the grain. taining grain dryers located inside the NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (h)(1): When the em- facility. ployee is standing or walking on a surface (ii) The employer shall immediately which the employer demonstrates is free remove any fugitive grain dust accu- from engulfment hazards, the lifeline or al- mulations whenever they exceed 1⁄8 ternative means may be disconnected or re- inch (.32 cm) at priority housekeeping moved. areas, pursuant to the housekeeping (2)(i) Whenever an employee walks or program, or shall demonstrate and as- stands on or in stored grain or grain sure, through the development and im- products of a depth which poses an en- plementation of the housekeeping pro- gulfment hazard, all equipment which gram, that equivalent protection is presents a danger to that employee provided. (such as an auger or other grain trans- (3) The use of compressed air to blow port equipment) shall be deenergized, dust from ledges, walls, and other areas and shall be disconnected, locked-out shall only be permitted when all ma- and tagged, blocked-off, or otherwise chinery that presents an ignition prevented from operating by other source in the area is shut-down, and all equally effective means or methods. other known potential ignition sources (ii) ‘‘Walking down grain’’ and simi- in the area are removed or controlled. lar practices where an employee walks (4) Grain and product spills shall not on grain to make it flow within or out be considered fugitive grain dust accu- from a grain storage structure, or mulations. However, the housekeeping where an employee is on moving grain, program shall address the procedures are prohibited. for removing such spills from the work (3) No employee shall be permitted to area. be either underneath a bridging condi- (k) Grate openings. Receiving-pit feed tion, or in any other location where an openings, such as truck or railcar re- accumulation of grain on the sides or ceiving-pits, shall be covered by grates. elsewhere could fall and engulf that The width of openings in the grates employee. shall be a maximum of 21⁄2 inches (6.35 (i) Contractors. (1) The employer shall cm). inform contractors performing work at (l) Filter collectors. (1) All fabric dust the grain handling facility of known filter collectors which are a part of a potential fire and explosion hazards re- pneumatic dust collection system shall lated to the contractor’s work and be equipped with a monitoring device work area. The employer shall also in- that will indicate a pressure drop form contractors of the applicable safe- across the surface of the filter. ty rules of the facility. (2) Filter collectors installed after (2) The employer shall explain the ap- March 30, 1988 shall be: plicable provisions of the emergency (i) Located outside the facility; or action plan to contractors. (ii) Located in an area inside the fa- (j) Housekeeping. (1) The employer cility protected by an explosion sup- shall develop and implement a written pression system; or housekeeping program that establishes (iii) Located in an area inside the fa- the frequency and method(s) deter- cility that is separated from other mined best to reduce accumulations of areas of the facility by construction fugitive grain dust on ledges, floors, having at least a one hour fire-resist- equipment, and other exposed surfaces. ance rating, and which is adjacent to

822

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00832 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.272

an exterior wall and vented to the out- (2) The employer shall provide at side. The vent and ductwork shall be least one means of emergency escape in designed to resist rupture due to defla- tunnels of existing grain elevators. gration. Tunnels in grain elevators constructed (m) Preventive maintenance. (1) The after the effective date of this standard employer shall implement preventive shall be provided with at least two maintenance procedures consisting of: means of emergency escape. (i) Regularly scheduled inspections of (p) Continuous-flow bulk raw grain at least the mechanical and safety con- dryers. (1) All direct-heat grain dryers trol equipment associated with dryers, shall be equipped with automatic con- grain stream processing equipment, trols that: dust collection equipment including (i) Will shut-off the fuel supply in filter collectors, and bucket elevators; case of power or flame failure or inter- (ii) Lubrication and other appro- ruption of air movement through the priate maintenance in accordance with exhaust fan; and, manufacturers’ recommendations, or (ii) Will stop the grain from being fed as determined necessary by prior oper- into the dryer if excessive temperature ating records. occurs in the exhaust of the drying sec- (2) The employer shall promptly cor- tion. rect dust collection systems which are (2) Direct-heat grain dryers installed malfunctioning or which are operating after March 30, 1988 shall be: below designed efficiency. Addition- (i) Located outside the grain eleva- ally, the employer shall promptly cor- tor; or rect, or remove from service, over- (ii) Located in an area inside the heated bearings and slipping or mis- grain elevator protected by a fire or ex- aligned belts associated with inside plosion suppression system; or bucket elevators. (iii) Located in an area inside the (3) A certification record shall be grain elevator which is separated from maintained of each inspection, per- other areas of the facility by construc- formed in accordance with this para- tion having at least a one hour fire-re- graph (m), containing the date of the sistance rating. inspection, the name of the person who (q) Inside bucket elevators. (1) Bucket performed the inspection and the serial elevators shall not be jogged to free a number, or other identifier, of the choked leg. equipment specified in paragraph (2) All belts and lagging purchased (m)(1)(i) of this section that was in- after March 30, 1988 shall be conduc- spected. tive. Such belts shall have a surface (4) The employer shall implement electrical resistance not to exceed 300 procedures for the use of tags and locks megohms. which will prevent the inadvertent ap- (3) All bucket elevators shall be plication of energy or motion to equip- equipped with a means of access to the ment being repaired, serviced, or ad- head pulley section to allow inspection justed, which could result in employee of the head pulley, lagging, belt, and injury. Such locks and tags shall be re- discharge throat of the elevator head. moved in accordance with established The boot section shall also be provided procedures only by the employee in- with a means of access for clean-out of stalling them or, if unavailable, by his the boot and for inspection of the boot, or her supervisor. pulley, and belt. (n) Grain stream processing equipment. (4) All the employer shall: The employer shall equip grain stream (i) Mount bearings externally to the processing equipment (such as hammer leg casing; or, mills, grinders, and pulverizers) with (ii) Provide vibration monitoring, an effective means of removing ferrous temperature monitoring, or other material from the incoming grain means to monitor the condition of stream. those bearings mounted inside or par- (o) Emergency escape. (1) The em- tially-inside the leg casing. ployer shall provide at least two means (5) All the employer shall equip buck- of emergency escape from galleries (bin et elevators with a motion detection decks). device which will shut-down the bucket

823

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00833 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.272 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

elevator when the belt speed is reduced 2. Emergency Action Plan by no more than 20% of the normal op- The standard requires the employer to de- erating speed. velop and implement an emergency action (6) All the employer shall: plan. The emergency action plan (§ 1910.38) (i) Equip bucket elevators with a belt covers those designated actions employers and employees are to take to ensure em- alignment monitoring device which ployee safety from fire and other emer- will initiate an alarm to employees gencies. The plan specifies certain minimum when the belt is not tracking properly; elements which are to be addressed. These or, elements include the establishment of an (ii) Provide a means to keep the belt employee alarm system, the development of tracking properly, such as a system evacuation procedures, and training employ- ees in those actions they are to take during that provides constant alignment ad- an emergency. justment of belts. The standard does not specify a particular (7) Paragraphs (q)(5) and (q)(6) of this method for notifying employees of an emer- section do not apply to grain elevators gency. Public announcement systems, air having a permanent storage capacity of horns, steam whistles, a standard fire alarm less than one million bushels, provided system, or other types of employee alarm may be used. However, employers should be that daily visual inspection is made of aware that employees in a grain facility may bucket movement and tracking of the have difficulty hearing an emergency alarm, belt. or distinguishing an emergency alarm from (8) Paragraphs (q)(4), (q)(5), and (q)(6) other audible signals at the facility, or both. of this section do not apply to the fol- Therefore, it is important that the type of lowing: employee alarm used be distinguishable and distinct. (i) Bucket elevators which are The use of floor plans or workplace maps equipped with an operational fire and which clearly show the emergency escape explosion suppression system capable routes should be included in the emergency of protecting at least the head and boot action plan; color coding will aid employees section of the bucket elevator; or, in determining their route assignments. The (ii) Bucket elevators which are employer should designate a safe area, out- equipped with pneumatic or other dust side the facility, where employees can con- gregate after evacuation, and implement control systems or methods that keep procedures to account for all employees after the dust concentration inside the buck- emergency evacuation has been completed. et elevator at least 25% below the It is also recommended that employers lower explosive limit at all times dur- seek the assistance of the local fire depart- ing operations. ment for the purpose of preplanning for emergencies. Preplanning is encouraged to NOTE: The following appendices to § 1910.272 facilitate coordination and cooperation be- serve as nonmandatory guidelines to assist tween facility personnel and those who may employers and employees in complying with be called upon for assistance during an emer- the requirements of this section, as well as gency. It is important for emergency service to provide other helpful information. units to be aware of the usual work locations No additional burdens are imposed through of employees at the facility. these appendices. 3. Training APPENDIX A TO § 1910.272 GRAIN HANDLING It is important that employees be trained FACILITIES in the recognition and prevention of hazards Examples presented in this appendix may associated with grain facilities, especially not be the only means of achieving the per- those hazards associated with their own formance goals in the standard. work tasks. Employees should understand the factors which are necessary to produce a 1. Scope and Application fire or explosion, i.e., fuel (such as grain dust), oxygen, ignition source, and (in the The provisions of this standard apply in case of explosions) confinement. Employees addition to any other applicable require- should be made aware that any efforts they ments of this part 1910 (or part 1917 at ma- make to keep these factors from occurring rine terminals). The standard contains re- simultaneously will be an important step in quirements for new and existing grain han- reducing the potential for fires and explo- dling facilities. The standard does not apply sions. to seed plants which handle and prepare The standard provides flexibility for the seeds for planting of future crops, nor to on- employer to design a training program which farm storage or feed lots. fulfills the needs of a facility. The type,

824

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00834 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.272

amount, and frequency of training will need and tanks, OSHA is requiring that the em- to reflect the tasks that employees are ex- ployer issue a permit for entry into bins, pected to perform. Although training is to be silos, and tanks unless the employer (or the provided to employees at least annually, it is employer’s representative who would other- recommended that safety meetings or dis- wise authorize the permit) is present at the cussions and drills be conducted at more fre- entry and during the entire operation. quent intervals. Employees should have a thorough under- The training program should include those standing of the hazards associated with topics applicable to the particular facility, entry into bins, silos, and tanks. Employees as well as topics such as: Hot work proce- are not to be permitted to enter these spaces dures; lock-out/tag-out procedures; bin entry from the bottom when grain or other agri- procedures; bin cleaning procedures; grain cultural products are hung up or sticking to dust explosions; fire prevention; procedures the sides which might fall and injure or kill for handling ‘‘hot grain’’; housekeeping pro- an employee. Employees should be made cedures, including methods and frequency of aware that the atmosphere in bins, silos, and dust removal; pesticide and fumigant usage; tanks can be oxygen deficient or toxic. Em- proper use and maintenance of personal pro- ployees should be trained in the proper tective equipment; and, preventive mainte- methods of testing the atmosphere, as well nance. The types of work clothing should as in the appropriate procedures to be taken also be considered in the program at least to if the atmosphere is found to be oxygen defi- caution against using polyester clothing cient or toxic. When a fumigant has been re- that easily melts and increases the severity cently applied in these areas and entry must of burns, as compared to wool or fire retard- be made, aeration fans should be running ant cotton. continuously to assure a safe atmosphere for In implementing the training program, it those inside. Periodic monitoring of toxic is recommended that the employer utilize levels shuld be done by direct reading instru- films, slide-tape presentations, pamphlets, ments to measure the levels, and, if there is and other information which can be obtained an increase in these readings, appropriate ac- from such sources as the Grain Elevator and tions should be promptly taken. Processing Society, the Cooperative Exten- Employees have been buried and suffocated sion Service of the U.S. Department of Agri- in grain or other agricultural products be- culture, Kansas State University’s Extension cause they sank into the material. There- Grain Science and Industry, and other state fore, it is suggested that employees not be agriculture schools, industry associations, permitted to walk or stand on the grain or union organizations, and insurance groups. other grain product where the depth is great- er than waist high. In this regard, employees 4. Hot Work Permit must use a full body harness or boatswain’s chair with a lifeline when entering from the The implementation of a permit system for top. A winch system with mechanical advan- hot work is intended to assure that employ- tage (either powered or manual) would allow ers maintain control over operations involv- better control of the employee than just ing hot work and to assure that employees using a hand held hoist line, and such a sys- are aware of and utilize appropriate safe- tem would allow the observer to remove the guards when conducting these activities. employee easily without having to enter the Precautions for hot work operations are space. specified in 29 CFR 1910.252(a), and include It is important that employees be trained such safeguards as relocating the hot work in the proper selection and use of any per- operation to a safe location if possible, relo- sonal protective equipment which is to be cating or covering combustible material in worn. Equally important is the training of the vicinity, providing fire extinguishers, employees in the planned emergency rescue and provisions for establishing a fire watch. procedures. Employers should carefully read Permits are not required for hot work oper- § 1910.134(e)(3) and assure that their proce- ations conducted in the presence of the em- dures follow these requirements. The em- ployer or the employer’s authorized rep- ployee acting as observer is to be equipped to resentative who would otherwise issue the provide assistance and is to know procedures permit, or in an employer authorized welding for obtaining additional assistance. The ob- shop or when work is conducted outside and server should not enter a space until ade- away from the facility. quate assistance is available. It is rec- It should be noted that the permit is not a ommended that an employee trained in CPR record, but is an authorization of the em- be readily available to provide assistance to ployer certifying that certain safety pre- those employees entering bins, silos, or cautions have been implemented prior to the tanks. beginning of work operations. 6. Contractors 5. Entry Into Bins, Silos, And Tanks These provisions of the standard are in- In order to assure that employers maintain tended to ensure that outside contractors control over employee entry into bins, silos, are cognizant of the hazards associated with

825

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00835 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.272 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

grain handling facilities, particularly in re- of equipment, checking for dust accumula- lation to the work they are to perform for tions and facilitate cleaning if needed. the employer. Also, in the event of an emer- gency, contractors should be able to take ap- Dust Emissions propriate action as a part of the overall fa- Employers should analyze the entire stock cility emergency action plan. Contractors handling system to determine the location of should also be aware of the employer’s per- dust emissions and effective methods to con- mit systems. Contractors should develop trol or to eliminate them. The employer specified procedures for performing hot work should make sure that holes in spouting, cas- and for entry into bins, silos, and tanks and ings of bucket elevators, pneumatic con- these activities should be coordinated with veying pipes, screw augers, or drag conveyor the employer. Contractors are responsible casings, are patched or otherwise properly for informing their own employees. repaired to prevent leakage. Minimizing free This coordination will help to ensure that falls of grain or grain products by using employers know what work is being per- choke feeding techniques, and utilization of formed at the facility by contractors; where dust-tight enclosures at transfer points, can it is being performed; and, that it is being be effective in reducing dust emissions. performed in a manner that will not endan- Each housekeeping program should specify ger employees. the schedules and control measures which 7. Housekeeping. will be used to control dust emitted from the stock handling system. The housekeeping The housekeeping program is to be de- program should address the schedules to be signed to keep dust accumulations and emis- used for cleaning dust accumulations from sions under control inside grain facilities. motors, critical bearings and other potential The housekeeping program, which is to be ignition sources in the working areas. Also, written, is to specify the frequency and the areas around bucket elevator legs, mill- method(s) used to best reduce dust accumu- ing machinery and similar equipment should lations. be given priority in the cleaning schedule. Ship, barge, and rail loadout and receiving The method of disposal of the dust which is areas which are located outside the facility swept or vacuumed should also be planned. need not be addressed in the housekeeping Dust may accumulate in somewhat inac- program. Additionally, truck dumps which cessible areas, such as those areas where lad- are open on two or more sides need not be ders or scaffolds might be necessary to reach addressed by the housekeeping program. them. The employer may want to consider Other truck dumps should be addressed in the use of compressed air and long lances to the housekeeping program to provide for reg- blow down these areas frequently. The em- ular cleaning during periods of receiving ployer may also want to consider the peri- grain or agricultural products. The house- odic use of water and hoselines to wash down keeping program should provide coverage for these areas. If these methods are used, they all workspaces in the facility and include are to be specified in the housekeeping pro- walls, beams, etc., especially in relation to gram along with the appropriate safety pre- the extent that dust could accumulate. cautions, including the use of personal pro- tective equipment such as eyewear and dust Dust Accumulations respirators. Almost all facilities will require some level Several methods have been effective in of manual housekeeping. Manual house- controlling dust emissions. A frequently keeping methods, such as vacuuming or used method of controlling dust emissions is sweeping with soft bristle brooms, should be a pneumatic dust collection system. How- used which will minimize the possibility of ever, the installation of a poorly designed layered dust being suspended in the air when pneumatic dust collection system has fos- it is being removed. tered a false sense of security and has often The housekeeping program should include led to an inappropriate reduction in manual a contingency plan to respond to situations housekeeping. Therefore, it is imperative where dust accumulates rapidly due to a fail- that the system be designed properly and in- ure of a dust enclosure hood, an unexpected stalled by a competent contractor. Those breakdown of the dust control system, a employers who have a pneumatic dust con- dust-tight connection inadvertently knocked trol system that is not working according to open, etc. expectations should request the engineering The housekeeping program should also design firm, or the manufacturer of the filter specify the manner of handling spills. Grain and related equipment, to conduct an evalua- spills are not considered to be dust accumu- tion of the system to determine the correc- lations. tions necessary for proper operation of the A fully enclosed horizontal belt conveying system. If the design firm or manufacturer of system where the return belt is inside the the equipment is not known, employers enclosure should have inspection access such should contact their trade association for as sliding panels or doors to permit checking recommendations of competent designers of

826

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00836 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.272

pneumatic dust control systems who could standard, unless the employer can dem- provide assistance. onstrate equivalent protection. Employers When installing a new or upgraded pneu- should make every effort to minimize dust matic control system, the employer should accumulations on exposed surfaces since insist on an acceptance test period of 30 to 45 dust is the fuel for a fire or explosion, and it days of operation to ensure that the system is recognized that a 1⁄8 inch dust accumula- is operating as intended and designed. The tion is more than enough to fuel such occur- employer should also obtain maintenance, rences. testing, and inspection information from the manufacturer to ensure that the system will 8. Filter Collectors continue to operate as designed. Proper sizing of filter collectors for the Aspiration of the leg, as part of a pneu- pneumatic dust control system they serve is matic dust collection system, is another ef- very important for the overall effectiveness fective method of controlling dust emissions. of the system. The air to cloth ratio of the Aspiration of the leg consists of a flow of air system should be in accordance with the across the entire boot, which entrains the manufacturer’s recommendations. If higher liberated dust and carries it up the up-leg to ratios are used, they can result in more take-off points. With proper aspiration, dust maintenance on the filter, shorter bag or concentrations in the leg can be lowered sock life, increased differential pressure re- below the lower explosive limit. Where a pro- totype leg installation has been instru- sulting in higher energy costs, and an in- mented and shown to be effective in keeping crease in operational problems. the dust level 25% below the lower explosive A photohelic gauge, magnehelic gauge, or limit during normal operations for the var- manometer, may be used to indicate the ious products handled, then other legs of pressure rise across the inlet and outlet of similar size, capacity and products being the filter. When the pressure exceeds the de- handled which have the same design criteria sign value for the filter, the air volume will for the air aspiration would be acceptable to start to drop, and maintenance will be re- OSHA, provided the prototype test report is quired. Any of these three monitoring de- available on site. vices is acceptable as meeting paragraph Another method of controlling dust emis- (l)(1) of the standard. sions is enclosing the conveying system, The employer should establish a level or pressurizing the general work area, and pro- target reading on the instrument which is viding a lower pressure inside the enclosed consistent with the manufacturer’s rec- conveying system. Although this method is ommendations that will indicate when the effective in controlling dust emissions from filter should be serviced. This target reading the conveying system, adequate access to on the instrument and the accompanying the inside of the enclosure is necessary to fa- procedures should be in the preventive main- cilitate frequent removal of dust accumula- tenance program. These efforts would mini- tions. This is also necessary for those sys- mize the blinding of the filter and the subse- tems called ‘‘self-cleaning.’’ quent failure of the pneumatic dust control The use of edible oil sprayed on or into a system. moving stream of grain is another method There are other instruments that the em- which has been used to control dust emis- ployer may want to consider using to mon- sions. Tests performed using this method itor the operation of the filter. One instru- have shown that the oil treatment can re- ment is a zero motion switch for detecting a duce dust emissions. Repeated handling of failure of motion by the rotary discharge the grain may necessitate additional oil valve on the hopper. If the rotary discharge treatment to prevent liberation of dust. valve stops turning, the dust released by the However, before using this method, operators bag or sock will accumulate in the filter hop- of grain handling facilities should be aware per until the filter becomes clogged. Another that the Food and Drug Administration must instrument is a level indicator which is in- approve the specific oil treatment used on stalled in the hopper of the filter to detect products for food or feed. the buildup of dust that would otherwise As a part of the housekeeping program, cause the filter hopper to be plugged. The in- grain elevators are required to address accu- stallation of these instruments should be in mulations of dust at priority areas using the accordance with manufacturer’s rec- action level. The standard specifies a max- ommendations. imum accumulation of 1⁄8 inch dust, measur- All of these monitoring devices and instru- able by a ruler or other measuring device, ments are to be capable of being read at an anywhere within a priority area as the upper accessible location and checked as fre- limit at which time employers must initiate quently as specified in the preventive main- action to remove the accumulations using tenance program. designated means or methods. Any accumu- Filter collectors on portable vacuum lation in excess of this amount and where no cleaners, and those used where fans are not action has been initiated to implement part of the system, are not covered by re- cleaning would constitute a violation of the quirements of paragraph (l) of the standard.

827

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00837 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.272 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

9. Preventive Maintenance sources, more efficient operations, and, most importantly, safer operations. The control of dust and the control of igni- tion sources are the most effective means for The standard also requires the employer to reducing explosion hazards. Preventive develop and implement procedures con- maintenance is related to ignition sources in sisting of locking out and tagging equipment the same manner as housekeeping is related to prevent the inadvertent application of en- to dust control and should be treated as a ergy or motion to equipment being repaired, major function in a facility. Equipment such serviced, or adjusted, which could result in as critical bearings, belts, buckets, pulleys, employee injury. All employees who have re- and milling machinery are potential ignition sponsibility for repairing or servicing equip- sources, and periodic inspection and lubrica- ment, as well as those who operate the tion of such equipment through a scheduled equipment, are to be familiar with the em- preventive maintenance program is an effec- ployer’s lock and tag procedures. A lock is to tive method for keeping equipment func- be used as the positive means to prevent op- tioning properly and safely. The use of vibra- eration of the disconnected equipment. Tags tion detection methods, heat sensitive tape are to be used to inform employees why or other heat detection methods that can be equipment is locked out. Tags are to meet seen by the inspector or maintenance person requirements in § 1910.145(f). Locks and tags will allow for a quick, accurate, and con- may only be removed by employees that sistent evaluation of bearings and will help placed them, or by their supervisor, to en- in the implementation of the program. sure the safety of the operation. The standard does not require a specific 10. Grain Stream Processing Equipment frequency for preventive maintenance. The employer is permitted flexibility in deter- The standard requires an effective means mining the appropriate interval for mainte- of removing ferrous material from grain nance provided that the effectiveness of the streams so that such material does not enter maintenance program can be demonstrated. equipment such as hammer mills, grinders Scheduling of preventive maintenance and pulverizers. Large foreign objects, such should be based on manufacturer’s rec- as stones, should have been removed at the ommendations for effective operation, as receiving pit. Introduction of foreign objects well as from the employer’s previous experi- and ferrous material into such equipment ence with the equipment. However, the em- can produce sparks which can create an ex- ployer’s schedule for preventive maintenance plosion hazard. Acceptable means for re- should be frequent enough to allow for both moval of ferrous materials include the use of prompt identification and correction of any permanent or electromagnets. Means used to problems concerning the failure or malfunc- separate foreign objects and ferrous material tion of the mechanical and safety control should be cleaned regularly and kept in good equipment associated with bucket elevators, repair as part of the preventive maintenance dryers, filter collectors and magnets. The program in order to maximize their effec- pressure-drop monitoring device for a filter tiveness. collector, and the condition of the lagging on the head pulley, are examples of items that 11. Emergency Escape require regularly scheduled inspections. A The standard specifies that at least two system of identifying the date, the equip- means of escape must be provided from gal- ment inspected and the maintenance per- leries (bin decks). Means of emergency es- formed, if any, will assist employers in con- cape may include any available means of tinually refining their preventive mainte- egress (consisting of three components, exit nance schedules and identifying equipment access, exit, and exit discharge as defined in problem areas. Open work orders where re- § 1910.35), the use of controlled descent de- pair work or replacement is to be done at a vices with landing velocities not to exceed 15 designated future date as scheduled, would ft/sec., or emergency escape ladders from be an indication of an effective preventive galleries. Importantly, the means of emer- maintenance program. It is imperative that the prearranged gency escape are to be addressed in the facil- schedule of maintenance be adhered to re- ity emergency action plan. Employees are to gardless of other facility constraints. The know the location of the nearest means of employer should give priority to the mainte- emergency escape and the action they must nance or repair work associated with safety take during an emergency. control equipment, such as that on dryers, 12. Dryers magnets, alarm and shut-down systems on bucket elevators, bearings on bucket ele- Liquefied petroleum gas fired dryers vators, and the filter collectors in the dust should have the vaporizers installed at least control system. Benefits of a strict preven- ten feet from the dryer. The gas piping sys- tive maintenance program can be a reduc- tem should be protected from mechanical tion of unplanned downtime, improved damage. The employer should establish pro- equipment performance, planned use of re- cedures for locating and repairing leaks

828

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00838 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1910.272

when there is a strong odor of gas or other belt has been tested using one of the above signs of a leak. test methods, and meets the 300 megohm cri- teria, the belt is acceptable as meeting this 13. Inside Bucket Elevators standard. When using conductive belts, the Hazards associated with inside bucket ele- employer should make certain that the head vator legs are the source of many grain ele- pulley and shaft are grounded through the vator fires and explosions. Therefore, to drive motor ground or by some other equally mitigate these hazards, the standard re- effective means. When V-type belts are used quires the implementation of special safety to transmit power to the head pulley assem- precautions and procedures, as well as the bly from the motor drive shaft, it will be installation of safety control devices. The necessary to provide electrical continuity standard provides for a phase-in period for from the head pulley assembly to ground, many of the requirements to provide the em- e.g., motor grounds. ployer time for planning the implementation Employers should also consider purchasing of the requirements. Additionally, for ele- new belts that are flame retardant or fire re- vators with a permanent storage capacity of sistive. A flame resistance test for belts is less than one million bushels, daily visual in- contained in 30 CFR 18.65. spection of belt alignment and bucket move- ment can be substituted for alignment moni- APPENDIX B TO § 1910.272 GRAIN HANDLING toring devices and motion detection devices. FACILITIES The standard requires that belts (pur- chased after the effective date of the stand- National Consensus Standards ard) have surface electrical resistance not to exceed 300 megohms. Test methods available The following table contains a cross-ref- regarding electrical resistance of belts are: erence listing of current national consensus The American Society for Testing and Mate- standards which provide information that rials D257–76, ‘‘Standard Test Methods for D- may be of assistance to grain handling oper- C Resistance or Conductance of Insulating ations. Employers who comply with provi- Materials’’; and, the International Standards sions in these national consensus standards Organization’s #284, ‘‘Conveyor Belts-Elec- that provide equal or greater protection than trical Conductivity-Specification and Meth- those in § 1910.272 will be considered in com- od of Test.’’ When an employer has a written pliance with the corresponding requirements certification from the manufacturer that a in § 1910.272.

Subject National consensus standards

Grain elevators and facilities handling bulk raw agricultural commodities ...... ANSI/NFPA 61B Feed mills ...... ANSI/NFPA 61C Facilities handling agricultural commodities for human consumption ...... ANSI/NFPA 61D Pneumatic conveying systems for agricultural commodities ...... ANSI/NFPA 66 Guide for explosion venting ...... ANSI/NFPA 68 Explosion prevention systems ...... ANSI/NFPA 69 Dust removal and exhaust systems ...... ANSI/NFPA 91

APPENDIX C TO § 1910.272 GRAIN HANDLING Technical Information Service, Springfield, FACILITIES Virginia 22151.) 5. Standard for the Prevention of Fires and References for Further Information Explosions in Grain Elevators and Facilities The following references provide informa- Handling Bulk Raw Agricultural Commodities, tion which can be helpful in understanding NFPA 61B; National Fire Protection Associa- the requirements contained in various provi- tion, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachu- sions of the standard, as well as provide setts 02269. other helpful information. 6. Standard for the Prevention of Fire and 1. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Dust Explosions in Feed Mills, NFPA 61C; Na- Operations; National Safety Council, 425 tional Fire Protection Association, North Michigan Avenue, Chicago, Illinois Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 60611. 2. Practical Guide to Elevator Design; Na- 02269. tional Grain and Feed Association, P.O. Box 7. Standard for the Prevention of Fire and 28328, Washington, DC 20005. Dust Explosions in the Milling of Agricultural 3. Dust Control for Grain Elevators; National Commodities for Human Consumption, NFPA Grain and Feed Association, P.O. Box 28328, 61D; National Fire Protection Association, Washington, DC 20005. Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 4. Prevention of Grain Elevator and Mill Ex- 02269. plosions; National Academy of Sciences, Washington, DC. (Available from National

829

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00839 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR § 1910.301 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)

8. Standard for Pneumatic Conveying Systems 24. Safe and Efficient Elevator Legs for Grain for Handling Feed, Flour, Grain and Other Ag- and Milling Properties; Mill Mutual Fire Pre- ricultural Dusts, NFPA 66; National Fire Pro- vention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 tection Association, Batterymarch Park, West, Itasca, Illinois 60143–1269. Quincy, Massachusetts 02269. 25. Explosion Venting and Supression of 9. Guide for Explosion Venting, NFPA 68; Na- Bucket Elevators; National Grain and Feed tional Fire Protection Association, Association, P.O. Box 28328, Washington, DC Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachusetts 20005. 02269. 26. NFPA 78; Na- 10. Standard on Explosion Prevention Sys- Lightning Protection Code, tems, NFPA 69; National Fire Protection As- tional Fire Protection Association, sociation, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Mas- Batterymarch Park, Quincy, Massachusetts sachusetts 02269. 02269. 11. Safety-Operations Plans; U.S. Depart- 27. Occupational Safety in Grain Elevators, ment of Agriculture, Washington, DC 20250. DHHS (NIOSH) Publication No. 83–126); Na- 12. Inplant Fire Prevention Control Programs; tional Institute for Occupational Safety and Mill Mutual Fire Prevention Mutual Fire Health, Morgantown, West Virginia 26505. Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 28. Retrofitting and Constructing Grain Ele- West, Itasca, Illinois 60143–1269. vators; National Grain and Feed Association, 13. Guidelines for Terminal Elevators; Mill P.O. Box 28328, Washington, DC 20005. Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce 29. Grain Industry Safety and Health Cen- Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143– ter—Training Series (Preventing grain dust 1269. explosions, operations maintenance safety, 14. Standards for Preventing the Horizontal transportation safety, occupational safety and Vertical Spread of Fires in Grain Handling and health); Grain Elevator and Processing Properties; Mill Mutual Fire Mutual Fire Pre- vention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 Society, P.O. Box 15026, Commerce Station, West, Itasca, Illinois 60143–1269. Minneapolis, Minnesota 55415–0026. 15. Belt Conveyors for Bulk Materials, Part I 30. Suggestions for Organized Maintenance; and Part II, Data Sheet 570, Revision A; Na- The Mill Mutuals Loss Control Department, tional Safety Council, 425 North Michigan 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illi- Avenue, Chicago, Illinois 60611. nois 60143–1269. 16. Suggestions for Precautions and Safety 31. Safety—The First Step to Success; The Practices in Welding and Cutting; Mill Mutual Mill Mutual Loss Control Department, 1 Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143–1269. 60143–1269. 17. Food Bins and Tanks, Data Sheet 524; 32. Emergency Plan Notebook; Schoeff, Rob- National Safety Council, 425 North Michigan ert W. and James L. Balding, Kansas State Avenue, Chicago, Illinois 60611. University, Cooperative Extension Service, 18. Pneumatic Dust Control in Grain Ele- Extension Grain Science and Industry, vators; National Academy of Sciences, Wash- Shellenberger Hall, Manhattan, Kansas 66506. ington, DC. (Available from National Tech- nical Information Service, Springfield, Vir- [52 FR 49625, Dec. 31, 1987, as amended at 53 ginia 22151.) FR 17696, May 18, 1988; 54 FR 24334, June 7, 19. Dust Control Analysis and Layout Proce- 1989; 55 FR 25094, June 20, 1990; 61 FR 9242, dures for Grain Storage and Processing Plants; Mar. 7, 1996; 61 FR 9584, Mar. 8, 1996; 67 FR Mill Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 67965, Nov. 7, 2002] Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143–1269. 20. Standard for the Installation of Blower Subpart S—Electrical and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock and Vapor Removal, NFPA 91; National Fire Protection AUTHORITY: Secs. 4, 6, 8, Occupational Safe- Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, ty and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, Massachusetts 02269. 657); Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 8–76 (41 21. Standards for the Installation of Direct FR 25059), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 5–2002 (67 FR Heat Grain Driers in Grain and Milling Prop- 65008), 5–2007 (72 FR 31160), as applicable; 29 erties; Mill Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 CFR part 1911. Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, Itasca, Illinois 60143–1269. SOURCE: 46 FR 4056, Jan. 16, 1981, unless 22. Guidelines for Lubrication and Bearing otherwise noted. Maintenance; Mill Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, GENERAL Itasca, Illinois 60143–1269. 23. Organized Maintenance in Grain and Mill- § 1910.301 Introduction. ing Properties; Mill Mutual Fire Prevention Bureau, 1 Pierce Place, Suite 1260 West, This subpart addresses electrical Itasca, Illinois 60143–1269. safety requirements that are necessary

830

VerDate Nov<24>2008 13:35 Aug 19, 2009 Jkt 217113 PO 00000 Frm 00840 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\217113.XXX 217113 cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR